NS4702 24P 4X Managed Switch User Manual 1073388a

2018-03-22

: Interlogix 1073388A-Ns4702-24P-4X-User-Manual 1073388a-ns4702-24p-4x-user-manual library

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 350 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

NS4702-24P-4X Managed
Switch User Manual
P/N 1073388-EN • REV A • ISS 08FEB18
Copyright
©
2018 United Technologies Corporation.
Interlogix is part of UTC
Climate, Controls & Security, a unit of United Technologies
Corporation
. All rights reserved.
Trademarks and patents
Trade names used in this document may be trademarks or registered trademarks of the
manufacturers or vendors of the respective products.
Manufacturer
Interlogix
2955 Red Hill Avenue, Costa Mesa, CA 92626
-5923, USA
Authorized EU manufacturing representative:
UTC Fire & Security B.V.
Kelvinstraat 7, 6003 DH Weert, The Netherlands
Version
This document applies to
NS4702-24P-4X.
FCC compliance
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
FCC compliance
Class A:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class
A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is
operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction
manual,
may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this
equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the
user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
Canada
This Class A
digital apparatus complies with CAN ICES-003 (A)/NMB-3 (A).
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conforme à la norme CAN ICES
-003
(A)/NMB
-3 (A).
ACMA compliance
Notice!
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause
radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
Certification
EU directives
This product and
- if applicable - the supplied accessories too are marked with "CE" and
comply therefore with the applicable
harmonized European standards listed under the
EMC Directive 2014/30/EU, the RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU.
2012/19
/EU (WEEE directive):
Products marked with this symbol cannot be disposed of
as unsorted municipal waste in the European Union. For proper
recycling, return this
product to your local supplier upon the purchase of equivalent new equipment, or
dispose of it at designated collection points. For more information see:
www.recyclethis.info.
Product warnings and
disclaimers
THESE PRODUCTS ARE
INTENDED FOR SALE TO AND INSTALLATION BY
QUALIFIED PROFESSIONALS. UTC FIRE & SECURITY CANNOT PROVIDE ANY
ASSURANCE THAT ANY PERSON OR ENTITY BUYING ITS PRODUCTS,
INCLUDING ANY “AUTHORIZED DEALER” OR “AUTHORIZED RESELLER”, IS
PROPERLY TRAINED OR EXPERIENCED
TO CORRECTLY INSTALL FIRE AND
SECURITY RELATED PRODUCTS
.
For more information on warranty disclaimers and product safety information, please
check
www.firesecurityproducts.com/policy/product-warning/ or scan the following code:
Contact information and
manuals
For contact information go to:
www.interlogix.com or www.firesecurityproducts.com.
To get translations for this and other product manuals go to:
www.firesecurityproducts.com
.
Content
Important information 3
Chapter 1 Introduction 4
Package contents 4
Product description 5
Product features 13
Product specifications 17
Chapter 2 Installation 20
Hardware description 20
Chapter 3 Switch management 29
Requirements 29
Management access overview 29
Administration console 30
Web management 32
SNMP-based network management 32
Smart discovery utility 33
Chapter 4 Web configuration 34
Main web page 35
System 36
DHCP server 63
UDLD 74
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) 76
Port management 88
Link aggregation 97
VLAN 105
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) 132
Multicast 149
Quality of Service (QoS) 174
Access Control Lists (ACL) 199
Authentication 212
Security 247
MAC address table 264
LLDP 268
Network diagnostics 282
Loop protection 286
RMON 288
Ring 297
Power over Ethernet (PoE) 310
Port identification 324
LCD 324
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 1
Chapter 5 Switch operation 326
Address table 326
Learning 326
Forwarding and filtering 326
Store-and-forward 326
Auto-negotiation 327
Chapter 6 PoE overview 328
What is PoE? 328
PoE system architecture 328
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 330
Appendix A Networking connection 331
Glossary 333
2 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Important information
Limitation of liability
To the maximum extent permitted by applicable law, in no event will UTCFS be liable
for any lost profits or business opportunities, loss of use, business interruption, loss of
data, or any other indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages under any
theory of liability, whether based in contract, tort, negligence, product liability, or
otherwise. Because some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of liability
for consequential or incidental damages the preceding limitation may not apply to you.
In any event the total liability of UTCFS shall not exceed the purchase price of the
product. The foregoing limitation will apply to the maximum extent permitted by
applicable law, regardless of whether UTCFS has been advised of the possibility of
such damages and regardless of whether any remedy fails of its essential purpose.
Installation in accordance with this manual, applicable codes, and the instructions of the
authority having jurisdiction is mandatory.
While every precaution has been taken during the preparation of this manual to ensure
the accuracy of its contents, UTCFS assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions.
Advisory messages
Advisory messages alert you to conditions or practices that can cause unwanted
results. The advisory messages used in this document are shown and described below.
WARNING: Warning messages advise you of hazards that could result in injury or loss
of life. They tell you which actions to take or to avoid in order to prevent the injury or
loss of life.
Caution: Caution messages advise you of possible equipment damage. They tell you
which actions to take or to avoid in order to prevent damage.
Note: Note messages advise you of the possible loss of time or effort. They describe
how to avoid the loss. Notes are also used to point out important information that you
should read.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 3
Chapter 1
Introduction
The IFS NS4702-24P-4X 24-port 10/100/1000Mbps 802.3at PoE + 4-Port 10G SFP+
managed switch with hardware layer 3 IPv4/IPv6 static routing comes with a multi-port
gigabit ethernet switch, SFP fiber optic connectibility, and robust layer 2 features. The
description of this model is as follows:
L2+ 24-port 10/100/1000Mbps 802.3at PoE
+ 4-port 10G shared SFP+
Managed switch with hardware layer 3 IPv4/IPv6 static routing
Unless specified, the term “managed switch” mentioned in this user manual refers to
the NS4702-24P-4X.
Package contents
Open the box of the managed switch and carefully unpack it. The box should contain
the following items:
The managed switch × 1
RJ45 to RS232 cable x 1
Rubber feet x 4
Two rack-mounting brackets with attachment screws x 1
Power cord x 1
SFP dust-proof cap x 4
If any of these are missing or damaged, contact your dealer immediately. If possible,
retain the carton including the original packing materials for repacking the product in
case there is a need to return it to us for repair.
Note: User manuals and install guides are available for download from
www.interlogix.com.
4 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 1: Introduction
Product description
PoE+ managed switch with advanced L2+/L4 switching and security
The NS4702-24P-4X is a cost-optimized, 1.25U, Gigabit PoE+ Managed Switch with an
LCD Touch Screen featuring intelligent PoE functions to improve the availability of
critical business applications. The managed switch provides IPv6/IPv4 dual stack
management and a built-in L2+/L4 Gigabit switching engine along with 24
10/100/1000BASE-T ports featuring 30 W PoEat and four additional 10 gigabit SFP+
ports. With a total power budget of up to 400 W for different kinds of PoE applications,
the managed switch provides a quick, safe, and cost-effective PoE+ network solution
for small businesses and enterprises.
Smart and Intuitive LCD Control
The smart LCD PoE managed switch provides an intuitive touch panel on its front panel
that facilitates the Ethernet PoE PD (powered device) management that greatly
promotes management efficiency in large-scale networks such as enterprises, hotels,
shopping malls, government buildings, and other public areas. They also feature the
following special management and status functions:
• IP address, VLAN and QoS configuration
• PoE management and status
• Port management and status, and SFP information
• Troubleshooting: cable diagnostic and remote IP ping
• Maintenance: reboot, factory default and save configuration
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 5
Chapter 1: Introduction
Built-in unique PoE functions for powered devices management
As a managed PoE switch for surveillance, wireless, and VoIP networks, the NS4702-
24P-4X features the following special PoE management functions:
• PD alive check
• Scheduled power recycling
• PoE schedule
• PoE usage monitoring
Intelligent powered device alive check
The managed switch can be configured to monitor connected PD status in real time via
a ping action. After the PD stops working and responding, the managed switch
resumes the PoE port power and puts the PD back to work. The managed switch
greatly enhances the network reliability through the PoE port resetting the PD’s power
source and reducing the administrator management burden.
6 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 1: Introduction
Scheduled power recycling
The managed switch permits each of the connected PoE IP cameras or PoE wireless
access points to reboot at a specified time each week. This reduces the chance of IP
camera or AP crashes resulting from buffer overflow.
PoE schedule for energy saving
Under the trend of energy saving worldwide and contributing to environmental
protection, the managed switch can effectively control the power supply in addition to
its capability of provideing high Watt power. The “PoE schedule” function helps you to
enable or disable PoE power feeding for each PoE port during specified time intervals,
and is a powerful function to help SMBs or enterprises save power and money. It also
increases security by powering off PDs that should not be in use during non-business
hours.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 7
Chapter 1: Introduction
PoE usage monitoring
Using the power usage chart in the web management interface, the managed switch
allows the administrator to monitor the status of the power usage of the connected PDs
in real time, thus enhancing the management efficiency of the facilities.
Cost-effective 10 Gbps uplink capacity
10G Ethernet is a big leap in the evolution of Ethernet. The four 10G SFP+ slots of the
managed switch support dual-speed 10GBASE-SR/LR or 1000BASE-SX/LX, meaning
the administrator has the flexibility to choose a suitable SFP/SFP+ transceiver
according to the transmission distance or the transmission speed required to extend the
network efficiently. This enables SMB networks to achieve the maximum performance
of 10Gbps in a cost-effective way since the 10GbE interface usually available in a layer
3 switch but layer 3 switch could be too expensive for SMBs.
Environment-friendly, variable fan design for silent operation
The managed switch features a 19-inch metal housing, a low noise design, and an
effective ventilation system. It supports smart fan technology that automatically controls
the speed of the built-in fan to reduce noise and maintain the temperature of the PoE
switch for optimal power output capability. The managed switch operates reliably,
stably, and quietly in any environment without affecting performance.
Solution for IPv6 networking
With the IPv6/IPv4 dual stack and other management functions with user-friendly
interfaces, the managed switch is the best choice for IP surveillance, VoIP, and
wireless service providers to deploy the IPv6 network. More importantly, they help
SMBs upgrade their network infrastructures to the IPv6 era without any monetary
investment.
8 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 1: Introduction
IPv4/IPv6 VLAN routing for secure and flexible management
To help customers stay on top of their businesses, the managed switch not only
provides ultra high transmission performance and excellent layer 2 technologies, but
also a IPv4/IPv6 VLAN routing feature that allows cross over of different VLANs and
different IP addresses for the purpose of having a highly secured, flexible management
and simpler networking application.
Robust layer 2 feature
The managed switch can be programmed for advanced switch management functions
such as dynamic port link aggregation, Q-in-Q VLAN, Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
(MSTP), layer 2 to layer 4 QoS, bandwidth control, and IGMP / MLD snooping. The
managed switch allows the operation of a high-speed trunk combining multiple ports. It
consists of a maximum of 14 trunk groups with four ports for each group, and also
supports fail-over.
Powerful security
The managed switch offers a comprehensive layer 2 to layer 4 Access Control List
(ACL) for enforcing security to the edge. It can be used to restrict network access by
denying packets based on source and destination IP address, TCP/UDP ports, or
defined typical network applications. Its protection mechanism also comprises 802.1x
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 9
Chapter 1: Introduction
port-based and MAC-based user and device authentication. With the private VLAN
function, communication between edge ports can be prevented to ensure user privacy.
Enhanced security and traffic control
The managed switch also provides DHCP snooping, IP source guard, and dynamic
ARP inspection functions to prevent IP snooping from attack and discard ARP packets
with invalid MAC addresses. The network administrator can now construct highly-
secure corporate networks using considerably less time and effort than before.
User-friendly secure management
For efficient management, the managed switch is equipped with console, web, and
SNMP management interfaces. With the built-in web-based management interface, the
managed switch offers an easy-to-use, platform-independent management and
configuration facility. The managed switch supports standard Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMP) and can be managed by any management software
based on the standard SNMP v1 or v2 protocol. For reducing product learning time, the
managed switch offers Cisco-like command via Telnet or console port, and the
customer doesn’t need to learn new commands from these switches. Moreover, the
managed switch offers secure management remotely by supporting SSH, SSL, and
SNMP v3 connections where the packet content can be encrypted at each session.
Intelligent SFP diagnostic mechanism
The managed switch series supports a SFP-DDM (Digital Diagnostic Monitor) function
that can easily monitor real-time parameters of the SFP and SFP+ transceivers, such
as optical output power, optical input power, temperature, laser bias current, and
transceiver supply voltage.
10 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 1: Introduction
Applications
Layer 2+ VLAN static routing application
The managed switch features IEEE 802.3at PoE+ that combines up to 30 W of power
output per port, and a PoE budget of up to 400 W which can deploy up to 24 PoE PD
devices. It also features a built-in, robust IPv4/IPv6 layer 3 traffic static routing protocol
to ensure reliable routing between VLANs and network segments. The routing protocols
can be applied by VLAN interface with up to 32 routing entries.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 11
Chapter 1: Introduction
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol with PoE IP office solution for SMBs and
workgroups
The managed switch features strong, rapid self-recovery capability to prevent
interruptions and external intrusions. It incorporates Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
(802.1s MSTP) into the customer’s automation network to enhance system reliability
and uptime. Adopting the IEEE 802.3af/802.3at PoE standard, the managed switch can
directly connect with any IEEE 802.3at PoE end-nodes like PTZ (Pan, Tilt & Zoom)
network cameras and speed dome cameras. The managed switch can easily help
enterprises with the available network infrastructure to build wireless AP, IP camera,
and VoIP systems where power can be centrally controlled.
12 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 1: Introduction
Product features
Physical port
• 24-port 10/100/1000BASE-T gigabit RJ45 copper ports with 24-port IEEE802.3af/at
PoE+ injector.
• Four 10GBASE-SR/LR SFP+ slots, compatible with 1000BASE-SX/LX/BX SFP.
• RJ45 console interface for basic switch management and setup.
Power over Ethernet
• Complies with IEEE 802.3at Power over Ethernet Plus/end-span PSE.
• Backward compatible with IEEE 802.3af Power over Ethernet.
• Up to 24 ports of IEEE 802.3af/IEEE 802.3at devices powered.
• Supports PoE power up to 30 W for each PoE port.
• Auto detects powered device (PD).
• Circuit protection prevents power interference between ports.
• Remote power feeding up to 100 meters.
• PoE management:
• Total PoE power budget control
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 13
Chapter 1: Introduction
• Per port PoE function enable/disable
• PoE admin-mode control
• PoE port power feeding priority
• Per PoE port power limitation
• PD classification detection
• Temperature threshold control
• PD alive check
• PoE schedule
Layer 2 features
• Prevents packet loss with back pressure (half-duplex) and IEEE 802.3x pause
frame flow control (full-duplex).
• High performance of Store-and-Forward architecture and runt/CRC filtering
eliminates erroneous packets to optimize the network bandwidth.
Storm control support:
• Broadcast / Multicast / Unknown-Unicast
Supports VLAN
• IEEE 802.1Q tagged VLAN
• Up to 255 VLANs groups out of 4094 VLAN IDs
• Provider bridging (VLAN Q-in-Q) support (IEEE 802.1ad)
• Private VLAN Edge (PVE)
• Protocol-based VLAN
• MAC-based VLAN
• Voice VLAN
• Management VLAN
Supports STP
• STP, IEEE 802.1D Spanning Tree Protocol
• RSTP, IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
• MSTP, IEEE 802.1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol, spanning tree by VLAN
• BPDU Guard
Supports link aggregation
• IEEE 802.3ad Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)
• Cisco ether-channel (static trunk)
• Maximum 14 trunk groups, up to four ports per trunk group
14 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 1: Introduction
• Up to 80Gbps bandwidth (full duplex mode).
Provides port mirror (many-to-1)
Port mirroring to monitor the incoming or outgoing traffic on a particular port
Loop protection to avoid broadcast loops
Layer 3 IP routing features
• Supports a maximum of 32 software static routes and route summarization.
Quality of Service
• Ingress shaper and egress rate limit per port bandwidth control
• Eight priority queues on all switch ports
• Traffic classification:
- IEEE 802.1p CoS
- TOS / DSCP / IP Precedence of IPv4/IPv6 packets
- IP TCP/UDP port number
- Typical network application
• Strict priority and Weighted Round Robin (WRR) CoS policies
• Supports QoS and In/Out bandwidth control on each port
• Traffic-policing policies on the switch port
• DSCP remarking
Multicast
• Supports IGMP snooping v1, v2, and v3
• Supports MLD snooping v1 and v2
• Querier mode support
• IGMP snooping port filtering
• MLD snooping port filtering
• Multicast VLAN Registration (MVR) support
Security
• Authentication
− IEEE 802.1x Port-Based / MAC-Based network access authentication
− Built-in RADIUS client to co-operate with the RADIUS servers
− TACACS+ login users access authentication
− RADIUS / TACACS+ users access authentication
• Access Control List (ACL)
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 15
Chapter 1: Introduction
− IPv4 / IPv6 IP-based ACL
− MAC-based ACL
• Source MAC / IP address binding
• DHCP snooping to filter distrusted DHCP messages
• Dynamic ARP inspection discards ARP packets with invalid MAC addresses to IP
address binding.
• IP source guard prevents IP spoofing attacks.
• IP address access management to prevent unauthorized intruders.
Management
• IPv4 and IPv6 dual stack management
• Switch management interfaces:
− Console / Telnet Command Line Interface
− Web switch management
− SNMP v1, v2c, and v3 switch management
− SSH / SSL secure access
− 2.4-inch color LCD touch screen
• User privilege levels control
• Built-in Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) client
• System maintenance
- Firmware upload/download via HTTP / TFTP
- Dual images
- Reset button for system reboot or reset to factory default
• Four RMON groups (history, statistics, alarms, and events)
• IPv6 IP address / NTP / DNS management and ICMPv6
• BOOTP and DHCP for IP address assignment
• DHCP relay
• DHCP Option 82
• NTP (Network Time Protocol)
• Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) and LLDP-MED
• Smart discovery utility for deploy management
• Network diagnostic
− ICMPv6/ICMPv4 remote ping
− Cable diagnostic technology provides the mechanism to detect and report
potential cabling issues
16 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 1: Introduction
• SMTP/Syslog remote alarm
• SNMP trap for interface Link Up and Link Down notification
• System log
• Smart fan with speed control
Product specifications
Hardware Specification
s
Copper
Ports
24
10/ 100/1000BASE-T RJ45 auto-MDI/MDI-X ports
SFP
+ Slots
Four 10GBASE
-SR/LR SFP+ interfaces (Port-25 to Port-28)
Compatible with 1000BASE
-SX/LX/BX SFP transceiver
Console Port
1 x RS
-232 to RJ45 serial port (115200, 8, N, 1)
Switch Architecture
Store
-and-Forward
Switch
Fabric
128
Gbps / non-blocking
Throughput
95.23
Mpps @ 64 bytes
Address Table
16
K entries, automatic source address learning and aging
Share
d Data Buffer
32M bits
Flow Control
IEEE 802.3x
pause frame for full-duplex
Back pressure for
half-duplex
Jumbo Frame
10
K bytes
Reset Button
< 5 seconds: System reboot
>
5 seconds: Factory Default
LED
System
:
SYS (Green)
AC/PWR (Green)
Fan1/2/3 Alert (Red)
PoE PWR Alert (Red)
PoE Ethernet Interfaces
(Port-1 to Port-24):
PoE In-use (Orange)
Ethernet Interfaces
(Port-1 to Port-24):
1000 LNK/ACT (Green), 10/100 LNK/ACT (Orange)
1/10G SFP+ Interfaces
(Port-25 to Port-28):
1G (Green), 10G (Orange)
Dimensions (W x D x H)
440 x
300 x 56 mm, 1.25U height
Weight
4.64
kg
Power
Consumption
Max.
488 W / 1665.13 BTU
Power Requirement
AC
100~240 V, 50/60 Hz, 7 A
ESD Protection
6K VDC
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 17
Chapter 1: Introduction
Fan
Three smart fans
Power over Ethernet
PoE Standard
IEEE 8
02.3af/802.3at PoE PSE
PoE Power Supply Type
End
-span
PoE Power Output
Per
port 54 VDC, 30 W (max.)
Power Pin Assignment
End
-span: 1/2(-), 3/6(+)
PoE Power Budget
400
W (max.)
PoE Ability PD @
7 watts
24
units
PoE Ability PD @
15 watts
24
units
PoE Ability PD @
30 watts
13
units
Layer 2
Management Functions
Port
Configuration
Po
rt disable / enable
Auto
-negotiation 10/100/1000Mbps full and half duplex mode selection
Flow
control disable/enable
Port Status
Display each port’s
speed duplex mode, link status, flow control status, auto-
negotiation status, trunk
status
Port Mirroring
TX / RX / both
Many
-to-1 monitor
VLAN
802.1Q tagged
-based VLAN
Q
-in-Q tunneling
Private VLAN
Edge (PVE)
MAC
-based VLAN
Protocol
-based VLAN
Voice VLAN
MVR (Multicast VLAN Registration)
U
p to 255 VLAN groups, out of 4095 VLAN IDs
Link Aggregation
IEEE
802.3ad LACP/static trunk
1
4 groups with four ports per trunk
Spanning Tree Protocol
IEEE 802.1D Spanning Tree Protocol
(STP)
IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
(RSTP)
IEEE 802.1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
(MSTP)
QoS
Traffic classification based,
strict priority and WRR
8
-level priority for switching
–
Port number
–
802.1p priority
–
802.1Q VLAN tag
–
DSCP/ToS field in IP packet
IGMP Snooping
IGMP (v1/v2
/v3) snooping, up to 255 multicast groups
IGMP
querier mode support
MLD Snooping
MLD (v1/v2)
snooping, up to 255 multicast groups
18 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 1: Introduction
MLD querier mode support
Access Control List
IP
-based ACL / MAC-based ACL
Up to
256 entries
Bandwidth Control
Per port bandwidth control
–
Ingress: 100 Kbps~1000 Mbps
–
Egress: 100 Kbps~1000 Mbps
Layer 3 Functions
IP Interfaces
Max
imum of eight VLAN interfaces
Routing Table
Max
imum of 32 routing entries
Routing Protocols
IPv4
software static routing
IPv6 software
static routing
Management
Basic Management Interfaces
Consol
e, Telnet, web browser, SNMP v1, v2c
Secure Management
Interface
s
SSH, SSL, SNMP v3
SNMP MIBs
RFC
-1213 MIB-II
RFC
-1493 Bridge MIB
RFC
-1643 Ethernet MIB
RFC
-2863 Interface MIB
RFC
-2665 Ether-Like MIB
RFC
-2819 RMON MIB (Group 1, 2, 3 and 9)
RFC
-2737 Entity MIB
Standards Conformance
Regulation Compliance
FCC Part 15 Class A, CE
Standards Compliance
IEEE
802.3 10BASE-T
IEEE
802.3u 100BASE-TX/100BASE-FX
IEEE
802.3z Gigabit SX/LX
IEE
E 802.3ab Gigabit 1000T
IEEE 802.3ae 10Gb/s Ethernet
IEEE 802.3x flow
control and back pressure
IEEE 802.3ad port trunk with LACP
IEEE 802.1D Spanning Tree Protocol
IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
IEEE 802.1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
IEEE 802.1p Class of Service
Environment
Operating
Temperature:
0 to 50°C
Relative Humidity:
5 to 95% (non-condensing)
Storage
Temperature:
-10 to 70°C
Relative Humidity:
5 to 95% (non-condensing)
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 19
Chapter 2
Installation
This section describes the hardware features and installation of the managed switch on
the desktop or rack mount. For easier management and control of the managed switch,
familiarize yourself with its display indicators, and ports. Front panel illustrations in this
chapter display the unit LED indicators. Before connecting any network device to the
managed switch, please read this chapter completely.
Hardware description
Switch front panel
Gigabit TP interface
10/100/1000BASE-T copper, RJ45 twisted-pair: Up to 100 meters.
10 gigabit SFP slots
10BASE-SR/LR mini-GBIC slot, SFP (Small Factor Pluggable) transceiver module
supports from 300 meters (multi-mode fiber) up to 10 kilometers (single-mode fiber).
Console port
The console port is a RJ45 port connector and an interface for directly connecting a
terminal. Through the console port, the managed switch provides diagnostic information
including the IP address setting, factory reset, port management, link status, and
system setting. The included DB9 to RJ45 console cable connects to the console port
on the device. After making the connection, users can run any terminal emulation
program (Hyper Terminal, ProComm Plus, Telix, Winterm, and so on) to enter the
startup screen of the device
20 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 2: Installation
Reset button
Located on the right of the front panel, the reset button is designed to reboot the
managed switch without turning the power off and on. The following is the summary
table of the reset button functions:
Reset button presse
d and released Function
< 5 seconds: S
ystem reboot Reboots the managed switch
> 5 seconds: F
actory default Resets the managed switch to factory default
configuration. The managed switch then
reboots and loads the default settings as
shown below:
Default Username: admin
Default Password: admin
Default IP address: 192.168.0.100
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Default Gateway: 192.168.0.254
LED indicators
The front panel LEDs indicate port link status, data activity, and system power.
System/alert
LED
Color Function
P
WR Green Lit: indicates that the managed switch has power.
SYS
Green Lit: indicates that the firmware upgrade is complete.
Blinking: indicates that a firmware upgrade is in progress.
FAN 1
Red Lit: indicates that FAN1 is down.
FAN 2
Red Lit: indicates that FAN2 is down.
FAN 3
Red Lit: indicates that FAN3 is down.
PoE PWR
Red Lit: indicates that the PoE power is down.
10/100/1000BASE-T interfaces (port 1 to port 24)
LED Color Function
Ethernet
Green Lit: indicates the port has successfully connected to the
network at 1000 Mbps.
Blinking: indicates that the switch is actively sending or
receiving data over that port.
Orange Lit: indicates the port has successfully connected to the
network at 100 Mbps or 10 Mbps.
Blinking: indicates that the switch is actively sending or
receiving data over that port.
PoE Orange Lit: indicates the port is providing DC in-line power.
Off: indicates that the connected device is not a PoE
Powered Device (PD)..
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 21
Chapter 2: Installation
1/10BASE-SR/LR SFP+ interfaces (port 25 to port 28)
LED Color Function
10G Orange Lit: indicates the port has successfully connected to the
network at 10 Gbps.
Blinking: indicates that the switch is actively sending or
receiving data over that port.
1000 Green Lit: indicates the port has successfully connected to the
network at 1000 Mbps.
Blinking: indicates that the switch is actively sending or
receiving data over that port.
Switch rear panel
The rear panel of the managed switch contains an AC inlet power socket that accepts
input power from 100 to 240 VAC, 50-60 Hz.
AC power receptacle
For compatibility with electrical supplies in most areas of the world, the managed
switch’s power supply automatically adjusts to line power in the range of 100-240 VAC
and 50/60 Hz.
Plug the female end of the power cord firmly into the receptacle on the rear panel of the
managed switch and the other end of the power cord into an electrical outlet and then
power it on.
Note: The device is a power-required device, meaning it will not work until it is powered
on. If your network needs to be active at all times, consider using a UPS (Uninterrupted
Power Supply) for the device to help to prevent network data loss or network downtime.
In some areas, installing a surge suppression device may also help to protect the
managed switch from an unregulated surge or current to the switch or the power
adapter.
Installing the switch
This section describes how to install and make connections to the managed switch.
Read the following topics and perform the procedures in the order presented.
To install the managed switch on a desktop or shelf:
1. Attach the rubber feet to the recessed areas on the bottom of the managed switch.
2. Place the managed switch on the desktop or the shelf near an AC power source, as
shown below:
22 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 2: Installation
3. Keep enough ventilation space between the managed switch and the surrounding
objects.
Note: When choosing a location, please keep in mind the environmental restrictions
indicated in “Product specifications” on page 17.
4. Connect one end of a standard network cable to the 10/100/1000 RJ45 ports on the
front of the managed switch and the other end of the cable to the network devices
such as printer servers, workstations or routers.
Note: Connection to the managed switch requires UTP Category 5 network cabling
with RJ45 tips. For more information, see Appendix A “Networking connection” on
page 331.
5. Connect one end of the power cable to the managed switch.
6. Connect the power plug of the power cable to a standard wall outlet.
7. When the managed switch receives power, the power LED illuminates solid green.
Rack mounting
To install the managed switch in a 19-inch standard rack:
1. Place the managed switch on a hard, flat surface with the front panel positioned
towards the front side.
2. Attach the rack-mount bracket to each side of the managed switch with the supplied
screws as shown below.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 23
Chapter 2: Installation
Caution: You must use the screws supplied with the mounting brackets. Damage
caused to the parts by using incorrect screws will invalidate the warranty.
3. Secure the brackets tightly.
4. Follow the same steps to attach the second bracket to the opposite side.
5. After the brackets are attached to the managed switch, use suitable screws to
securely attach the brackets to the rack, as shown below.
6. Follow steps 4 through 7 under “To install the managed switch on a desktop or
shelf” in this section to connect the network cabling and supply power to the
managed switch.
Installing the SFP/SFP+ transceiver
SFP/SFP+ transceivers are hot-pluggable and hot-swappable. They can be plugged in
and removed to/from any SFP/SFP+ port without having to power down the managed
switch (see below).
24 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 2: Installation
Approved Interlogix SFP transceivers
The managed switch supports both single mode and multi-mode SFP transceivers. The
following list of approved Interlogix SFP transceivers is valid as of the time of
publication:
Part # Fiber
Connector
# of
Fibers
Fiber
Type
Max
Distance
Wave
Length
Optical
Budget
(dBm)
Optical
Power
(dBm)
Receiver
Sensitivity
(dBm)
Operating
Temperature
Twisted Pair SFP 1000Base TX
S30-RJ RJ 45 1 Cat5e 100M
(328 ft.)
0 to +50°C
(32 to 122°F)
Fast Ethernet 100Base FX
S20-2MLC2 LC 2 Multi-
mode
2 km
(1.2 mi.) 1310 nm 12 -20 ~ -14 -32 0 to +50°C
(32 to 122°F)
S25-2MLC2 LC 2 Multi-
mode
2 km
(1.2 mi.) 1310 nm 12 -20 ~ -14 -32
-40 to +75°C
(-40 to
167°F)
Fast Ethernet 100Base LX
S20-2SLC20 LC 2 Single
Mode
20 km
(12 mi.) 1310 nm 19 -15 ~ -8 -34 0 to +50°C
(32 to 122°F)
S25-2SLC20 LC 2 Single
Mode
20 km
(12 mi.) 1310 nm 19 -15 ~ -8 -34 -40 to +75°C
(-40 to 167°F)
Fast Ethernet 100Base BX
S20-1SLC/A-
20 LC 1 Single
Mode
20 km
(12 mi.)
1310 /
1550 nm 18 -14 ~ -8 -32 0 to +50°C
(32 to 122°F)
S25-1SLC/B-
20 LC 1 Single
Mode
20 km
(12 mi.)
1550 /
1310 nm 18 -14 ~ -8 -32 -40 to +75°C
(-40 to 167°F)
Gigabit Ethernet 1000Base SX
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 25
Chapter 2: Installation
Part # Fiber
Connector
# of
Fibers
Fiber
Type
Max
Distance
Wave
Length
Optical
Budget
(dBm)
Optical
Power
(dBm)
Receiver
Sensitivity
(dBm)
Operating
Temperature
S30-2MLC LC 2 Multi-
mode
220/550 m
(720 /
1800 ft.)
850 nm 7.5 -9.5 ~ -1 -17 0 to +50°C
(32 to 122°F
S35-2MLC LC 2 Multi-
mode
220/550 m
(720 /
1800 ft.)
850 nm 7.5 -14 ~ -8 -17 -40 to +75°C
(-40 to 167°F)
OM1 Multimode fiber @ 200/500 MHz-km
OM2 Multimode fiber @ 500.500 MHZ-km Laser Rated for GbE LANs
S30-2MLC-2 LC 2 Multi-
mode
2 km
(1.2 mi.) 1310 nm 10 -9 ~ -1 -19 0 to +50°C
(32 to 122°F)
OM3 Multimode fiber @ 2000/500MHz-km Optimized got 850 nm VCSELs
Gigabit Ethernet 1000 Base LX
S30-2SLC-
10 LC 2 Single
Mode
10 km
(6.2 mi.) 1310 nm 18 -9.5 ~ -3 -20 0 to +50°C
(32 to 122°F)
S35-2SLC-
10 LC 2 Single
Mode
10 km
(6.2 mi.) 1310 nm 18 -9.5 ~ -3 -20 -40 to +75°C
(-40 to 167°F)
S30-2SLC-
30 LC 2 Single
Mode
30 km
(18.6 mi.) 1310 nm 18 -2 ~ +3 -23 0 to +50°C
(32 to 122°F)
S35-2SLC-
30 LC 2 Single
Mode
30 km
(18.6 mi.) 1310 nm 18 -2 ~ +3 -23 -40 to +75°C
(-40 to 167°F)
Gigabit Ethernet 1000 Base ZX
S30-2SLC-
70 LC 2 Single
Mode
70 km
(43 mi.) 1550 nm 19* -15 ~ -8 -34 0 to +50°C
(32 to 122°F)
S35-2SLC-
70 LC 2 Single
Mode
70 km
(43 mi.) 1550 nm 19* -15 ~ -8 -34 -40 to +75°C
(-40 to 167°F)
Gigabit Ethernet 1000 Base BX
S30-1SLC/A-
10 LC 1 Single
Mode
10 km
(6.2 mi.)
1310 /
1490 nm 11 -9 ~ -3 -20 0 to +50°C
(32 to 122°F)
S30-1SLC/B-
10 LC 1 Single
Mode
10 km
(6.2 mi.)
1490 /
1310 nm 11 -9 ~ -3 -20 0 to +50°C
(32 to 122°F)
S30-1SLC/A-
20 LC 1 Single
Mode
20 km
(12 mi.)
1310 /
1490 nm 15 -8 ~ -2 -23 0 to +50°C
(32 to 122°F)
S30-1SLC/B-
20 LC 1 Single
Mode
20 km
(12 mi.)
1490 /
1310 nm 15 -8 ~ -2 -23 0 to +50°C
(32 to 122°F)
Gigabit Ethernet 1000 Base BX
S30-1SLC/A-
60 LC 1 Single
Mode
60 km
(37 mi.)
1310 /
1490 nm 24 0 ~ +5 -24 0 to +50°C
(32 to 122°F)
26 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 2: Installation
Part # Fiber
Connector
# of
Fibers
Fiber
Type
Max
Distance
Wave
Length
Optical
Budget
(dBm)
Optical
Power
(dBm)
Receiver
Sensitivity
(dBm)
Operating
Temperature
S30-1SLC/B-
60 LC 1 Single
Mode
60 km
(37 mi.)
1490 /
1310 nm 24 0 ~ +5 -24 0 to +50°C
(32 to 122°F)
10GBase-SR SFP+
S40-2MLC LC 2 Multi-
mode 300 m* 850 nm 10 -7.3 ~ -1 -11 0 to +50°C
(32 to 122°F)
*OM3 Multimode fiber @ 2000/500MHz-km Optimized got 850 nm VCSELs maximum distance of 300m.
10GBase-LR SFP+
S40-2SLC-
10 LC 2 Single
Mode
10 km
(6.2 mi.) 1310 nm 15 -8.2 ~
+0.5 -12 0 to +50°C
(32 to 122°F)
* Note: High Power Optic. There must be a minimum of 5 dB of optical loss to the fiber for proper operation.
Note: We recommend the use of Interlogix SFPs on the managed switch. If you insert
an SFP transceiver that is not supported, the managed switch will not recognize it.
Note: Ports 25 to 28 are a shared SFP+ slot that supports the 10 gigabit SFP+
transceiver and gigabit SFP transceiver.
Before connecting the other managed switches, workstation, or media converter:
1. Make sure both sides of the SFP transceiver are with the same media type. For
example, 1000BASE-SX to 1000BASE-SX, 1000BASE-LX to 1000BASE-LX.
2. Check if the fiber-optic cable type matches the SFP transceiver model.
• To connect to 1000BASE-SX SFP transceiver, use the multi-mode fiber cable –
with one side being male duplex LC connector type.
• To connect to 1000BASE-LX SFP transceiver, use the single-mode fiber cable –
with one side being male duplex LC connector type.
To connect the fiber cable:
1. Attach the duplex LC connector on the network cable to the SFP/SFP+ transceiver.
2. Connect the other end of the cable to a device with the SFP/SFP+ transceiver
installed.
3. Check the LNK/ACT LED of the SFP/SFP+ slot on the front of the managed switch.
Ensure that the SFP/SFP+ transceiver is operating correctly.
4. Check the link mode of the SFP/SFP+ port if the link fails. Set the link mode to
“1000 Force” or “10G Force” so that it can work with certain fiber-NICs or media
converters if required. The default setting is 10G forced mode.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 27
Chapter 2: Installation
To remove the transceiver module:
1. Make sure there is no network activity by checking with the network administrator.
Or, through the management interface of the switch/converter (if available), disable
the port in advance.
2. Carefully remove the fiber optic cable.
3. Turn the lever of the transceiver module to a horizontal position.
4. Pull out the module gently through the lever.
Note: Never pull out the module without making use of the lever or the push bolts on
the module. Removing the module with force could damage the module and the
SFP/SFP+ module slot of the managed switch.
28 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 3
Switch management
This chapter explains the methods that can be used to configure management access
to the managed switch. It describes the types of management applications and the
communication and management protocols that deliver data between the management
device (workstation or personal computer) and the system. It also contains information
about port connection options.
Requirements
• Workstations must have Windows XP or later, Mac OS9 or later, Linux, UNIX , or
other platforms compatible with TCP/IP protocols.
• Workstations must have an Ethernet NIC (Network Interface Card) installed.
• Serial Port connection (Terminal). The workstation must have a COM Port (DB9 /
RS-232) or USB-to-RS-232 converter.
• Ethernet port connection. Use standard network (UTP) cables with RJ45
connectors.
• Workstations must have a web browser and Java runtime environment plug-in
installed.
Note: We recommend the use of Internet Explorer 11.0 or later to access the managed
switch.
Management access overview
The managed switch provides the flexibility to access and manage it using any or all of
the following methods:
• An administration console
• Web browser interface
• An external SNMP-based network management application
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 29
Chapter 3: Switch management
The administration console and web browser interface support are embedded in the
managed switch software and are available for immediate use. The advantages of
these management methods are described below:
Method
Advantages Disadvantages
Console
• No IP address or subnet needed.
• Text-based
• Telnet functionality and
HyperTerminal built into Windows
operating systems.
• Secure
• Must be near the switch or use dial-up
connection.
• Not convenient for remote users.
• Modem connection may prove to be
unreliable or slow.
W
eb browser • Ideal for configuring the switch
remotely.
• Compatible with all popular
browsers.
• Can be accessed from any
location.
• Most visually appealing.
• Security can be compromised (hackers
need only know the IP address and
subnet mask).
• May encounter lag times on poor
connections.
SNMP agent
• Communicates with switch
functions at the MIB level.
• Based on open standards.
• Requires SNMP manager software
• Least visually appealing of all three
methods.
• Some settings require calculations.
• Security can be compromised (hackers
need to only know the community
name).
Administration console
The administration console is an internal, character-oriented, and command line user
interface for performing system administration such as displaying statistics or changing
option settings. Using this method, you can view the administration console from a
terminal, a computer, or workstation connected to the managed switch's console
(serial) port.
30 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 3: Switch management
Direct access
Direct access to the administration console is achieved by directly connecting a
terminal or a computer equipped with a terminal-emulation program (such as
HyperTerminal) to the managed switch console (serial) port. When using this
management method, a straight DB9 RS-232 cable is required to connect the switch to
the computer. After making this connection, configure the terminal-emulation program
to use the following parameters:
These settings can be changed after log on, if required. This management method is
often preferred because the user can remain connected and monitor the system during
system reboots. Also, certain error messages are sent to the serial port, regardless of
the interface through which the associated action was initiated. A computer attachment
can use any terminal emulation program for connecting to the terminal serial port. A
workstation attachment under UNIX can use an emulator such as TIP.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 31
Chapter 3: Switch management
Web management
The managed switch provides features that allow users to manage it from anywhere on
the network through a standard browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer. After
setting up the IP address for the switch, you can access the managed switch's web
interface applications directly in the web browser by entering the IP address of the
managed switch.
You can use a web browser to list and manage the managed switch configuration
parameters from one central location, just as if you were directly connected to the
managed switch's console port. Web management requires Microsoft Internet Explorer
11.0 or later.
SNMP-based network management
Use an external SNMP-based application to configure and manage the managed
switch, such as SNMP Network Manager, HP Openview Network Node Management
(NNM), or What’s Up Gold. This management method requires the SNMP agent on the
switch and the SNMP Network Management Station to use the same community string.
This management method uses two community strings: the get community string and
the set community string. If the SNMP Network Management Station only knows the set
community string, it can read and write to the MIBs. However, if it only knows the get
community string, it can only read MIBs. The default get and set community strings for
the managed switch are public.
32 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 3: Switch management
Smart discovery utility
For easily listing the managed switch in your Ethernet environment, the Smart
Discovery utility included on the CD-ROM is an ideal solution.
To run the smart discovery utility:
1. Install the Smart Discovery Utility in the administrator PC.
2. Run the utility.
Note: If there are two or more LAN cards in the same administrator computer,
choose a different LAN card by using the “Select Adapter” tool.
3. Click the Refresh button for the currently connected devices in the discovery list:
4. This utility shows all necessary information from the devices, such as MAC address,
device name, firmware version and device IP subnet address. It can also assign
new password, IP Subnet address and description for the devices. After setup is
complete, click the Update Device, Update Multi, or Update All button:
• Update Device: Use the current setting on one single device.
• Update Multi: Use the current setting on multi-devices.
• Update All: Use the current setting on all devices in the list.
The same functions mentioned above also can be found in Option menu.
5. Selecting the Control Packet Force Broadcast check box allows you to assign a
new setting value to the Web Smart Switch under a different IP subnet address.
6. Click the Connect to Device button and the web login screen appears.
7. Click the Exit button to shut down the Smart Discovery Utility.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 33
Chapter 4
Web configuration
This section introduces the configuration and functions of the web-based management
interface for the managed switch.
About Web-based management
Web-based management of the managed switch supports Internet Explorer 7.0 or later,
and can be performed from any location on the network. It is based on Java Applets
with an aim to reduce network bandwidth consumption, enhance access speed, and
present an easy viewing screen.
Note: By default, IE 11.0 and above does not allow Java Applets to open sockets. The
user has to explicitly modify the browser setting to enable Java Applets to use network
ports.
The managed switch can be configured through an Ethernet connection when the
manager computer is set to the same IP subnet address as the managed switch.
For example, if the default IP address of the managed switch is 192.168.0.100, then the
administrator computer should be set at 192.168.0.x (where x is a number between 1
and 254, except 100), and the default subnet mask is 255.255.255.0.
If the default IP address of the managed switch has been changed to 192.168.1.1 with
subnet mask 255.255.255.0 via the console, then the administrator computer should be
set at 192.168.1.x (where x is a number between 2 and 254) to do the relative
configuration on a manager computer.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 34
Chapter 4: Web configuration
To log into the managed switch:
1. Launch the Internet Explorer 7.0 or later web browser and type the factory default IP
address http://192.168.0.100 to access the web interface.
2. When the following login screen appears, type the default username "admin" with
password “admin” (or the username and password you have changed via console)
to log into the main screen of the managed switch.
3. After typing the username and password, the main UI screen appears. The main
menu on the left side of the web page permits access to all the functions and status
provided by the managed switch.
Note: For security purposes, change and memorize the new password after this first
setup.
Main web page
This section describes how to use the managed switch’s web browser interface for
configuration and management.
1. Main menu
2.
Copper port link status
3. SFP/SFP+ port link status
4. Help
5.
Main screen
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 35
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Panel display
The web interface displays an image of the managed switch’s ports. The mode can be
set to display different information for the ports, including Link up or Link down. Clicking
on the image of a port opens the Port Statistics page.
Port status is indicated as follows:
State Disabled Down Link
RJ45 Ports
SFP Ports
Main menu
Using the web interface, you can define system parameters, manage, and control the
managed switch and all its ports, or monitor network conditions. The administrator can
set up the managed switch by making selections from the main functions menu.
Clicking on a main menu item opens sub menus.
System
Use the System menu items to display and configure basic administrative details of the
managed switch. Under the System list, the following topics are provided to configure
and view the system information. This list contains the following items:
36 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Item Function
System Information The managed switch system information is provided here.
IP Configuration Configures the managed switch-managed IPv4/IPv6 interface and IP routes
on this page.
IP Status This page displays the status of the IP protocol layer. The status is defined
by the IP interfaces, the IP routes and the neighbour cache (ARP cache)
status.
Users Configuration This page provides an overview of the current users. Currently the only way
to log in as another user on the web server is to close and reopen the
browser.
Privilege Levels This page provides an overview of the privilege levels.
NTP Configuration Configure NTP server on this page.
Time Configuration Configure time parameter on this page.
UPnP Configure UPnP on this page.
DHCP Relay Configure DHCP Relay on this page.
DHCP Relay Statistics This page provides statistics for DHCP relay.
CPU Load This page displays the CPU load using an SVG graph.
System Log The managed switch system log information is provided here.
Detailed Log The managed switch system detailed log information is provided here.
Remote Syslog Configure remote syslog on this page.
SMTP Configuration Configure SMTP parameters on this page.
Web Firmware
Upgrade This page facilitates an update of the firmware controlling the managed
switch.
TFTP Firmware
Upgrade Upgrade the firmware via TFTP server
Save Startup Config This copies running-config to startup-config, thereby ensuring that the
currently active configuration will be used at the next reboot.
Configuration
Download Download the files to the switch.
Configuration Upload Upload files to the switch.
Configuration
Activate Activate the configuration file present on the switch.
Configuration Delete Delete the writable files stored in flash.
Image Select Configure active or alternate firmware on this page.
System Reboot You can restart the managed switch on this page. After restarting, the
managed switch will boot normally.
System information
The System Infomation page provides information on the current device such as the
hardware MAC address, software version, and system uptime.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 37
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Item Function
Contact The system contact configured in SNMP > System Information.
Name The system name configured in SNMP > System Information.
Location The system location configured in SNMP > System Information.
MAC Address The MAC Address of this managed switch.
Power Status Indicated the type of power applied to the managed switch.
Temperature Indicates chipset temperature.
System Date The current (GMT) system time and date. The system time is obtained through the
configured NTP server, if present.
System Uptime The period of time the device has been operational.
Software Version The software version of the managed switch.
Software Date The date when the managed switch software was produced.
• Select the Auto-refresh check box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic
refresh occurs every three seconds.
• Click Refresh to refresh the page automatically. This will undo any changes made
locally.
IP configuration
This page includes the IP Configuration, IP Interface, and IP Routes. The configured
column is used to view or change the IP configuration. The maximum number of
interfaces supported is 128 and the maximum number of routes is 32.
38 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The current column is used to show the active IP configuration.
Object Description
IP
Configurations Mode Set the IP stack to act as a Host or a Router. In Host
mode, IP traffic between interfaces will not be routed. In
Router mode traffic is routed between all interfaces.
Domain Name The name string of local domain where the device
belongs. Most queries for names within this domain can
use short names relative to the local domain. The
system then appends the domain name as a suffix to
unqualified names.
For example, if the domain name is set as
'example.com' and you specify the PING destination by
the unqualified name as 'test', then the system will
qualify the name to be 'test.example.com'.
The following modes are supported:
No Domain Name – No domain name will be used.
Configured Domain Name – Explicitly specify the name
of local domain. Make sure the configured domain name
meets your organization's given domain.
From any DHCPv6 interfaces – The first domain name
offered from a DHCPv6 lease to a DHCPv6-enabled
interface will be used.
From this DHCPv6 interface – Specify from which
DHCPv6-enabled interface a provided domain name
should be preferred.
DNS Server This setting controls the DNS name resolution done by
the switch. There are four servers available for
configuration, and the index of the server presents the
preference (less index has higher priority) in doing DNS
name resolution. The following modes are supported:
No DNS server – No DNS server will be used.
Configured IPv4 – Explicitly provide the valid IPv4
unicast address of the DNS Server in dotted decimal
notation. Make sure the configured DNS server is
reachable (e.g., via PING) for activating DNS service.
Configured IPv6 – Explicitly provide the valid IPv6
unicast (except linklocal) address of the DNS Server.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 39
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Object Description
Make sure the configured DNS server is reachable (e.g.,
via PING6) for activating DNS service.
From any DHCPv4 interfaces – The first DNS server
offered from a DHCPv4 lease to a DHCPv4-enabled
interface will be used.
From this DHCPv4 interface – Specify from which
DHCPv4-enabled interface a provided DNS server
should be preferred.
From any DHCPv6 interfaces – The first DNS server
offered from a DHCPv6 lease to a DHCPv6-enabled
interface will be used.
From this DHCPv6 interface – Specify from which
DHCPv6-enabled interface a provided DNS server
should be preferred.
DNS Proxy When DNS proxy is enabled, the system will relay DNS
requests to the currently configured DNS server, and
reply as a DNS resolver to the client devices on the
network.
IP Address Delete Select this option to delete an existing IP interface.
VLAN The VLAN associated with the IP interface. Only ports in
this VLAN will be able to access the IP interface. This
field is only available for input when creating an new
interface.
DHCPv4 Enabled Enable the DHCP client by selecting this check box. If
this option is enabled, the system will configure the IPv4
address and mask of the interface using the DHCPv4
protocol. The DHCPv4 client will announce the
configured System Name as hostname to provide DNS
lookup
Fallback The number of seconds for trying to obtain a DHCP
lease. If this option is enabled, the system will configure
the IPv4 address and mask of the interface using the
DHCPv4 protocol. The DHCPv4 client will announce the
configured System Name as hostname to provide DNS
lookup.
Current
Lease
For DHCP interfaces with an active lease, this column
shows the current interface address, as provided by the
DHCP server.
IPv4 Address Provides the IP address of this managed switch in
dotted decimal notation. If DHCP is enabled, this field
configures the fallback address. The field may be left
blank if IPv4 operation on the interface is not required, or
if no DHCP fallback address is required
Mask Length The IPv4 network mask, in number of bits (prefix length).
Valid values are between 0 and 30 bits for a IPv4
address. If DHCP is enabled, this field configures the
fallback address network mask. The field may be left
blank if IPv4 operation on the interface is not required, or
if no DHCP fallback address is required.
DHCPv6 Enable Enable the DHCPv6 client by selecting this check box. If
this option is enabled, the system configures the IPv6
40 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Object Description
address of the interface using the DHCPv6 protocol.
Rapid
Commit Enable the DHCPv6 Rapid-Commit option by selecting
this check box. If this option is enabled, the DHCPv6
client terminates the waiting process as soon as a Reply
message with a Rapid Commit option is received. This
option is only manageable when the DHCPv6 client is
enabled.
Current
Lease For DHCPv6 interface with an active lease, this column
shows the interface address provided by the DHCPv6
server.
IPv6 Address Provides the IP address of this managed switch. A IPv6
address is in 128-bit records represented as eight fields
of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separating
each field (:).For example, fe80::215:c5ff:fe03:4dc7. The
symbol :: is a special syntax that can be used as a
shorthand way of representing multiple 16-bit groups of
contiguous zeros; but it can appear only once.
The system accepts the valid IPv6 unicast address only,
except the IPv4-Compatible address and IPv4-Mapped
address. The field may be left blank if IPv6 operation on
the interface is not required.
Mask Length The IPv6 network mask, in number of bits (prefix length).
Valid values are between 1 and 128 bits for a IPv6
address.
The field may be left blank if IPv6 operation on the
interface is not required.
IP Routes Delete Select this option to delete an existing IP route.
Network The destination IP network or host address of this route.
Valid format is dotted decimal notationor a valid IPv6
notation. A default route can use the value 0.0.0.0 or
IPv6 :: notation.
Mask Length The destination IP network or host mask, in number of
bits (prefix length). It defines how much of a network
address that must match in order to qualify for this route.
Valid values are between 0 and 32 bits respectively 128
for IPv6 routes. Only a default route will have a mask
length of 0 as it will match anything.
Gateway The IP address of the IP gateway. Valid format is dotted
decimal notation or a valid IPv6 notation. Gateway and
Network must be of the same type.
Next Hop VLAN The VLAN ID (VID) of the specific IPv6 interface
associated with the gateway. The given VID ranges from
1 to 4095 and will be effective only when the
corresponding IPv6 interface is valid.
If the IPv6 gateway address is link-local, it must specify
the next hop VLAN for the gateway. If the IPv6 gateway
address is not link-local, the system ignores the next hop
VLAN for the gateway.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 41
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Buttons
• Click Add Interface to add a new IP interface. A maximum of 128 interfaces is
supported.
• Click Add Route to add a new IP route. A maximum of 32 routes is supported.
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
IP status
IP status displays the status of the IP protocol layer. The status is defined by the IP
interfaces, the IP routes, and the neighbour cache (ARP cache) status.
42 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
IP Interfaces Interface The name of the interface.
Type The address type of the entry. This may be LINK or
IPv4.
Address The current address of the interface (of the given type).
Status The status flags of the interface (and/or address).
IP Routes Network The destination IP network or host address of this
route.
Gateway The gateway address of this route.
Status The status flags of the route.
Neighbor Cache IP Address The IP address of the entry.
Link Address The link (MAC) address for which a binding to the IP
address given exists.
• Select the Auto-refresh check box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic
refresh occurs every three seconds.
• Click Refresh to refresh the page automatically. This will undo any changes made
locally.
Users configuration
This page provides an overview of the current users. Close and reopen the browser to
log in as another user on the web server. After setup is complete, click the Apply
button and log in to the web interface with the new user name and password. The
following appears:
This page includes the following fields:
Object Description
User Name The name identifying the user. This is also a link to Add/Edit User.
Privilege Level The privilege level of the user.
The allowed range is 1 to 15. If the privilege level value is 15, it can access all
groups (i.e., it is granted full control of the device). Other values need to refer to
each group privilege level. User privileges should be the same or greater than the
group privilege level to have access to that group.
By default, most groups’ privilege level 5 has read-only access and privilege level
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 43
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Object Description
10 has read-write access. System maintenance (software upload, factory
defaults, etc.) requires user privilege level 15.
Generally, privilege level 15 can be used for an administrator account, privilege
level 10 for a standard user account, and privilege level 5 for a guest account.
Buttons:
• Click Add New User to add a new user
Add/edit user
Add, edit, or delete a user in this page.
This page includes the following fields:
Object Description
User Name A string identifies the user name that this entry should belong to. The allowed
string length is 1 to 31. The valid user name is a combination of letters,
numbers, and underscores.
Password The password of the user. The allowed string length is 1 to 31.
Password (again) Type the user password again for confirmation.
Privilege Level The privilege level of the user.
The allowed range is 1 to 15. If the privilege level value is 15, it can access all
groups (i.e., it is granted full control of the device). But other values need to
refer to each group privilege level. User privileges should be the same or
greater than the group privilege level to have access to that group.
By default, most groups’ privilege level 5 has read-only access and privilege
level 10 has read-write access. System maintenance (software upload, factory
defaults, etc.) requires user privilege level 15.
Generally, privilege level 15 can be used for an administrator account,
privilege level 10 for a standard user account, and privilege level 5 for a guest
account.
Buttons
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
44 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
• Click Cancel to undo changes and return to the Users Configuration page.
• Click Delete User to delete the current user. This function is not available for new
configurations (i.e., add new user).
After a new user is added, the new user entry appears in the Users Configuration page.
Note: If a password is forgotten after changing the default password, press the reset
button on the front panel of the managed switch for over 10 seconds and then release
it. The current settings, including VLAN, will be erased and the managed switch
restores to default mode.
Privilege levels
This page provides an overview of the privilege levels. After setup is complete, click the
Apply button and log in to the web interface with the new user name and password.
The following appears:
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 45
Chapter 4: Web configuration
This page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Group name The name identifies the privilege group. In most cases, a privilege level group
consists of a single module (e.g., LACP, RSTP, or QoS), but a few of them
contain more than one. The following description defines these privilege level
groups in detail:
System: Contact, Name, Location, Timezone, Log.
Security: Authentication, System Access Management, Port (contains Dot1x
port, MAC based and the MAC Address Limit), ACL, HTTPS, SSH, ARP
Inspection, and IP source guard.
IP: Everything except 'ping'.
Port: Everything except 'VeriPHY'.
Diagnostics: 'ping' and 'VeriPHY'.
Maintenance: CLI- System Reboot, System Restore Default, System
Password, Configuration Save, Configuration Load and Firmware Load. Web-
Users, Privilege Levels and everything in Maintenance.
Debug: Only present in CLI.
Privilege Level Every privilege level group has an authorization level for the following sub
groups:
Configuration read-only
Configuration/execute read-write
Status/statistics read-only
Status/statistics read-write (e.g., for clearing of statistics)
46 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Buttons
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
NTP configuration
Configure NTP on this page. NTP is an acronym for Network Time Protocol, a network
protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems. NTP uses UDP (data
grams) as a transport layer. You can specify NTP servers in this page.
This page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Mode Indicates the NTP mode operation. Possible modes are:
Enabled: Enable NTP mode operation. When enabling NTP mode operation,
the agent forwards and transfers NTP messages between the clients and the
server when they are not on the same subnet domain.
Disabled: Disable NTP mode operation.
Server# Provides the NTP IPv4 or IPv6 address of this switch. IPv6 address is in 128-
bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a
colon separating each field (:).
Example: 'fe80::215:c5ff:fe03:4dc7'. The symbol '::' is a special syntax that
can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16-bit groups of
contiguous zeros; but it can only appear once. It also uses an IPv4 address
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 47
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Object Description
(for example, '::192.1.2.34').
User Manually Allows the user to enable set up system time manually. System time will be
lost after system reboot since there is no battery to keep time running.
Year Allows the user to input year value. (it supports from 1970 to 2037 only)
Month Allows the user to input month value. (1 to 12 month).
Day Allows the user to input day value. (1 to 31 days).
Hour Allows the user to input hour value. (00 to 23 hours).
Minute Allows the user to input minute value. (0 to 59 minutes).
Second Allows the user to input second value. (0 to 59 seconds).
Buttons
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
Time configuration
A time zone is a region that has a uniform standard time for legal, commercial, and
social purposes. It is convenient for areas in close commercial or other communication
to maintain the same time, so time zones tend to follow the boundaries of countries and
their subdivisions. Configure the time zone on the Time Zone Configuration page.
48 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
This page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Time Zone Lists various Time Zones worldwide. Select the appropriate Time Zone from
the drop-down list and click Save.
Acronym This is a user configurable acronym (up to 16 characters) used to identify the
time zone.
Daylight Saving
Time This is used to set the clock forward or backward according to the
configurations set below for a defined Daylight Saving Time duration. Select
Disable to disable the Daylight Saving Time configuration. Select Recurring
and configure the Daylight Saving Time duration to repeat the configuration
every year. Select Non-Recurring and configure the Daylight Saving Time
duration for single time configuration. (Default: Disabled).
Start Time Settings Week - Select the starting week number.
Day - Select the starting day.
Month - Select the starting month.
Hours - Select the starting hour.
Minutes - Select the starting minute.
End Time Settings Week - Select the ending week number.
Day - Select the ending day.
Month - Select the ending month.
Hours - Select the ending hour.
Minutes - Select the ending minute
Offset Settings Enter the number of minutes (1 to 1440) to add during Daylight Saving Time.
Buttons
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
UPnP
UPnP is an acronym for Universal Plug and Play. The goals of UPnP are to allow
devices to connect seamlessly and to simplify the implementation of networks in home
(data sharing, communications, and entertainment) and corporate environments for
easy installation of computer components. Configure UPnP on the UPnP Configuration
page.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 49
Chapter 4: Web configuration
This page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Mode Indicates the UPnP operation mode. Possible modes are:
Enabled: Enable UPnP mode operation.
Disabled: Disable UPnP mode operation.
When the mode is enabled, two ACEs are added automatically to trap UPnP
related packets to the CPU. The ACEs are automatically removed when the
mode is disabled.
Advertising
Duration The duration, carried in SSDP packets, is used to inform a control point or
control points how often it or they should receive a SSDP advertisement
message from this switch. If a control point does not receive any message
within the duration, it will think that the switch no longer exists. Due to the
unreliable nature of UDP, in the standard it is recommended that such
refreshing of advertisements to be done at less than one-half of the advertising
duration. In the implementation, the switch sends SSDP messages periodically
at the interval one-half of the advertising duration minus 30 seconds. Valid
values are in the range 100 to 86400.
IP Address Mode IP addressing mode provides two ways to determine IP address assignment:
Dynamic: Default selection for UPnP. UPnP module helps users choosing the
IP address of the switch device. It finds the first available system IP address.
Static: The user specifies the IP interface VLAN for choosing the IP address of
the switch device.
Static VLAN
Interface ID The index of the specific IP VLAN interface. It will only be applied when IP
Addressing Mode is static. Valid configurable values ranges from 1 to 4095.
Default value is 1.
Buttons
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
50 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
An example of how UpnP devices appear in My Network Places:
DHCP relay
DHCP Relay is used to forward and to transfer DHCP messages between the clients
and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain.
The DHCP option 82 enables a DHCP relay agent to insert specific information into a
DHCP request packets when forwarding client DHCP packets to a DHCP server and
remove the specific information from a DHCP reply packets when forwarding server
DHCP packets to a DHCP client. The DHCP server can use this information to
implement IP address or other assignment policies. Specifically, the option works by
setting two sub-options:
• Circuit ID (option 1). This sub-option should include information specific to which
circuit the request came in on.
• Remote ID (option 2). This sub-option is designed to carry information relating to the
remote host end of the circuit.
The definition of Circuit ID in the switch is four bytes in length and the format is
"vlan_id" "module_id" "port_no". The parameter of "vlan_id" is the first two bytes
representing the VLAN ID. The parameter of "module_id" is the third byte for the
module ID (in a standalone switch it always equals 0; in the switch it means switch ID).
The parameter of "port_no" is the fourth byte and it means the port number.
The remote ID is six bytes in length, and the value equals the DHCP relay agent’s MAC
address. Configure DHCP relay in the DHCP Relay Configuration page.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 51
Chapter 4: Web configuration
This page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Relay Mode Indicates the DHCP relay mode operation. Possible modes are:
Enabled: Enable DHCP relay mode operation. When enabling DHCP relay
mode operation, the agent forwards and transfers DHCP messages between
the clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain and
the DHCP broadcast message won't flood due to security settings.
Disabled: Disable DHCP relay mode operation.
Relay Server Indicates the DHCP relay server IP address. A DHCP relay agent is used to
forward and transfer DHCP messages between the clients and the server
when they are not on the same subnet domain.
Relay Information
Mode Indicates the DHCP relay information mode option operation. Possible modes
are:
Enabled: Enable DHCP relay information mode operation. When enabling
DHCP relay information mode operation, the agent inserts specific information
(option82) into a DHCP message when forwarding to DHCP server and
removes it from a DHCP message when transferring to DHCP client. It only
works when DHCP relay operation mode is enabled.
Disabled: Disable DHCP relay information mode operation.
Relay Information
Policy Indicates the DHCP relay information option policy. When enabling DHCP
relay information mode operation, if the agent receives a DHCP message that
already contains relay agent information, it will enforce the policy. This only
works when DHCP relay information operation mode is enabled. Options are:
Replace: Replace the original relay information when receiving a DHCP
message that already contains it.
Keep: Keep the original relay information when receiving a DHCP message
that already contains it.
Drop: Drop the package when receiving a DHCP message that already
contains relay information.
Buttons
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
DHCP relay statistics
This page provides statistics for DHCP relay.
52 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Server statistics:
Object Description
Transmit to Server The number of packets relayed from client to server.
Transmit Error The number of packets erroneously sent to clients.
Receive from Server The number of packets received from the server.
Receive Missing Agent
Option The number of packets received without agent information options.
Receive Missing Circuit ID The number of packets received with the Circuit ID option missing.
Receive Missing Remote ID The number of packets received with the Remote ID option missing.
Receive Bad Circuit ID The number of packets in which the Circuit ID option does not match
with the known circuit ID.
Receive Bad Remote ID The number of packets in which the Remote ID option does not
match with the known Remote ID.
Client statistics:
Object Description
Transmit to Client The number of packets relayed from server to client.
Transmit Error The number of packets erroneously sent to servers.
Receive from Client The number of packets received from the server.
Receive Agent Option The number of packets received with the relay agent information
option.
Replace Agent Option The number of packets received is replaced with the relay agent
information option.
Keep Agent Option The number of packets received is kept with the relay agent
information option.
Drop Agent Option The number of packets received is dropped with the relay agent
information option.
Buttons
• Select the Auto-refresh check box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic
refresh occurs every three seconds.
• Click Refresh to immediately refresh the page.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 53
Chapter 4: Web configuration
• Click Clear to clear all statistics.
CPU load
This page displays the CPU load using an SVG graph. The load is measured as
average over the last 100 ms, 1 second, and 10 second intervals. The last 120 samples
are graphed, and the last numbers are displayed as text as well. To display the SVG
graph, the browser must support the SVG format. Consult the SVG Wiki for more
information on browser support as a plugin may be required.
Buttons
• Select the Auto-refresh check box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic
refresh occurs every three seconds.
Note: If the browser does not display anything on this page, download the Adobe SVG
tool and install it in the computer.
System log
The System Log Information page shows the managed switch system log information.
54 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
ID The ID (>= 1) of the system log entry.
Level The level of the system log entry. The following level types are
supported:
Info: Information level of the system log.
Warning: Warning level of the system log.
Error: Error level of the system log.
All: All levels.
Clear Level Clears the system log entry level. The following level types are
supported:
Info: Information level of the system log.
Warning: Warning level of the system log.
Error: Error level of the system log.
All: All levels.
Time The time of the system log entry.
Message The message of the system log entry.
Buttons
• Select the Auto-refresh check box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic
refresh occurs every three seconds.
• Click Refresh to immediately refresh the page.
• Click Clear to clear all statistics.
• Click Hide to hide the selected log entries.
• Click Download to download the selected log entries.
• Click I<< to update the system log entries, starting from the first available entry ID.
• Click << to update the system log entries, ending at the last entry currently
displayed.
• Click >> to update the system log entries, starting from the last entry currently
displayed.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 55
Chapter 4: Web configuration
• Click >>I to update the system log entries, ending at the last available entry ID.
Detailed log
The Detailed System Log Information page displays the managed switch system log
information details.
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
ID The ID (>= 1) of the system log entry.
Message The message of the system log entry.
Buttons
• Click Download to download the system log entry to the current entry ID.
• Click Refresh to update the system log entry to the current entry ID.
• Click I<< to update the system log entries, starting from the first available entry ID.
• Click << to update the system log entries, ending at the last entry currently
displayed.
• Click >> to update the system log entries, starting from the last entry currently
displayed.
• Click >>I to update the system log entries, ending at the last available entry ID.
• Click Print to print the system log entry to the current entry ID.
Remote syslog
The System Log Configuration page displays the managed switch remote system log
information details.
56 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Mode Indicates the server mode operation. When the mode operation is
enabled, the syslog message is sent to the syslog server. The syslog
protocol is based on UDP communication and received on UDP port
514. The syslog server will not send acknowledgments back to
sender since UDP is a connectionless protocol and it does not
provide acknowledgments. The syslog packet is always sent out even
if the syslog server does not exist. Selections include:
Enabled: Enable remote syslog mode operation.
Disabled: Disable remote syslog mode operation.
Syslog Server IP Indicates the IPv4 host address of syslog server. If the switch
provides the DNS feature, it also can be a host name.
Syslog Level Indicates what kind of message is sent to the syslog server.
Selections include:
Info: Send information, warnings, and errors.
Warning: Send warnings and errors.
Error: Send errors.
Buttons
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
SMTP configuration
The SMTP Configuration page displays the managed switch SMTP configuration
details.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 57
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
SMTP Mode Controls whether or not SMTP is enabled on the switch.
SMTP Server Type the SMTP server name or the IP address of the SMTP server.
SMTP Port Set the port number of SMTP service.
SMTP Authentication SMTP authentication is enabled if selected. Authentication is required
when an email is sent.
Authentication User Name Type the user name for the SMTP server if Authentication is Enable.
Authentication Password Type the password for the SMTP server if Authentication is Enable.
E-mail From Type the sender’s email address. This address is used for reply
emails.
E-mail Subject Type the subject/title of the email.
E-mail 1 To / E-mail 2 To Type the receiver’s email address.
Buttons
• Click test to send a test mail to the mail server to indicate if the account is available.
• Click Save to save changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
Web firmware upgrade
Update the managed switch firmware using the Firmware Upload page.
58 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
To open the Firmware Upload page:
1. Click System > Web Firmware Upgrade. The Firmware Upload page appears.
2. Click the Browse button on the main page. The file selection menu to choose
firmware appears.
3. Select the firmware file and then click Upload. The Software Upload Progress
displays the file with upload status.
4. After the software is uploaded to the system successfully, the following screen
appears. The system loads the new software after reboot.
Note: DO NOT Power OFF the managed switch until the update progress is
completed.
Note: Do not quit the Firmware Upgrade page without clicking the OK button after the
image is loaded. Otherwise, the system won’t apply the new firmware and the user has
to repeat the firmware upgrade process.
Save startup configuration
This function ensures that the current active configuration can be used after the next
reboot.
After clicking Save Configuration, the following screen appears.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 59
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Configuration download
The managed switch stores its configuration in a number of text files in CLI format. The
files are either virtual (RAM-based) or stored in flash on the switch.
There are three system files:
• running-config: A virtual file that represents the currently active configuration on
the switch. This file is volatile.
• startup-config: The startup configuration for the switch, read at boot time.
• default-config: A read-only file with vendor-specific configuration. This file is read
when the system is restored to default settings.
It is also possible to store up to two other files and apply them to running-config,
thereby switching configuration.
The Download Configuration page permits the download of the running-config, startup-
config, and default-config system files to the switch.
Configuration upload
The Upload Configuration page permits the upload of the running-config and startup-
config to the switch.
60 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
If the destination is running-config, the file will be applied to the switch configuration.
This can be done in two ways:
• Replace mode: The current configuration is fully replaced with the configuration in
the uploaded file.
• Merge mode: The uploaded file is merged into running-config.
If the file system is full (i.e., it contains the system files mentioned above plus two other
files), it is not possible to create new files unless an existing file is overwritten or
another is deleted first.
Configuration activate
The Activate Configuration page permits activation of the startup-config and default-
config files on the switch.
It is possible to activate any of the configuration files present on the switch, except for
running-config which represents the currently active configuration.
Select the file to activate and click Activate Configuration. This initiates the process of
completely replacing the existing configuration with that of the selected file.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 61
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Configuration delete
The Delete Configuration page permits the deletion of the startup-config and default-
config files which are stored in Flash memory. If this is performed and the switch is
rebooted without a prior save operation, it effectively resets the switch to default
configuration.
Image select
This page provides information about the active and alternate (backup) firmware
images in the device, and allows you to revert to the alternate image. The web page
displays two tables with information about the active and alternate firmware images.
Note: If the active firmware image is the alternate image, only the "Active Image" table
is shown. In this case, the Activate Alternate Image button is also disabled.
Note:
1. If the alternate image is active (due to a corruption of the primary image or by
manual intervention), uploading a new firmware image to the device will activate
the primary image slot and use it instead.
2. The firmware version and date information may be empty for older firmware
releases. This does not constitute an error.
62 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Image The flash index name of the firmware image. The name of primary
(preferred) image is image, the alternate image is named image.bk.
Version The version of the firmware image.
Date The date when the firmware was produced.
Buttons
• Click Activate Alternate Image to use the alternate image. This button may be
disabled depending on the system state.
System reboot
The Restart Device page permits the device to be rebooted from a remote location.
After clicking the Yes button to restart, log in to the web interface about 60 seconds
later.
Buttons
• Click Yes to reboot the system.
• Click No to return to the Port State page without rebooting the system.
Note: You can also check the SYS LED on the front panel to identify whether of not the
system is loaded completely. If the SYS LED is blinking, then it is in the firmware load
stage; if the SYS LED light is on, you can use the web browser to log in to the managed
switch.
DHCP server
Mode
The DHCP Server Excluded IP Configuration page offers permits exclusion of IP
addresses for static IP address devices, such as servers or routesr. The DHCP server
will not allocate these excluded IP addresses to the DHCP client.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 63
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Delete Permits deletion of an IP range.
IP Range Defines the IP address range to be excluded. The first excluded IP
must be smaller than or equal to the second excluded IP. If the IP
range contains only 1 excluded IP, input it to either one of the first
and second excluded IPs or both.
Buttons
• Click Add IP Range to add an IP range.
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
Pool
The DHCP Server Pool Configuration page manages DHCP pools. According to the
DHCP pool, the DHCP server will allocate IP addresses and deliver configuration
parameters to the DHCP client. Adding a pool and giving it a name creates a new pool
with a default configuration. If you want to configure all settings including type, IP
subnet mask, and lease time, click the pool name to go into the configuration page.
64 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Delete Permits deletion of pool settings.
Name Configure the pool name that accepts all printable characters, except
white space. If you want to configure the detail settings, click the pool
name to go into the configuration page.
Type Indicates the pool type.
Network: The pool defines a pool of IP addresses to service more
than one DHCP client.
Host: the pool services for a specific DHCP client identified by client
identifier or hardware address.
If "-" appears, it means not defined.
IP Indicates the network number of the DHCP address pool.
If "-" appears, it means not defined.
Subnet Mask Indicates the subnet mask of the DHCP address pool.
If "-" appears, it means not defined.
Lease Time Indicates the lease time of the pool.
Buttons
• Click Add New Pool to add a new DHCP pool.
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
Click a pool name to configure DHCP pool settings on the DHCP Pool Configuration
page.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 65
Chapter 4: Web configuration
66 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Name Select a pool by pool name.
Pool Name Indicates the selected pool name.
Type Specifies the pool type.
Network: the pool defines a pool of IP addresses to service more
than one DHCP client.
Host: the pool services for a specific DHCP client identified by client
identifier or hardware address.
IP Indicates the specific network number of the DHCP address pool.
Subnet Mask DHCP option 1.
Specifies the subnet mask of the DHCP address pool.
Lease Time DHCP option 51, 58 and 59.
Specifies the lease time that allows the client to request a lease time
for the IP address. If all are 0's, then it means the lease time is
infinite.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 67
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Object Description
Domain Name DHCP option 15.
Specifies a domain name that the client should use when resolving a
hostname via DNS.
Broadcast Address DHCP option 28.
Specifies the broadcast address in use on the client's subnet.
Default Router DHCP option 3.
Specifies a list of IP addresses for routers on the client's subnet.
DNS Server DHCP option 6.
Specifies a list of Domain Name System name servers available to
the client.
NTP Server DHCP option 42.
Specifies a list of IP addresses indicating NTP servers available to
the client.
NetBIOS Node Type DHCP option 46.
Specifies NetBIOS node type option to allow Netbios over TCP/IP
clients which are configurable as described in RFC 1001/1002.
NetBIOS Scope DHCP option 47.
Specifies the NetBIOS over TCP/IP scope parameter for the client as
specified in RFC 1001/1002.
NetBIOS Name Server DHCP option 44.
Specifies a list of NBNS name servers listed in order of preference.
NIS Domain Name DHCP option 40.
Specifies the name of the client's NIS domain.
NIS Server DHCP option 41.
Specifies a list of IP addresses indicating NIS servers available to the
client.
Client Identifier DHCP option 61.
Specifies the client's unique identifier to be used when the pool is the
type of host. Select the type of client identifier at first.
None: client identifier is not specified yet.
Name: the type of client identifier is other than hardware.
MAC: the type of client identifier is MAC address.
Hardware Address Specifies the client's hardware (MAC) address to be used when the
pool is the type of host.
Client Name DHCP option 12.
Specifies the name of client to be used when the pool is the type of
host.
Vendor 1 Class Identifier DHCP option 60.
Specifies the identifier to be used by the DHCP client to optionally
identify the vendor type and configuration of a DHCP client. The
DHCP server delivers the corresponding option 43 specific
information to the client that sends an option 60 vendor class
identifier.
Vendor 1 Specific
Information DHCP option 43.
Specifies the vendor specific information according to the option 60
68 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Object Description
vendor class identifier.
Vendor 2 Class identifier DHCP option 60.
Specifies the identifier to be used by the DHCP client to optionally
identify the vendor type and configuration of a DHCP client. The
DHCP server delivers the corresponding option 43 specific
information to the client that sends the option 60 vendor class
identifier.
Vendor 2 Specific
Information DHCP option 43.
Specifies vendor specific information according to the option 60
vendor class identifier.
Vendor 3 Class Identifier DHCP option 60.
Specifies the identifier to be used by the DHCP client to optionally
identify the vendor type and configuration of a DHCP client. The
DHCP server delivers the corresponding option 43 specific
information to the client that sends the option 60 vendor class
identifier.
Vendor 3 Specific
Information DHCP option 43.
Specifies vendor specific information according to the option 60
vendor class identifier.
Vendor 4 Class Identifier DHCP option 60.
Specifies the identifier to be used by the DHCP client to optionally
identify the vendor type and configuration of a DHCP client. The
DHCP server delivers the corresponding option 43 specific
information to the client that sends the option 60 vendor class
identifier.
Vendor 4 Specific
Information DHCP option 43.
Specify vendor specific information according to the option 60 vendor
class identifier.
Buttons
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
Statistics
The DHCP Server Statistics page displays the database counters and the number of
DHCP messages sent and received by the DHCP server.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 69
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Database counters
Displays the counters of various databases.
Object Description
Automatic Binding Number of bindings with network-type pools.
Manual Binding Number of bindings that the administrator assigns an IP address to a
client (host pool type).
Expired Binding Number of bindings in which the lease time expired or they are
cleared from Automatic/Manual type bindings.
Binding counters
Displays the counters of various bindings.
Object Description
Automatic Binding Number of bindings with network-type pools.
Manual Binding Number of bindings that the administrator assigns an IP address to a
client (host pool type).
Expired Binding Number of bindings in which the lease time expired or they are
cleared from Automatic/Manual type bindings.
70 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
DHCP message received counters
Displays the counters of DHCP messages received by the DHCP server.
Object Description
Discover Number of DHCP DISCOVER messages received.
Request Number of DHCP REQUEST messages received.
Decline Number of DHCP DECLINE messages received.
Release Number of DHCP RELEASE messages received.
Inform Number of DHCP INFORM messages received.
DHCP message sent counters
Displays the counters of DHCP messages sent by the DHCP server.
Object Description
Offer Number of DHCP OFFER messages sent.
Ack Number of DHCP ACK messages sent.
Nak Number of DHCP NAK messages sent.
Buttons
• Select the Auto-refresh check box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic
refresh occurs every three seconds.
• Click Refresh to refresh the page immediately.
• Click Clear to clear DHCP message received and sent counters.
Binding
The DHCP Server Binding IP page displays bindings generated for DHCP clients.
The page includes the following fields:
Binding IP address
Displays all bindings.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 71
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Object Description
IP IP address allocated to the DHCP client.
Type Type of binding. Possible types are Automatic, Manual, Expired.
State State of binding. Possible states are Committed, Allocated, Expired.
Pool Name The pool that generates the binding.
Server ID Server IP address that services the binding.
Buttons
• Select the Auto-refresh check box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic
refresh occurs every three seconds.
• Click Refresh to refresh the page immediately.
• Click Clear Selected to clear the selected bindings. If the selected binding is
Automatic or Manual, then it is changed to Expired. If the selected binding is
Expired, then it is freed.
• Click Clear Automatic to clear all automatic bindings and change them to Expired
bindings.
• Click Clear Manual to clear all manual bindings and change them to Expired
bindings.
• Click Clear Expired to clear all expired bindings and free them.
Declined IP
The DHCP Server Declined IP page displays declined IP addresses.
The page includes the following fields:
Declined IP address
Displays IP addresses declined by DHCP clients.
Object Description
Declined IP List of IP addresses declined.
72 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Buttons
• Select the Auto-refresh check box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic
refresh occurs every three seconds.
• Click Refresh to refresh the page immediately.
Detailed statistics
The DHCP Detailed Statistics page provides statistics for DHCP snooping. Note that
the normal forward per-port TX statistics are not increased if the incoming DHCP
packet is done by a L3 forwarding mechanism. Clearing the statistics on a specific port
may not affect global statistics since it gathers a different layer overview.
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
RX and TX Discover The number of discover (option 53 with value 1) packets received and
transmitted.
RX and TX Offer The number of offer (option 53 with value 2) packets received and
transmitted.
RX and TX request The number of request (option 53 with value 3) packets received and
transmitted.
RX and TX Decline The number of decline (option 53 with value 4) packets received and
transmitted.
RX and TX ACK The number of ACK (option 53 with value 5) packets received and
transmitted.
RX amd TX NAK The number of NAK (option 53 with value 6) packets received and
transmitted.
RX and TX Release The number of release (option 53 with value 7) packets received and
transmitted.
RX and TX Inform The number of inform (option 53 with value 8) packets received and
transmitted.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 73
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Object Description
RX and TX Lease Query The number of lease query (option 53 with value 10) packets
received and transmitted.
RX and TX Lease
Unassigned The number of lease unassigned (option 53 with value 11) packets
received and transmitted.
RX and TX Lease Unknown The number of lease unknown (option 53 with value 12) packets
received and transmitted.
RX and TX lease Active The number of lease active (option 53 with value 13) packets
received and transmitted.
RX Discarded Checksum
Error The number of discarded packets where IP/UDP checksum is in
error.
RX Discarded from
Untrused The number of discarded packets that are coming from an untrusted
port.
Buttons
• Select the Auto-refresh check box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic
refresh occurs every three seconds.
• Click Refresh to refresh the page immediately.
• Click Clear to clear the counters for the selected port.
UDLD
The UDLD Port Configuration page permits the user to inspect and change the current
Unidirectional Link Detection (UDLD) configurations.
74 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Port Port number of the switch.
UDLD Mode Configures the UDLD mode on a port. Selections inlcude Disable,
Normal and Aggressive. Default mode is Disable.
Disable – In disabled mode, UDLD functionality doesn't exist on the
port.
Normal – In normal mode, if the link state of the port was determined
to be unidirectional, it will not affect the port state.
Aggressive – In aggressive mode, unidirectional detected ports will
get shut down. To bring back the ports up, disable UDLD on the
ports.
Message Interval Configures the period of time between UDLD probe messages on
ports that are in the advertisement phase and are determined to be
bidirectional. The range is from 7 to 90 seconds (default value is 7
seconds). Currently, the default time interval is supported due to lack
of detailed information in RFC 5171.
Buttons
• Click Save to save changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
UDLD status
The Detailed UDLD Status/Neighbor Status page displays the UDLD status of the
ports.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 75
Chapter 4: Web configuration
UDLD port status
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
UDLD Admin State The current port state of the logical port, Enabled if any of
state(Normal,Aggressive) is Enabled.
Device ID (Local) The ID of Device.
Device Name (Local) Name of the Device.
Bidirectional State The current state of the port.
Neighbor status
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Port The current port of the neighbor device.
Device ID The current ID of the neighbor device.
Link Status The current link status of the neighbor port.
Device Name Name of the neighbor device.
Buttons
• Select the Auto-refresh check box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic
refresh occurs every three seconds.
• Click Refresh to refresh the page immediately.
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
SNMP overview
The Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is an application layer protocol that
facilitates the exchange of management information between network devices. It is part
of the Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) protocol suite. SNMP
permits network administrators to manage network performance, find and solve network
problems, and plan for network growth.
An SNMP-managed network consists of the following:
• Network management stations (NMSs): Sometimes called consoles, these
devices execute management applications that monitor and control network
elements. Physically, NMSs are usually engineering workstation-caliber computers
with fast CPUs, megapixel color displays, substantial memory, and abundant disk
space. At least one NMS must be present in each managed environment.
76 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
• Agents: Agents are software modules that reside in network elements. They collect
and store management information such as the number of error packets received by
a network element.
• Management information base (MIB): An MIB is a collection of managed objects
residing in a virtual information store. Collections of related managed objects are
defined in specific MIB modules.
• Network-management protocol: A management protocol is used to convey
management information between agents and NMSs. SNMP is the Internet
community's de facto standard management protocol.
SNMP operations
SNMP itself is a simple request/response protocol. NMSs can send multiple requests
without receiving a response.
• Get – Allows the NMS to retrieve an object instance from the agent.
• Set – Allows the NMS to set values for object instances within an agent.
• Trap – Used by the agent to asynchronously inform the NMS of some event. The
SNMPv2 trap message is designed to replace the SNMPv1 trap message.
SNMP community
An SNMP community is the group that devices and management stations running
SNMP belong to. It helps define where information is sent. The community name is
used to identify the group. An SNMP device or agent may belong to more than one
SNMP community. It will not respond to requests from management stations that do not
belong to one of its communities. SNMP default communities are:
• Write (private)
• Read (public)
Use the SNMP Menu to display or configure the managed switch's SNMP function. This
section has the following items:
System Configuration Configure SNMP on this page.
Trap Destination
Configuration Configure SNMP trap on this page.
Trap Source Configuration Configure SNMP trap source on this page.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 77
Chapter 4: Web configuration
System Information The system information is provided here.
SNMPv3 Communities Configure SNMPv3 communities table on this page.
SNMPv3 Users Configure SNMPv3 users table on this page.
SNMPv3 Groups Configure SNMPv3 groups table on this page.
SNMPv3 Views Configure SNMPv3 views table on this page.
SNMPv3 Access Configure SNMPv3 accesses table on this page.
SNMP system configuration
Configure SNMP on the SNMP System Configuration page.
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Mode Indicates the SNMP mode operation. Selections include:
Enabled: Enable SNMP mode operation.
Disabled: Disable SNMP mode operation.
Engine ID Indicates the SNMPv3 engine ID. The string must contain an even
number between 10 and 64 hexadecimal digits, but all-zeros and all-
'F's are not allowed. Change of the Engine ID will clear all original
local users.
Buttons
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
78 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
SNMP trap configuration
Configure the SNMP trap on the SNMP Trap Configuration page.
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Trap Config Indicates the trap configuration name. The allowed string length is 0
to 255, and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126.
Trap Mode Indicates the SNMP trap mode operation. Selections include:
Enabled: Enable SNMP trap mode operation.
Disabled: Disable SNMP trap mode operation.
Trap Version Indicates the SNMP trap supported version. Selections include:
SNMP v1: Set SNMP trap supported version 1.
SNMP v2c: Set SNMP trap supported version 2c.
SNMP v3: Set SNMP trap supported version 3.
Write Community Indicates the community write access string to permit access to the
SNMP agent. The allowed string length is 0 to 255, and the allowed
content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126.
The field is applicable only when the SNMP version is SNMPv1 or
SNMPv2c. If the SNMP version is SNMPv3, the community string will
be associated with the SNMPv3 communities table. It provides more
flexibility to configure a security name than a SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c
community string. In addition to the community string, a particular
range of source addresses can be used to restrict the source subnet.
Trap Community Indicates the community access string when sending the SNMP trap
packet. The allowed string length is 0 to 255, and the allowed content
is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 79
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Object Description
Trap Destination Address Indicates the SNMP trap destination address. It allows a valid IP
address in dotted decimal notation ('x.y.z.w') as well as a valid
hostname. A valid hostname is a string drawn from the alphabet (A-
Za-z), digits (0-9), dot (.), dash (-). Spaces are not allowed, the first
character must be an alpha character, and the first and last
characters must not be a dot or a dash.
Indicates the SNMP trap destination IPv6 address. IPv6 address is in
128-bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal
digits with a colon separating each field (:). For example,
'fe80::215:c5ff:fe03:4dc7'. The symbol '::' is a special syntax that can
be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16-bit groups of
contiguous zeros; but it can appear only once. It can also represent a
legally valid IPv4 address. For example, '::192.1.2.34'.
Trap Destination Port Indicates the SNMP trap destination port. The SNMP agent sends an
SNMP message via this port. The port range is 1~65535.
Trap Inform Mode Indicates the SNMP trap inform mode operation. Selections include:
Enabled: Enable SNMP trap authentication failure.
Disabled: Disable SNMP trap authentication failure.
Trap Inform Timeout
(seconds) Indicates the SNMP trap inform timeout. The allowed range is 0 to
2147.
Trap Inform Retry Times Indicates the SNMP trap inform retry times. The allowed range is 0 to
255.
Trap Probe Security Engine
ID Indicates the SNMPv3 trap probe security engine ID mode of
operation. Selections include:
Enabled: Enable SNMP trap probe security engine ID mode of
operation.
Disabled: Disable SNMP trap probe security engine ID mode of
operation.
Trap Security Engine ID Indicates the SNMP trap security engine ID. SNMPv3 sends traps
and informs using USM for authentication and privacy. A unique
engine ID for these traps and informs is needed. When Trap Probe
Security Engine ID is enabled, the ID will be probed automatically.
Otherwise, the ID specified in this field is used. The string must
contain an even number (in hexadecimal format) with number of
digits between 10 and 64, but all zeros and all-'F's are not allowed.
Trap Security Name Indicates the SNMP trap security name. SNMPv3 traps and informs
using USM for authentication and privacy. A unique security name is
needed when traps and informs are enabled.
Buttons
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
SNMP system information
The switch system information is provided in the System Information Configuration
page.
80 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
System Contact The textual identification of the contact person for this managed node
and information on how to contact this person. The allowed string
length is 0 to 255, and the allowed content is the ASCII characters
from 32 to 126.
System Name An administratively assigned name for this managed node. By
convention, this is the node's fully-qualified domain name. A domain
name is a text string drawn from the alphabet (A-Za-z), digits (0-9),
minus sign (-). No space characters are permitted as part of a name.
The first character must be an alpha character. And the first or last
character must not be a minus sign. The allowed string length is 0 to
255.
System Location The physical location of this node (e.g., telephone closet, 3rd floor).
The allowed string length is 0 to 255, and the allowed content is the
ASCII characters from 32 to 126.
Buttons
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
Trap source configuration
Configure SNMP trap source configuration on the Trap Configuration page. You don’t
need to configure the subset OID if you want to apply this trap to the whole SNMP OID.
For example, if you want to apply a trap for any port “link down” or “link up,” then
configure them like as in the screen below. If you want to apply link up or link down to
one of ports, input the SNMP OID to the subset OID column. For example, if you want
apply a link down trap to port1, input “10000001” in the linkDown entry.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 81
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Delete Select the check box to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the
next save.
Name Indicates the name for the entry.
Type The filter type for the entry. Selections include:
included: An optional flag to indicate a trap is sent for the given trap
source is matched.
excluded: An optional flag to indicate a trap is not sent for the given
trap source is matched.
Subset OID The subset OID for the entry. The value depends on the trap name
type. For example, the ifIdex is the subset OID of linkUp and
linkDown. A valid subset OID is one or more digital numbers (0-
4294967295) or asterisk(*) which are separated by dots(.). The first
character must not begin with an asterisk (*) and the maximum of
OID count must not exceed 128.
Buttons
• Click Add New Entry to add a new community entry.
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
82 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
SNMPv3 configuration
SNMPv3 communities
Configure SNMPv3 communities in the SNMPv3 Community Configuration page. The
entry index key is Community.
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Delete Select the check box to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the
next save.
Community Name Indicates the security name to map the community to the SNMP
Groups configuration. The allowed string length is 1 to 32, and the
allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126.
Community Secret Indicates the community secret (access string) to permit access using
SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c to the SNMP agent. The allowed string
length is 1 to 32, and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33
to 126.
Source IP Indicates the SNMP access source address. A particular range of
source addresses can be used to restrict the source subnet when
combined with the source mask.
Source Mask Indicates the SNMP access source address mask.
Buttons
• Click Add New Entry to add a new community entry.
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
SNMPv3 users
Configure SNMPv3 users on the SNMPv3 User Configuration page. The entry index
keys are Engine ID and User Name.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 83
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Delete Select Delete to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next
save.
Engine ID An octet string identifying the engine ID that this entry should belong
to. The string must contain an even number (in hexadecimal format)
with a number of digits between 10 and 64, but all zeros and all 'F's
are not allowed. The SNMPv3 architecture uses the User-based
Security Model (USM) for message security and the View-based
Access Control Model (VACM) for access control. For the USM entry,
the usmUserEngineID and usmUserName are the entry's keys.
In a simple agent, usmUserEngineID is always the same as the
snmpEngineID value. The value can also take the value of the
snmpEngineID of a remote SNMP engine with which this user can
communicate. In other words, if user engine ID equal system engine
ID then it is local user, otherwise it is a remote user.
User Name A string identifying the user name that this entry should belong to.
The allowed string length is 1 to 32, and the allowed content is ASCII
characters from 33 to 126.
Security Level Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to.
Selections include:
NoAuth, NoPriv: None authentication and none privacy.
Auth, NoPriv: Authentication and none privacy.
Auth, Priv: Authentication and privacy.
The value of the security level cannot be modified if the entry already
exists. Ensure that the value is set correctly.
Authentication Protocol Indicates the authentication protocol that this entry should belong to.
Selections include:
None: None authentication protocol.
MD5: An optional flag to indicate that this user using MD5
authentication protocol.
SHA: An optional flag to indicate that this user using SHA
authentication protocol.
The value of security level cannot be modified if the entry already
exists. Ensure that the value is set correctly.
Authentication Password A string identifying the authentication pass phrase. For MD5
authentication protocol, the allowed string length is 8 to 32. For SHA
authentication protocol, the allowed string length is 8 to 40. The
allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126.
Privacy Protocol Indicates the privacy protocol that this entry should belong to.
Selections include:
None: None privacy protocol.
84 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Object Description
DES: An optional flag to indicate that this user using DES
authentication protocol.
AES: An optional flag to indicate that this user uses AES
authentication protocol.
Privacy Password A string identifying the privacy pass phrase. The allowed string length
is 8 to 32, and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to
126.
Buttons
• Click Add New Entry to add a new user entry.
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
SNMPv3 groups
Configure SNMPv3 groups on the SMNPv3 Group Configuration page. The entry index
keys are Security Model and Security Name.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 85
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Delete Select Delete to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next
save.
Security Model Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to.
Selections include:
v1: Reserved for SNMPv1.
v2c: Reserved for SNMPv2c.
usm: User-based Security Model (USM).
Security Name A string identifying the security name that this entry should belong to.
The allowed string length is 1 to 32, and the allowed content is the
ASCII characters from 33 to 126.
Group Name A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to.
The allowed string length is 1 to 32, and the allowed content is the
ASCII characters from 33 to 126.
Buttons
• Click Add New Entry to add a new group entry.
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
SNMPv3 views
Configure SNMPv3 views table in the SNMPv3 View Configuration page. The entry
index keys are View Name and OID Subtree.
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Delete Select Delete to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next
save.
View Name A string identifies the view name that this entry should belong to. The
allowed string length is 1 to 32, and the allowed content is the ASCII
characters from 33 to 126.
View Type Indicates the view type that this entry should belong to. Selections
include:
included: An optional flag to indicate that this view subtree should be
included.
86 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Object Description
excluded: An optional flag to indicate that this view subtree should
be excluded.
In general, if a view entry's view type is excluded, it should exist in
another view entry in which the view type is included and it's OID
subtree overrides the excluded view entry.
OID Subtree The OID defining the root of the subtree to add to the named view.
The allowed OID length is 1 to 128. The allowed string content is
digital number or asterisk (*).
Buttons
• Click Add New Entry to add a new view entry.
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
SNMPv3 access
Configure SNMPv3 access on the SNMPv3 Access Configuration page. The entry
index keys are Group Name, Security Model, and Security Level.
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Delete Select Delete to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next
save.
Group Name A string identifies the group name that this entry should belong to.
The allowed string length is 1 to 32, and the allowed content is the
ASCII characters from 33 to 126.
Security Model Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to.
Selections include:
any: Accepted any security model (v1, v2c, usm).
v1: Reserved for SNMPv1.
v2c: Reserved for SNMPv2c.
usm: User-based Security Model (USM)
Security Level Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to.
Selections include:
NoAuth, NoPriv: None authentication and none privacy.
Auth, NoPriv: Authentication and none privacy.
Auth, Priv: Authentication and privacy.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 87
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Object Description
Read View Name The name of the MIB view defining the MIB objects for which this
request may request the current values. The allowed string length is 1
to 32, and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126.
Write View Name The name of the MIB view defining the MIB objects for which this
request may potentially SET new values. The allowed string length is
1 to 32, and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to
126.
Buttons
• Click Add New Entry to add a new access entry.
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
Port management
Use the Port menu to display or configure the managed switch ports. This section has
the following items:
Port Configuration Configures port connection settings
Port Statistics Overview Lists Ethernet and RMON port statistics
Port Statistics Detail Lists Ethernet and RMON port statistics
SFP Module Information Displays SFP information
Port Mirror Sets the source and target ports for mirroring
Port configuration
Ports can be configured on the Port Configuration page.
88 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Port This is the logical port number for this row.
Port Description Indicates the per port description.
Link The current link state is displayed graphically. Green indicates the
link is up and red is down.
Current Link Speed Provides the current link speed of the port.
Configured Link Speed Select any available link speed for the given switch port. Draw the
menu bar to select the mode.
Auto: Setup Auto negotiation for copper interface.
10Mbps HDX: Force sets 10Mbps/Half-Duplex mode.
10Mbps FDX: Force sets 10Mbps/Full-Duplex mode.
100Mbps HDX: Force sets 100Mbps/Half-Duplex mode.
100Mbps FDX: Force sets 100Mbps/Full-Duplex mode.
1Gbps FDX: Force sets 10000Mbps/Full-Duplex mode.
Disable: Shutdown the port manually.
Flow Control When Auto Speed is selected on a port, this section indicates the
flow control capability that is advertised to the link partner. When a
fixed-speed setting is selected, that is what is used. The Current Rx
column indicates if pause frames on the port are obeyed, and the
Current Tx column indicates whether pause frames on the port are
transmitted. The Rx and Tx settings are determined by the result of
the last Auto-Negotiation.
Check the configured column to use flow control. This setting is
related to the setting for Configured Link Speed.
Maximum Frame Size Enter the maximum frame size allowed for the switch port, including
FCS. The allowed range is 1518 bytes to 9600 bytes.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 89
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Object Description
Excessive Collision Mode Configure port transmit collision behavior.
Discard: Discard frame after 16 collisions (default).
Restart: Restart back off algorithm after 16 collisions.
Note: If setting each port to run at 100M full-, 100M half-, 10M full-, and 10M half-speed
modes, the auto-MDIX function will be disabled.
Buttons
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
• Click Refresh to refresh the page and undo all local changes.
Port statistics overview
The Port Statistics Overview page provides an overview of general traffic statistics for
all switch ports.
90 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The displayed counters are:
Object Description
Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row.
Packets The number of received and transmitted packets per port.
Bytes The number of received and transmitted bytes per port.
Errors The number of frames received in error and the number of incomplete
transmissions per port.
Drops The number of frames discarded due to ingress or egress congestion.
Filtered The number of received frames filtered by the forwarding process.
Buttons
• Click Download to download the Port Statistics Overview result as an Excel file.
• Click Refresh to refresh the page immediately.
• Click Clear to clear the counters for all ports.
• Click Print to print the Port Statistics Overview result.
• Select the Auto-refresh check box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at
regular intervals.
Port statistics detail
The Port Statistics Detail page provides detailed traffic statistics for a specific switch
port. Use the port select box to select which switch port details to display. The selected
port belongs to the current unit, as reflected by the page header. The displayed
counters are the totals for receive and transmit, the size counters for receive and
transmit, and the error counters for receive and transmit.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 91
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Receive total and transmit total
Object Description
Rx and Tx Packets The number of received and transmitted (good and bad) packets
Rx and Tx Octets The number of received and transmitted (good and bad) bytes,
including FCS, but excluding framing bits.
Rx and Tx Unicast The number of received and transmitted (good and bad) unicast
packets.
Rx and Tx Multicast The number of received and transmitted (good and bad) multicast
packets.
Rx and Tx Broadcast The number of received and transmitted (good and bad) broadcast
packets.
Rx and Tx Pause A count of the MAC Control frames received or transmitted on this
port that has an opcode indicating a PAUSE operation.
Receive and transmit size counters
The number of received and transmitted (good and bad) packets split into categories
based on their respective frame sizes.
Receive and transmit queue counters
The number of received and transmitted packets per input and output queue.
92 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Receive error counters
Object Description
Rx Drops The number of frames dropped due to lack of receive buffers or
egress congestion.
Rx CRC/Alignment The number of frames received with CRC or alignment errors.
Rx Undersize The number of short 1 frames received with valid CRC.
Rx Oversize The number of long 2 frames received with valid CRC.
Rx Fragments The number of short 1 frames received with invalid CRC.
Rx Jabber The number of long 2 frames received with invalid CRC.
Rx Filtered The number of received frames filtered by the forwarding process.
1 Short frames are frames that are smaller than 64 bytes.
2 Long frames are frames that are longer than the configured maximum frame length for this port.
Transmit error counters
Object Description
Tx Drops The number of frames dropped due to output buffer congestion.
Tx Late/Exc. Coll. The number of frames dropped due to excessive or late collisions.
Buttons
• Click Refresh to refresh the page immediately.
• Click Clear to clear the counters for all ports.
• Select the Auto-refresh check box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at
regular intervals.
SFP module information
The managed switch supports SFP modules with the digital diagnostics monitoring
(DDM) function, which is also known as digital optical monitoring (DOM). You can
check the physical or operational status of an SFP module via the SFP Module
Information page. This page shows the operational status such as the transceiver type,
speed, wavelength, optical output power, optical input power, temperature, laser bias
current, and transceiver supply voltage in real time. You can also use the port number
hyperlinks to check the statistics on a specific interface.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 93
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Type Displays the type of current SFP module. The possible types are:
• 10GBase-SR
• 10GBase-LR
• 1000Base-SX
• 1000Base-LX
• 100Base-FX
Speed Displays the speed of the current SFP module. Different vendors’
SFP modules might show different speed information.
Wave Length(nm) Displays the wavelength of current SFP module. Use this column to
check if the wavelength values of two nodes are matched when the
fiber connection fails.
Distance(m) Displays the supported distance of the current SFP module.
Temperature(C)
– SFP DDM Module Only
Displays the temperature of the current SFP DDM module.
Voltage(V)
– SFP DDM Module Only
Displays the voltage of the current SFP DDM module.
Current(mA)
– SFP DDM Module Only
Displays the Ampere of the current SFP DDM module.
TX power(dBm)
– SFP DDM Module Only
Displays the TX power of the current SFP DDM module.
RX power(dBm)
– SFP DDM Module Only
Displays the RX power of the current SFP DDM module.
Buttons
• Select the SFP Monitor Event Alert check box. The switch will be in accordance
with the Warning Temperature setting and allows users to record message out via
SNMP Trap.
94 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
• Click Refresh to refresh the page immediately.
• Select the Auto-refresh check box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at
regular intervals.
Port mirror
Configure port mirroring on the Mirror & RMirror Configuration Table page. This function
provides the monitoring of network traffic that forwards a copy of each incoming or
outgoing packet from one port of a network switch to another port where the packet can
be studied. It enables the manager to keep close track of switch performance and alter
it if necessary.
• To debug network problems, selected traffic can be copied, or mirrored, to a mirror
port where a frame analyzer can be attached to analyze the frame flow.
• The managed switch can unobtrusively mirror traffic from any port to a monitor port.
You can then attach a protocol analyzer or RMON probe to this port to perform
traffic analysis and verify connection integrity.
The traffic to be copied to the mirror port is selected as follows:
• All frames received on a given port (also known as ingress or source mirroring).
• All frames transmitted on a given port (also known as egress or destination
mirroring).
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 95
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Mirror port configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Session ID Select a Session ID hyperlink to configure it.
Mode Enable/Disable the mirror or remote mirroring function.
Type Select the switch type.
VLAN ID The VLAN ID indicates where the monitor packet will copy to. The
default VLAN ID is 200.
Reflector Port The reflector port is a method to redirect the traffic to Remote
Mirroring VLAN. Any device connected to a port set as a reflector port
loses connectivity until the remote mirroring is disabled.
In the stacking mode, you need to select the switch ID to select the
correct device.
If you shut down a port, it cannot be a candidate for a reflector port.
If you shut down the port which is a reflector port, the remote mirror
function will not work.
Note1: The reflector port needs to select only on Source switch
type.
Note2: The reflector port needs to disable MAC Table learning
and STP.
Note3: The reflector port only supports on pure copper ports.
Note: For a given port, a frame is only transmitted once. It is therefore not possible to
mirror Tx frames on the mirror port. Because of this, the mode for the selected mirror
port is limited to Disabled or Rx only.
Buttons
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
96 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Link aggregation
Port Aggregation optimizes port usage by linking a group of ports together to form a
single Link Aggregated Group (LAG). Port aggregation multiplies the bandwidth
between the devices, increases port flexibility, and provides link redundancy.
Each LAG is composed of ports of the same speed, set to full-duplex operations. Ports
in a LAG can be of different media types (UTP/Fiber, or different fiber types), provided
they operate at the same speed.
Aggregated links can be assigned manually (Port Trunk) or automatically by enabling
Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) on the relevant links.
Aggregated links are treated by the system as a single logical port. Specifically, the
aggregated link has similar port attributes to a non-aggregated port, including auto-
negotiation, speed, duplex setting, etc.
The managed switch supports the following aggregation links :
• Static LAGs (Port Trunk) – Force aggregated selected ports to be a trunk group.
• Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) LAGs – LACP LAGs negotiate
aggregated port links with other LACP ports located on a different device. If the
other device ports are also LACP ports, the devices establish a LAG between them.
The Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) provides a standardized means for
exchanging information between partner systems that require high speed redundant
links. Link aggregation permits grouping up to eight consecutive ports into a single
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 97
Chapter 4: Web configuration
dedicated connection. This feature can expand bandwidth to a device on the network.
LACP operation requires full-duplex mode (refer to the IEEE 802.3ad standard for
further details).
Port link aggregations can be used to increase the bandwidth of a network connection
or to ensure fault recovery. Link aggregation permits grouping up to four consecutive
ports into a single dedicated connection between any two managed switches or other
Layer 2 switches. However, before making any physical connections between devices,
use the link aggregation configuration menu to specify the link aggregation on the
devices at both ends. When using a port link aggregation, note that:
• The ports used in a link aggregation must all be of the same media type (RJ45, 100
Mbps fiber).
• The ports that can be assigned to the same link aggregation have certain other
restrictions (see below).
• Ports can only be assigned to one link aggregation.
• The ports at both ends of a connection must be configured as link aggregation
ports.
• None of the ports in a link aggregation can be configured as a mirror source port
or a mirror target port.
• All of the ports in a link aggregation have to be treated as a whole when moved
from/to, added or deleted from a VLAN.
• The Spanning Tree Protocol will treat all the ports in a link aggregation as a
whole.
• Enable the link aggregation prior to connecting any cable between the switches
to avoid creating a data loop.
• Disconnect all link aggregation port cables or disable the link aggregation ports
before removing a port link aggregation to avoid creating a data loop.
It allows a maximum of 10 ports to be aggregated at the same time. The managed
switch supports Gigabit Ethernet ports (up to five groups). If the group is defined as a
LACP static link aggregationing group, then any extra ports selected are placed in a
standby mode for redundancy if one of the other ports fails. If the group is defined as a
local static link aggregationing group, then the number of ports must be the same as
the group member ports.
The aggregation code ensures that frames belonging to the same frame flow (for
example, a TCP connection) are always forwarded on the same link aggregation
member port. Reording of frames within a flow is therefore not possible. The
aggregation code is based on the following information:
• Source MAC
• Destination MAC
• Source and destination IPv4 address.
• Source and destination TCP/UDP ports for IPv4 packets
98 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Normally, all five contributions to the aggregation code should be enabled to obtain the
best traffic distribution among the link aggregation member ports. Each link aggregation
may consist of up to 10 member ports. Any quantity of link aggregations may be
configured for the device (they are only limited by the quantity of ports on the device).
To configure a proper traffic distribution, the ports within a link aggregation must use
the same link speed.
Static aggregation
The Aggregation Mode Configuration page is used to configure the aggregation hash
mode and the aggregation group. The aggregation hash mode settings are global,
whereas the aggregation group relate to the current device, as reflected by the page
header.
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Source MAC Address The Source MAC address can be used to calculate the destination
port for the frame. Select the check box to enable the use of the
Source MAC address, or uncheck it to disable. By default, the Source
MAC Address is enabled.
Destination MAC Address The Destination MAC Address can be used to calculate the
destination port for the frame. Select the check box to enable the use
of the Destination MAC Address, or uncheck it to disable. By default,
the Destination MAC Address is disabled.
IP Address The IP address can be used to calculate the destination port for the
frame. Select the check box to enable the use of the IP Address, or
uncheck it to disable. By default, IP Address is enabled.
TCP/UDP Port Number The TCP/UDP port number can be used to calculate the destination
port for the frame. Select the check box to enable the use of the
TCP/UDP Port Number, or uncheck it to disable. By default, the
TCP/UDP Port Number is enabled.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 99
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Static aggregation group configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Group ID Indicates the group ID for the settings contained in the same row.
Group ID "Normal" indicates there is no aggregation. Only one group
ID is valid per port.
Port Members Each switch port is listed for each group ID. Select a radio button to
include a port in an aggregation, or clear the radio button to remove
the port from the aggregation. By default, no ports belong to any
aggregation group.
Buttons
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
Static aggregation status
The Aggregation Status page shows static aggregation status.
100 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Aggr ID The aggregation ID associated with this aggregation instance.
Name Name of the aggregation group ID.
Type Type of the aggregation group (static or LACP).
Speed Speed of the aggregation group.
Configured Ports Configured member ports of the aggregation group.
Aggregated Ports Aggregated member ports of the aggregation group.
Aggr ID The aggregation ID associated with this aggregation instance.
Buttons
• Click Refresh to refresh the page immediately.
LACP configuration
LACP LAG negotiates aggregated port links with other LACP ports located on a
different device. LACP allows switches connected to each other to discover
automatically whether any ports are member of the same LAG.
This page allows the user to inspect and change the current LACP port configurations.
The LACP port settings relate to the current device, as reflected by the page header.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 101
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Port The switch port number.
LACP Enabled Controls whether or not LACP is enabled on this switch port. LACP
will form an aggregation when two or more ports are connected to the
same partner.
Key The Key value incurred by the port, range 1-65535. Selecting Auto
(default setting) sets the key as appropriate by the physical link
speed: 10Mb = 1, 100Mb = 2, 1Gb = 3. Using the Specific setting, a
user-defined value can be entered. Ports with the same key value
can participate in the same aggregation group, while ports with
different keys cannot.
Role The Role shows the LACP activity status. The Active selection
transmits LACP packets each second, while the Passive setting
waits for a LACP packet from a partner (speak if spoken to).
Timeout The Timeout controls the period between BPDU transmissions. Fast
transmits LACP packets each second, while the Slow selection
provides a wait for 30 seconds before sending a LACP packet.
Priority The Priority controls the priority of the port. If the LACP partner wants
to form a larger group than is supported by this device, then this
parameter controls which ports will be active and which ports will be
in a backup role. Lower number means greater priority.
Buttons
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
LACP system status
The LACP System Status page provides a status overview of all LACP instances. This
page displays the current LACP aggregation groups and LACP port status.
102 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Aggr ID The Aggregation ID associated with this aggregation instance.
For LLAG the ID is shown as 'isid:aggr-id' and for GLAGs as 'aggr-id'
Partner System ID The system ID (MAC address) of the aggregation partner.
Partner Key The key that the partner has assigned to this aggregation ID.
Partner Priority The priority of the aggregation partner.
Last changed The time since this aggregation changed.
Local Ports Shows which ports are a part of this aggregation for this switch.
The format is: "Switch ID:Port".
Buttons
• Click Refresh to to refresh the page immediately.
• Select the Auto-refresh check box to automatically refresh the page every three
seconds.
LACP port status
The LACP Status page provides a LACP status overview of all ports. This page
displays the current LACP aggregation groups and LACP port status.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 103
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Port The switch port number.
LACP 'Yes' means that LACP is enabled and the port link is up. 'No' means
that LACP is not enabled or that the port link is down. 'Backup' means
that the port could not join the aggregation group but will join if other
ports leave. Until that occurs, its LACP status is disabled.
Key The key is assigned to this port. Only ports with the same key can
aggregate together.
Aggregation ID The aggregation ID assigned to this aggregation group.
Partner System ID The partner’s system ID (MAC address).
Partner Port The partner’s port number connected to this port.
Partner Priority The partner's port priority.
Buttons
• Click Refresh to to refresh the page immediately.
• Select the Auto-refresh check box to automatically refresh the page every three
seconds.
LACP port statistics
The LACP Statistics page provides an overview of LACP statistics for all ports.
104 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Port The switch port number.
LACP Received Shows how many LACP frames have been sent from each port.
LACP Transmitted Shows how many LACP frames have been received at each port.
Discarded Shows how many unknown or illegal LACP frames have been
discarded at each port.
Buttons
• Click Refresh to to refresh the page immediately.
• Click Clear to clear the counters for all ports
• Select the Auto-refresh check box to automatically refresh the page every three
seconds.
VLAN
VLAN overview
A Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) is a network topology configured according to a
logical scheme rather than the physical layout. VLAN can be used to combine any
collection of LAN segments into an autonomous user group that appears as a single
LAN. VLAN also logically segment the network into different broadcast domains so that
packets are forwarded only between ports within the VLAN. Typically, a VLAN
corresponds to a particular subnet, although not necessarily. VLAN can enhance
performance by conserving bandwidth, and improve security by limiting traffic to
specific domains.
A VLAN is a collection of end nodes grouped by logic instead of physical location. End
nodes that frequently communicate with each other are assigned to the same VLAN,
regardless of where they are physically on the network. Logically, a VLAN can be
equated to a broadcast domain, because broadcast packets are forwarded only to
members of the VLAN on which the broadcast was initiated.
Note:
1. Regardless of the method used to uniquely identify end nodes and assign VLAN
membership to these nodes, packets cannot cross VLAN without a network device
performing a routing function between the VLANs.
2. The managed switch supports IEEE 802.1Q VLAN. The port untagging function can
be used to remove the 802.1 tag from packet headers to maintain compatibility with
devices that are tag-unaware.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 105
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Note: The managed switch's default is to assign all ports to a single 802.1Q VLAN
named DEFAULT_VLAN. As a new VLAN is created, the member ports assigned to the
new VLAN are removed from the DEFAULT_ VLAN port member list. The
DEFAULT_VLAN has a VID = 1.
This section has the following items:
VLAN Port Configuration Enables VLAN group
VLAN Membership Status Displays VLAN membership status
VLAN Port Status Displays VLAN port status
Private VLAN Creates/removes primary or community VLANs
Port Isolation Enables/disablse port isolation on port
MAC-based VLAN Configures the MAC-based VLAN entries
MAC-based VLAN Status Displays MAC-based VLAN entries
Protocol-based VLAN Configures the protocol-based VLAN entries
Protocol-based VLAN Membership Displays the protocol-based VLAN entries
IEEE 802.1Q VLAN
In large networks, routers are used to isolate broadcast traffic for each subnet into
separate domains. This managed switch provides a similar service at Layer 2 by using
VLANs to organize any group of network nodes into separate broadcast domains.
VLANs confine broadcast traffic to the originating group, and can eliminate broadcast
storms in large networks. This also provides a more secure and cleaner network
environment.
An IEEE 802.1Q VLAN is a group of ports that can be located anywhere in the network,
but communicate as though they belong to the same physical segment.
VLANs help to simplify network management by permitting relocation of devices to a
new VLAN without having to change any physical connections. VLANs can be easily
organized to reflect departmental groups (such as Marketing or R&D), usage groups
(such as email), or multicast groups (used for multimedia applications such as
videoconferencing).
VLANs provide greater network efficiency by reducing broadcast traffic, and permit
network changes without having to update IP addresses or IP subnets. VLANs
inherently provide a high level of network security since traffic must pass through a
configured Layer 3 link to reach a different VLAN.
This managed switch supports the following VLAN features:
• Up to 255 VLANs based on the IEEE 802.1Q standard.
• Port overlapping, allowing a port to participate in multiple VLANs.
• End stations can belong to multiple VLANs.
• Passing traffic between VLAN-aware and VLAN-unaware devices.
• Priority tagging
106 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
IEEE 802.1Q standard
IEEE 802.1Q (tagged) VLAN are implemented on the Switch. 802.1Q VLAN require
tagging, which enables them to span the entire network (assuming all switches on the
network are IEEE 802.1Q compliant).
VLAN allows a network to be segmented in order to reduce the size of broadcast
domains. All packets entering a VLAN will only be forwarded to the stations (over IEEE
802.1Q enabled switches) that are members of that VLAN, and this includes broadcast,
multicast, and unicast packets from unknown sources.
VLAN can also provide a level of security to the network. IEEE 802.1Q VLAN only
delivers packets between stations that are members of the VLAN. Any port can be
configured as either tagging or untagging:
• The untagging feature of IEEE 802.1Q VLAN allows VLAN to work with legacy
switches that don't recognize VLAN tags in packet headers.
• The tagging feature allows VLAN to span multiple 802.1Q compliant switches
through a single physical connection and allows Spanning Tree to be enabled on all
ports and work normally.
Some relevant terms:
• Tagging – The act of putting 802.1Q VLAN information into the header of a packet.
• Untagging – The act of stripping 802.1Q VLAN information out of the packet
header.
802.1Q VLAN tags
There are four additional octets inserted after the source MAC address as shown in the
following 802.1Q tag diagram. Their presence is indicated by a value of 0x8100 in the
Ether Type field. When a packet's Ether Type field is equal to 0x8100, the packet
carries the IEEE 802.1Q/802.1p tag. The tag is contained in the following two octets
and consists of three bits of user priority: One bit of Canonical Format Identifier (CFI -
used for encapsulating Token Ring packets so they can be carried across Ethernet
backbones), and 12 bits of VLAN ID (VID). The three bits of user priority are used by
802.1p. The VID is the VLAN identifier and is used by the 802.1Q standard. Because
the VID is 12 bits long, 4094 unique VLAN can be identified.
The tag is inserted into the packet header making the entire packet longer by four
octets. All of the information originally contained in the packet is retained.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 107
Chapter 4: Web configuration
802.1Q tag
The Ether Type and VLAN ID are inserted after the MAC source address, but before
the original Ether Type/Length or Logical Link Control. Because the packet is now a bit
longer than it was originally, the Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) must be
recalculated.
Adding an IEEE802.1Q tag
Dest. Addr.
Src. Addr.
Length/E. type
Data
Old CRC
Original Ethernet Packet
Dest. Addr.
Src. Addr.
E. type
Tag
Length/E. type
Data
New CRC
Priority
CFI
VLAN ID
Port VLAN ID
Packets that are tagged (carrying the 802.1Q VID information) can be transmitted from
one 802.1Q compliant network device to another with the VLAN information intact. This
allows 802.1Q VLAN to span network devices as well as the entire network if all
network devices are 802.1Q compliant.
Every physical port on a switch has a PVID. 802.1Q ports are also assigned a PVID for
use within the switch. If no VLANs are defined on the switch, all ports are then assigned
to a default VLAN with a PVID equal to 1. Untagged packets are assigned the PVID of
the port on which they were received. Forwarding decisions are based upon this PVID,
in so far as VLANs are concerned. Tagged packets are forwarded according to the VID
contained within the tag. Tagged packets are also assigned a PVID, but the VID, not
the PVID, is used to make packet forwarding decisions.
Tag-aware switches must keep a table to relate PVID within the switch to VID on the
network. The switch compares the VID of a packet to be transmitted to the VID of the
port that is to transmit the packet. If the two VIDs are different, the switch drops the
packet. Because of the existence of the PVID for untagged packets and the VID for
tagged packets, tag-aware and tag-unaware network devices can coexist on the same
network.
A switch port can have only one PVID, but can have as many VIDs as the switch has
memory in its VLAN table to store them.
New Tagged Packet
108 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Because some devices on a network may be tag-unaware, a decision must be made at
each port on a tag-aware device before packets are transmitted – should the packet to
be transmitted have a tag or not? If the transmitting port is connected to a tag-unaware
device, the packet should be untagged. If the transmitting port is connected to a tag-
aware device, the packet should be tagged.
Default VLANs
The managed switch initially configures one VLAN, VID = 1, called "default." The
factory default setting assigns all ports on the Switch to the "default." As new VLANs
are configured in port-based mode, their respective member ports are removed from
the "default."
Assigning ports to VLANs
Before enabling VLANs for the switch, you must first assign each port to the VLAN
group(s) in which it will participate. By default, all ports are assigned to VLAN 1 as
untagged ports. Add a port as a tagged port to have it carry traffic for one or more
VLANs, and any intermediate network devices or the host at the other end of the
connection supports VLANs. Then assign ports on the other VLAN-aware network
devices along the path that will carry this traffic to the same VLAN(s), either manually or
dynamically using GVRP. However, if you want a port on this switch to participate in
one or more VLANs, but none of the intermediate network devices nor the host at the
other end of the connection supports VLANs, then this port should be added to the
VLAN as an untagged port.
Note: VLAN-tagged frames can pass through VLAN-aware or VLAN-unaware network
interconnection devices, but the VLAN tags should be stripped off before passing them
on to any end-node host that does not support VLAN tagging.
VLAN classification
When the switch receives a frame, it classifies the frame in one of two ways. If the
frame is untagged, the switch assigns the frame to an associated VLAN (based on the
default VLAN ID of the receiving port). If the frame is tagged, the switch uses the
tagged VLAN ID to identify the port broadcast domain of the frame.
Port overlapping
Port overlapping can be used to allow access to commonly shared network resources
among different VLAN groups, such as file servers or printers. Note that if you
implement VLANs that do not overlap but still need to communicate, they can be
connected by enabling routing on this switch.
Untagged VLANs
Untagged (or static) VLANs are typically used to reduce broadcast traffic and to
increase security. A group of network users assigned to a VLAN form a broadcast
domain that is separate from other VLANs configured on the switch. Packets are
forwarded only between ports that are designated for the same VLAN. Untagged
VLANs can be used to manually isolate user groups or subnets.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 109
Chapter 4: Web configuration
VLAN port configuration
The Global VLAN Configuration page is used for configuring the managed switch port
VLAN. This page contains fields for managing ports that are part of a VLAN. The port
default VLAN ID (PVID) is also configured on this page. All untagged packets arriving to
the device are tagged by the port’s PVID.
Managed switch nomenclature:
IEEE 802.1Q tagged and untagged
Every port on an 802.1Q compliant switch can be configured as tagged or untagged.
Tagged: Ports with tagging enabled put the VID number, priority, and other VLAN
information into the header of all packets that flow into those ports. If a packet has
previously been tagged, the port will not alter the packet, thus keeping the VLAN
information intact. The VLAN information in the tag can then be used by other 802.1Q
compliant devices on the network to make packet-forwarding decisions.
Untagged: Ports with untagging enabled strip the 802.1Q tag from all packets that flow
into those ports. If the packet doesn't have an 802.1Q VLAN tag, the port will not alter
the packet. Thus, all packets received by and forwarded by an untagging port have no
802.1Q VLAN information (remember that the PVID is only used internally within the
managed switch). Untagging is used to send packets from an 802.1Q-compliant
network device to a non-compliant network device.
Frame Income
Frame Leave
Income Frame is tagged Income Frame is untagged
Leave port is tagged Frame remains tagged Tag is inserted
Leave port is untagged Tag is removed Frame remains untagged
IEEE 802.1Q tunneling (Q-in-Q)
IEEE 802.1Q tunneling (Q-in-Q) is designed for service providers carrying traffic for
multiple customers across their networks. Q-in-Q tunneling is used to maintain
customer-specific VLAN and Layer 2 protocol configurations even when different
customers use the same internal VLAN IDs. This is accomplished by inserting Service
Provider VLAN (SPVLAN) tags into the customer’s frames when they enter the service
provider’s network, and then stripping the tags when the frames leave the network.
A service provider’s customers may have specific requirements for their internal VLAN
IDs and number of VLANs supported. VLAN ranges required by different customers in
the same service-provider network might easily overlap, and traffic passing through the
infrastructure might be mixed. Assigning a unique range of VLAN IDs to each customer
would restrict customer configurations, require intensive processing of VLAN mapping
tables, and could easily exceed the maximum VLAN limit of 4096.
110 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The managed switch supports multiple VLAN tags and can therefore be used in MAN
(Metro Access Network) applications as a provider bridge, aggregating traffic from
numerous independent customer LANs into the MAN space. One of the purposes of the
provider bridge is to recognize and use VLAN tags so that the VLANs in the MAN
space can be used independent of the customers’ VLANs. This is accomplished by
adding a VLAN tag with a MAN-related VID for frames entering the MAN. When leaving
the MAN, the tag is stripped and the original VLAN tag with the customer-related VID is
again available.
This provides a tunneling mechanism to connect remote customer VLANs through a
common MAN space without interfering with the VLAN tags. All tags use EtherType
0x8100 or 0x88A8, where 0x8100 is used for customer tags and 0x88A8 is used for
service provider tags.
In cases where a given service VLAN only has two member ports on the switch, the
learning can be disabled for the particular VLAN and can therefore rely on flooding as
the forwarding mechanism between the two ports. This way, the MAC table
requirements are reduced.
Global VLAN configuration
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 111
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Allowed Access VLANs This field shows the allowed Access VLANs. It only affects ports
configured as access ports. Ports in other modes are members of all
VLANs specified in the Allowed VLANs field.
By default, only VLAN 1 is enabled. More VLANs may be created by
using a list syntax where the individual elements are separated by
commas. Ranges are specified with a dash separating the lower and
upper boundaries.
The following example creates VLANs 1, 10, 11, 12, 13, 200, and
300: 1,10-13,200,300. Spaces are allowed in between the delimiters.
Ethertype for Custom S-
ports This field specifies the Ethertype/TPID (specified in hexadecimal)
used for custom S-ports. The setting is in force for all ports whose
Port Type is set to S-Custom-port.
Port VLAN configuration
112 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Port This is the logical port number for this row.
Mode Access Access ports are normally used to connect to end stations. Dynamic
features like Voice VLAN may add the port to more VLANs behind the
scenes. Access ports have the following characteristics:
• Member of exactly one VLAN, the Port VLAN (Access VLAN),
which by default is 1.
• Accepts untagged and C-tagged frames.
• Discards all frames that are not classified to the Access VLAN.
• On egress, all frames classified to the Access VLAN are
transmitted untagged. Other (dynamically added VLANs) are
transmitted tagged.
Trunk Trunk ports can carry traffic on multiple VLANs simultaneously, and
are normally used to connect to other switches. Trunk ports have the
following characteristics:
• By default, a trunk port is member of all VLANs (1-4095).
• The VLANs that a trunk port is member of may be limited by the
use of Allowed VLANs.
• Frames classified to a VLAN that the port is not a member of are
discarded.
• By default, all frames but frames classified to the Port VLAN
(a.k.a. Native VLAN) get tagged on egress. Frames classified to
the Port VLAN do not get C-tagged on egress.
• Egress tagging can be changed to tag all frames, in which case
only tagged frames are accepted on ingress.
Hybrid Hybrid ports resemble trunk ports in many ways, but add additional
port configuration features. In addition to the characteristics described
for trunk ports, hybrid ports have these abilities:
• Can be configured to be VLAN tag unaware, C-tag aware, S-tag
aware, or S-custom-tag aware.
• Ingress filtering can be controlled.
• Ingress acceptance of frames and configuration of egress tagging
can be configured independently.
Port VLAN Determines the port's VLAN ID (PVID). Allowed VLANs are in the
range 1 through 4095, default being 1.
• On ingress, frames get classified to the Port VLAN if the port is
configured as VLAN unaware, the frame is untagged, or VLAN
awareness is enabled on the port, but the frame is priority tagged
(VLAN ID = 0).
• On egress, frames classified to the Port VLAN do not get tagged if
Egress Tagging configuration is set to untag Port VLAN.
The Port VLAN is called an "Access VLAN" for ports in Access mode
and Native VLAN for ports in Trunk or Hybrid mode.
Port Type Ports in hybrid mode allow for changing the port type, that is, whether
a frame's VLAN tag is used to classify the frame on ingress to a
particular VLAN, and if so, which TPID it reacts on. Likewise, on
egress, the Port Type determines the TPID of the tag, if a tag is
required.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 113
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Object Description
Unaware: On ingress, all frames, whether carrying a VLAN tag or not,
get classified to the Port VLAN, and possible tags are not removed on
egress.
C-port: On ingress, frames with a VLAN tag with TPID = 0x8100 get
classified to the VLAN ID embedded in the tag. If a frame is untagged
or priority tagged, the frame gets classified to the Port VLAN. If frames
must be tagged on egress, they will be tagged with a C-tag.
S-port: On ingress, frames with a VLAN tag with TPID = 0x8100 or
0x88A8 get classified to the VLAN ID embedded in the tag. If a frame
is untagged or priority tagged, the frame gets classified to the Port
VLAN. If frames must be tagged on egress, they will be tagged with
an S-tag.
S-Custom-port: On ingress, frames with a VLAN tag with a TPID =
0x8100 or equal to the Ethertype configured for Custom-S ports get
classified to the VLAN ID embedded in the tag. If a frame is untagged
or priority tagged, the frame gets classified to the Port VLAN. If frames
must be tagged on egress, they will be tagged with the custom S-tag.
Ingress Filtering Hybrid ports allow for changing ingress filtering. Access and Trunk
ports always have ingress filtering enabled.
• If ingress filtering is enabled (Ingress Filtering check box is
selected), frames classified to a VLAN that the port is not a
member of get discarded.
• If ingress filtering is disabled, frames classified to a VLAN that the
port is not a member of are accepted and forwarded to the switch
engine.
However, the port will never transmit frames classified to VLANs that
it is not a member of.
Ingress Acceptance Hybrid ports allow for changing the type of frames that are accepted
on ingress.
Tagged and Untagged: Both tagged and untagged frames are
accepted.
Tagged Only: Only tagged frames are accepted on ingress.
Untagged frames are discarded.
Untagged Only: Only untagged frames are accepted on ingress.
Tagged frames are discarded.
Egress Tagging This option is only available for ports in Hybrid mode. Ports in Trunk
and Hybrid mode may control the tagging of frames on egress.
Untag Port VLAN: Frames classified to the Port VLAN are
transmitted untagged. Other frames are transmitted with the relevant
tag.
Tag All: All frames, whether classified to the Port VLAN or not, are
transmitted with a tag.
Untag All: All frames, whether classified to the Port VLAN or not, are
transmitted without a tag.
Allowed VLANs Ports in Trunk and Hybrid mode may control which VLANs they are
allowed to become members of. The field's syntax is identical to the
syntax used in the Enabled VLANs field.
By default, a Trunk or Hybrid port will become member of all VLANs,
and is therefore set to 1-4095. The field may be left empty, which
means that the port will not become member of any VLANs.
Forbidden VLANs A port may be configured to never be a member of one or more
114 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Object Description
VLANs. This is particularly useful when dynamic VLAN protocols like
MVRP and GVRP must be prevented from dynamically adding ports
to VLANs. Such VLANs should be marked as forbidden on the port in
question. The syntax is identical to the syntax used in the Enabled
VLANs field.
By default, the field is left blank, which means that the port may
become a member of all possible VLANs.
Note: The port must be a member of the same VLAN as the Port VLAN ID.
Buttons
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
VLAN membership status
The VLAN Membership Status for Combined users page provides an overview of
membership status for VLAN users.
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
VLAN User A VLAN User is a module that uses services of the VLAN
management functionality to configure VLAN memberships and
VLAN port configuration such as PVID and UVID. Currently, we
support following VLAN :
Admin : This is referred to as static.
NAS : NAS provides port-based authentication, which involves
communications between a Supplicant, Authenticator, and an
Authentication Server.
GVRP : GVRP (GARP VLAN Registration Protocol or Generic VLAN
Registration Protocol) is a protocol that facilitates control of virtual
local area networks (VLANs) within a larger network .
Voice VLAN : Voice VLAN is a VLAN configured specially for voice
traffic typically originating from IP phones.
MVR : MVR is used to eliminate the need to duplicate multicast traffic
for subscribers in each VLAN. Multicast traffic for all channels is sent
only on a single (multicast) VLAN.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 115
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Object Description
Port Members A row of check boxes for each port appears for each VLAN ID.
If a port is included in a VLAN, an image appears.
If a port is included in a Forbidden port list, an image appears.
If a port is included in a Forbidden port list and dynamic VLAN user
register VLAN on same Forbidden port, then the conflict port appears
as a conflict port.
VLAN Membership The VLAN Membership Status Page shows the current VLAN port
members for all VLANs configured by a selected VLAN user
(selection shall be allowed by a Combo Box). When ALL VLAN users
are selected, it shows this information for all the VLAN users by
default. VLAN membership allows the frames classified to the VLAN
ID to be forwarded on the respective VLAN member ports.
Buttons
• Select VLAN Users from the Combined drop-down list.
• Select the Auto-refresh check box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic
refresh occurs every three seconds.
• Click Refresh to refresh the page immediately.
• Click I<< to update the table starting from the first entry in the VLAN Table (i.e., the
entry with the lowest VLAN ID).
• Click >> to update the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently
displayed.
VLAN port status
The VLAN Port Status for Combined users page provides VLAN port status.
116 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row.
Port Type Shows the VLAN Awareness for the port.
If VLAN awareness is enabled, the tag is removed from tagged
frames received on the port. VLAN tagged frames are classified to
the VLAN ID in the tag.
If VLAN awareness is disabled, all frames are classified to the Port
VLAN ID and tags are not removed.
Ingress Filtering Shows the ingress filtering for a port. This parameter affects VLAN
ingress processing. If ingress filtering is enabled and the ingress port
is not a member of the classified VLAN of the frame, the frame is
discarded.
Frame Type Shows if the port accepts all frames or only tagged frames. This
parameter affects VLAN ingress processing. If the port only accepts
tagged frames, untagged frames received on that port are discarded.
Port VLAN ID Shows the PVID setting for the port.
Tx Tag Shows egress filtering frame status (tagged or untagged).
Untagged VLAN ID Shows UVID (untagged VLAN ID). The port's UVID determines the
packet's behavior at the egress side.
Conflicts Shows whether or not conflicts exist. When a Volatile VLAN user
requests to set VLAN membership or VLAN port configuration, the
following conflicts can occur:
• Functional conflicts between features.
• Conflicts due to hardware limitations.
• Direct conflict between user modules.
Buttons
• Select VLAN Users from the Static drop-down list.
• Select the Auto-refresh check box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic
refresh occurs every three seconds.
• Click Refresh to refresh the page immediately.
Private VLAN
The Private VLAN Membership Configuration page allows you to configure private
VLAN membership. The private VLAN membership configurations for the switch can be
monitored and modified here; private VLANs and private VLAN port members can be
added or deleted here. Private VLANs are based on the source port mask, and there
are no connections to VLANs. This means that VLAN IDs and private VLAN IDs can be
identical. A port must be a member of both a VLAN and a private VLAN to be able to
forward packets. By default, all ports are VLAN unaware and are members of VLAN 1
and private VLAN 1. A VLAN unaware port can only be a member of one VLAN, but it
can be a member of multiple private VLANs.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 117
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Delete Select this check box to delete a private VLAN entry. The entry will be
deleted during the next save.
Private VLAN ID Indicates the ID of this particular private VLAN.
Port Members A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each private
VLAN ID. To include a port in a Private VLAN, select the check box.
To remove or exclude the port from the private VLAN, make sure the
box is deselected. By default, no ports are members, and all boxes
are deselected.
Adding a New Private VLAN Click add New Private VLAN to add a new private VLAN ID. An
empty row is added to the table, and the private VLAN can be
configured as needed. The allowed range for a private VLAN ID is the
same as the switch port number range. Any values outside this range
are not accepted, and a warning message appears. Click OK to
discard the incorrect entry, or click Cancel to return to the editing and
make a correction.
The private VLAN is enabled when you click Apply.
The Delete button can be used to undo the addition of new Private
VLANs.
Buttons
• Click Add New Private VLAN to add a new private VLAN ID.
• Select the Auto-refresh check box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic
refresh occurs every three seconds.
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
Port isolation
When a VLAN is configured to be a private VLAN, communication between ports within
that VLAN can be prevented. Two application examples are provided in this section:
118 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
• Customers connected to an ISP can be members of the same VLAN, but they are
not allowed to communicate with each other within that VLAN.
• Servers in a farm of web servers in a Demilitarized Zone (DMZ) are allowed to
communicate with the outside world and with database servers on the inside
segment, but are not allowed to communicate with each other.
For private VLANs to be applied, the switch must first be configured for standard VLAN
operation. When this is in place, one or more of the configured VLANs can be
configured as private VLANs. Ports in a private VLAN fall into one of these two groups:
Promiscuous ports
• Ports from which traffic can be forwarded to all ports in the private VLAN.
• Ports that can receive traffic from all ports in the private VLAN.
Isolated ports
• Ports from which traffic can only be forwarded to promiscuous ports in the private
VLAN.
• Ports that can receive traffic from only promiscuous ports in the private VLAN.
The configuration of promiscuous and isolated ports applies to all private VLANs. When
traffic comes in on a promiscuous port in a private VLAN, the VLAN mask from the
VLAN table is applied. When traffic comes in on an isolated port, the private VLAN
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 119
Chapter 4: Web configuration
mask is applied in addition to the VLAN mask from the VLAN table. This reduces the
ports to which forwarding can be done to just the promiscuous ports within the private
VLAN.
The Port Isolation Configuration page is used for enabling or disabling port isolation on
ports in a private VLAN. A port member of a VLAN can be isolated to other isolated
ports on the same VLAN and private VLAN.
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Port Members A check box is provided for each port of a private VLAN. When
selected, port isolation is enabled on that port. When deselected, port
isolation is disabled on that port.
By default, port isolation is disabled on all ports.
Buttons
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
• Select the Auto-refresh check box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic
refresh occurs every three seconds.
• Click Refresh to refresh the page immediately.
VLAN setting examples
This section covers the following setup scenarios:
• Separate VLAN
• 802.1Q VLAN Trunk
• Port Isolate
Two Separate 802.1Q VLANs
The diagram below shows how the managed switch handles tagged and untagged
traffic flow for two VLANs. VLAN Group 2 and VLAN Group 3 are separated VLANs.
Each VLAN isolates network traffic, so only members of the VLAN receive traffic from
120 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
the same VLAN members. The table below describes the port configuration of the
managed switches.
VLAN Group VID Untagged Members Tagged Members
VLAN Group 1 1 Port-7 ~ Port-28 N/A
VLAN Group 2 2 Port-1,Port-2 Port-3
VLAN Group 3 3 Port-4,Port-5 Port-6
The scenario is described as follows:
Untagged packet entering VLAN 2
1. While [PC-1], an untagged packet, enters Port-1, the managed switch will tag it with
a VLAN Tag=2. [PC-2] and [PC-3] will receive the packet through Port-2 and Port-3.
2. [PC-4],[PC-5] and [PC-6] received no packet.
3. While the packet leaves Port-2, it will be stripped away, becoming an untagged
packet.
4. While the packet leaves Port-3, it will remain as a tagged packet with VLAN Tag=2.
Tagged packet entering VLAN 2
1. While [PC-3], a tagged packet with VLAN Tag=2 enters Port-3, [PC-1] and [PC-2]
will receive the packet through Port-1 and Port-2.
2. While the packet leaves Port-1 and Port-2, it will be stripped away, becoming an
untagged packet.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 121
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Untagged packet entering VLAN 3
1. While [PC-4] an untagged packet enters Port-4, the switch will tag it with a VLAN
Tag=3. [PC-5] and [PC-6] will receive the packet through Port-5 and Port-6.
2. While the packet leaves Port-5, it will be stripped away, becoming an untagged
packet.
3. While the packet leaves Port-6, it will keep as a tagged packet with VLAN Tag=3.
Note: For this example, set VLAN Group 1 as the default VLAN, but only focus on
VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 traffic flow.
Setup steps
1. Add VLAN group
Add two VLANs – VLAN 2 and VLAN 3
Type 1-3 in an Allowed Access VLANs column, the 1-3 includes VLAN1 and 2 and
3.
2. Assign VLAN members and PVIDs to each port:
VLAN 2 : Port-1,Port-2 and Port-3
VLAN 3 : Port-4, Port-5 and Port-6
VLAN 1 : All other ports – Port-7~Port-28
3. Enable VLAN Tag for specific ports
Link Type: Port-3 (VLAN-2) and Port-6 (VLAN-3)
Change Port 3 Mode as Trunk and select Egress Tagging as Tag All and Types 2
in the Allowed VLANs column.
122 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Change Port 6 Mode as Trunk and select Egress Tagging as Tag All and Types 3
in the allowed VLANs column.
VLAN trunking between two 802.1Q-aware switches
In most cases, they are used for “Uplink” to other switches. VLANs are separated at
different switches, but they need access to other switches within the same VLAN group.
Setup steps
1. Add a VLAN group.
Add two VLANs – VLAN 2 and VLAN 3
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 123
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Type 1-3 in the allowed Access VLANs column; the 1-3 includes VLAN 1 and 2 and
3.
2. Assign VLAN members and PVIDs to each port:
VLAN 2: Port-1, Port-2 and Port-3
VLAN 3: Port-4, Port-5 and Port-6
VLAN 1: All other ports – Port-7~Port-48
For the VLAN ports connecting to the hosts, see “IP subnet-based VLAN” on page 128
for examples. The following steps focus on the VLAN trunk port configuration.
1. Specify Port-7 to be the 802.1Q VLAN Trunk port.
2. Assign Port-7 to both VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 on the VLAN Member configuration
page.
3. Define a VLAN 1 as a “Public Area” that overlaps with both VLAN 2 members and
VLAN 3 members.
4. Assign the VLAN Trunk Port to being the member of each VLAN to be aggregated.
For example, include Port-7 to be VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 member ports.
5. Specify Port-7 to be the 802.1Q VLAN trunk port, and the trunking port must be a
tagged port during egress. The Port-7 configuration is shown below.
124 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Both the VLAN 2 members of Port-1 to Port-3 and VLAN 3 members of Port-4 to
Port-6 belong to VLAN 1. But with different PVID settings, packets from VLAN 2 or
VLAN 3 are not able to access the other VLAN.
6. Repeat Steps 1 to 5 by setting up the VLAN trunk port at the partner switch and add
more VLANs to join the VLAN trunk. Repeat Steps 1 to 3 to assign the trunk port to
the VLANs.
Port isolate
The diagram below shows how the managed switch handles isolated and promiscuous
ports, and how computers are not able to access the each other’s isolated port.
However, each computer requires access to the same server/AP/Printer. This section
explains how to configure the port for the server so that it can be accessed by each
isolated port.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 125
Chapter 4: Web configuration
1. Assign Port Mode
Set Port-1~Port-4 as isolated.
Set Port-5 and Port-6 as promiscuous. The Port Isolation Configuration page
appears.
2. Assign VLAN Member:
VLAN 1 : Port-5 and Port-6
VLAN 2 : Port-1, Port-2, Port-5 and Port-6
VLAN 3: Port-3~Port-6.
The Private VLAN Membership Configuration page appears.
MAC-based VLAN
The MAC-based VLAN entries can be configured on the MAC-based VLAN
Membership Configuration page. This page allows for adding and deleting MAC-based
VLAN entries and assigning the entries to different ports. This page shows only static
entries.
126 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Delete To delete a MAC-based VLAN entry, select this box and click Save.
MAC Address Indicates the MAC address.
VLAN ID Indicates the VLAN ID.
Port Members A row of check boxes for each port appears for each MAC-based
VLAN entry. To include a port in a MAC-based VLAN, select the
check box. To remove or exclude the port from the MAC-based
VLAN, make sure the box is deselected. By default, no ports are
members, and all boxes are deselected.
Adding a New MAC-based
VLAN Click Add New Entry to add a new MAC-based VLAN entry. An
empty row is added to the table, and the MAC-based VLAN entry can
be configured as needed. Any unicast MAC address can be
configured for the MAC-based VLAN entry. No broadcast or multicast
MAC addresses are allowed. Legal values for a VLAN ID are 1
through 4095.
The MAC-based VLAN entry is enabled when clicking Save. A MAC-
based VLAN without any port members will be deleted when clicking
Save. The Delete button can be used to undo the addition of new
MAC-based VLANs.
Buttons
• Click Add New Entry to add a new MAC-based VLAN entry
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
• Select the Auto-refresh check box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic
refresh occurs every three seconds.
• Click Refresh to refresh the page immediately.
• Click I<< to update the table starting from the first entry in the MAC-based VLAN
table.
• Click >> to update the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently
displayed.
MAC-based VLAN status
The MAC-based VLAN Membership Status page shows MAC-based VLAN entries
configured by various MAC-based VLAN users
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 127
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
MAC Address Indicates the MAC address.
VLAN ID Indicates the VLAN ID.
Port Members Port members of the MAC-based VLAN entry.
Buttons
• Select the Auto-refresh check box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic
refresh occurs every three seconds.
• Click Refresh to refresh the page immediately.
IP subnet-based VLAN
The IP subnet-based VLAN entries can be configured on the IP Subnet-based VLAN
Membership Configuration page. This page allows for adding, updating, and deleting IP
subnet-based VLAN entries and assigning the entries to different ports. This page
shows only static entries.
128 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Delete Select this box to delete a Protocol to Group Name map entry. The
entry will be deleted on the switch during the next save.
VCE ID Indicates the index of the entry. It is user configurable with a value
range from 0-256. If a VCE ID is 0, the application will auto-generate
the VCE ID for that entry. Deletion and lookup of IP subnet-based
VLAN are based on VCE ID.
IP Address Indicates the IP address.
Mask Length Indicates the network mask length.
VLAN ID Indicates the VLAN ID. VLAN ID can be changed for the existing
entries.
Port Members A row of check boxes for each port displays for each IP subnet-based
VLAN entry. To include a port in a IP subnet-based VLAN, select the
check box. To remove or exclude the port from the IP subnet-based
VLAN, make sure the box is deselected. By default, no ports are
members, and all boxes are deselected.
Add New Entry Click Add New Entry to add a new IP subnet-based VLAN entry. An
empty row is added to the table, and the IP subnet-based VLAN entry
can be configured as needed. Any IP address/mask can be
configured for the IP subnet-based VLAN entry. Legal values for a
VLAN ID are 1 through 4095.
The IP subnet-based VLAN entry is enabled when clicking Save. The
Delete button can be clicked to undo the addition of new IP subnet-
based VLANs.
Buttons
• Click Add New Entry to add a new MAC-based VLAN entry
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
• Select the Auto-refresh check box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic
refresh occurs every three seconds.
• Click Refresh to refresh the page immediately.
Protocol-based VLAN
The Protocol to Group Mapping Table page permits the addition of new protocols to the
Group Name (unique for each Group) mapping entries, and allows you to see and
delete entries already mapped for the switch.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 129
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Delete Select this box to delete a Protocol to Group Name map entry. The entry will
be deleted on the switch during the next save.
Frame Type Frame Type values are as follows: Ethernet, LLC, SNAP
Note: When changing the Frame Type field, the Value field changes
depending on the new frame type selected.
Value Values that can be entered in this text field depend on the option selected in
the Frame Type selection menu. Below are the criteria for three different
frame types:
For Ethernet: Values in the text field when Ethernet is selected as a Frame
Type is called etype. Values for etype ranges from 0x0600-0xffff
For LLC: Valid value in this case is comprised of two different sub-values.
a. DSAP: 1-byte long string (0x00-0xff)
b. SSAP: 1-byte long string (0x00-0xff)
For SNAP: A valid value in this case is comprised of two different sub-
values.
a. OUI: OUI (Organizationally Unique Identifier) is value in format of xx-
xx-xx where each pair (xx) in string is a hexadecimal value ranges
from 0x00-0xff.
b. PID: If the OUI is hexadecimal 000000, the protocol ID is the Ethernet
type (EtherType) field value for the protocol running on top of SNAP; if
the OUI is an OUI for a particular organization, the protocol ID is a
value assigned by that organization to the protocol running on top of
SNAP.
In other words, if value of OUI field is 00-00-00 then value of PID will be
etype (0x0600-0xffff) and if value of OUI is other than 00-00-00 then the
valid value of PID will be any value from 0x0000 to 0xffff.
Group Name A valid Group Name is a unique 16-character long string for every entry that
consists of a combination of alphabets (a-z or A-Z) and integers (0-9).
Note: Special character and underscore(_) are not allowed.
Adding a New Group
to VLAN mapping
entry
Click the Add New Entry to add a new entry in mapping table. An empty row
is added to the table, and Frame Type, Value, and the Group Name can be
configured as needed.
Click the Delete button to undo the addition of a new entry.
130 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Buttons
• Click Add New Entry to add a new MAC-based VLAN entry
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
• Select the Auto-refresh check box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic
refresh occurs every three seconds.
• Click Refresh to refresh the page immediately.
Protocol-based VLAN membership
The Group Name to VLAN Mapping Table page permits mapping an already configured
Group Name to a VLAN.
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Delete Select this box to delete a Group Name to VLAN map entry. The entry will be
deleted on the switch during the next save.
Group Name A valid Group Name is a unique 16-character long string for every entry
which consists of a combination of alphabets (a-z or A-Z) and integers (0-9).
No special character is allowed. Whichever group name you try map to a
VLAN must be present in the Protocol to Group mapping table and must not
be used by any other existing mapping entry on this page.
VLAN ID Indicates the ID to which the group name will be mapped. A valid VLAN ID
ranges from 1-4095.
Port Members A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each group name to
VLAN ID mapping. To include a port in a mapping, select the box. To
remove or exclude the port from the mapping, make sure the box is
deselected. By default, no ports are members, and all boxes are deselected.
Adding a New Group
to VLAN mapping
entry
Click the Add New Entry to add a new entry in mapping table. An empty row
is added to the table, and Frame Type, Value, and the Group Name can be
configured as needed.
Click the Delete button to undo the addition of a new entry.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 131
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Buttons
• Click Add New Entry to add a new entry in the mapping table.
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
• Select the Auto-refresh check box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic
refresh occurs every three seconds.
• Click Refresh to refresh the page immediately.
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)
Theory
STP can be used to detect and disable network loops, and to provide backup links
between switches, bridges, or routers. This allows the switch to interact with other
bridging devices in the network to ensure that only one route exists between any two
stations on the network, and provides backup links that automatically take over when a
primary link goes down. The spanning tree algorithms supported by this switch include
these versions:
• STP – Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1D)
• RSTP – Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1w)
• MSTP – Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1s)
The IEEE 802.1D Spanning Tree Protocol and IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree
Protocol allow for the blocking of links between switches that form loops within the
network. When multiple links between switches are detected, a primary link is
established. Duplicated links are blocked from use and become standby links. The
protocol allows for the duplicate links to be used in the event of a failure of the primary
link. Once the STP is configured and enabled, primary links are established and
duplicated links are blocked automatically. The reactivation of the blocked links (at the
time of a primary link failure) is also accomplished automatically without operator
intervention.
This automatic network reconfiguration provides maximum uptime to network users.
However, the concepts of the spanning tree algorithm and protocol are a complicated
and complex subject and must be fully researched and understood. It is possible to
cause serious degradation of the performance of the network if the spanning tree is
incorrectly configured. Please read the following before making any changes from the
default values.
The switch STP performs the following functions:
• Creates a single spanning tree from any combination of switching or bridging
elements.
132 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
• Creates multiple spanning trees from any combination of ports contained within a
single switch, in user specified groups.
• Automatically reconfigures the spanning tree to compensate for the failure, addition,
or removal of any element in the tree.
• Reconfigures the spanning tree without operator intervention.
Bridge protocol data units
For STP to arrive at a stable network topology, the following information is used:
• The unique switch identifier.
• The path cost to the root associated with each switch port.
• The port identifier
STP communicates between switches on the network using Bridge Protocol Data Units
(BPDUs). Each BPDU contains the following information:
• The unique identifier of the switch that the transmitting switch currently believes is
the root switch.
• The path cost to the root from the transmitting port.
• The port identifier of the transmitting port.
The switch sends BPDUs to communicate and construct the spanning-tree topology. All
switches connected to the LAN on which the packet is transmitted will receive the
BPDU. BPDUs are not directly forwarded by the switch, but the receiving switch uses
the information in the frame to calculate a BPDU and, if the topology changes, initiates
a BPDU transmission.
The communication between switches via BPDUs results in the following:
• One switch is elected as the root switch.
• The shortest distance to the root switch is calculated for each switch.
• A designated switch is selected. This is the switch closest to the root switch through
which packets will be forwarded to the root.
• A port for each switch is selected. This is the port providing the best path from the
switch to the root switch.
• Ports included in the STP are selected.
Creating a stable STP topology
The goal is to make the root port the fastest link. If all switches have STP enabled with
default settings, the switch with the lowest MAC address in the network becomes the
root switch. By increasing the priority (lowering the priority number) of the best switch,
STP can be forced to select the best switch as the root switch.
When STP is enabled using the default parameters, the path between source and
destination stations in a switched network might not be ideal. For example, connecting
higher-speed links to a port that has a higher number than the current root port can
cause a root-port change.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 133
Chapter 4: Web configuration
STP port states
The BPDUs take some time to pass through a network. This propagation delay can
result in topology changes where a port that transitioned directly from a blocking state
to a forwarding state could create temporary data loops. Ports must wait for new
network topology information to propagate throughout the network before starting to
forward packets. They must also wait for the packet lifetime to expire for BPDU packets
that were forwarded based on the old topology. The forward delay timer is used to allow
the network topology to stabilize after a topology change. In addition, STP specifies a
series of states a port must transition through to further ensure that a stable network
topology is created after a topology change.
Each port on a switch using STP exists is in one of the following five states:
• Blocking – The port is blocked from forwarding or receiving packets.
• Listening – The port is waiting to receive BPDU packets that may tell the port to go
back to the blocking state.
• Learning – The port is adding addresses to its forwarding database, but not yet
forwarding packets.
• Forwarding – The port is forwarding packets.
• Disabled – The port only responds to network management messages and must
return to the blocking state first.
A port transitions from one state to another as follows:
• From initialization (switch boot) to blocking.
• From blocking to listening or to disabled.
• From listening to learning or to disabled.
• From learning to forwarding or to disabled.
• From forwarding to disabled.
• From disabled to blocking.
134 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
You can modify each port state by using management software. When STP is enabled,
every port on every switch in the network goes through the blocking state and then
transitions through the states of listening and learning at power up. If properly
configured, each port stabilizes to the forwarding or blocking state. No packets (except
BPDUs) are forwarded from, or received by, STP-enabled ports until the forwarding
state is enabled for that port.
STP parameters
STP operation levels
The managed switch allows for two levels of operation: the switch level and the port
level. The switch level forms a spanning tree consisting of links between one or more
switches. The port level constructs a spanning tree consisting of groups of one or more
ports. The STP operates in much the same way for both levels.
Note: On the switch level, STP calculates the bridge identifier for each switch and then
sets the root bridge and the designated bridges. On the port level, STP sets the root
port and the designated ports.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 135
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The following are the user-configurable STP parameters for the switch level:
Parameter Description Default Value
Bridge Identifier (Not
user configurable
except by setting
priority below)
A combination of the user-set priority and the switch’s
MAC address.
The Bridge Identifier consists of two parts: A 16-bit
priority and a 48-bit Ethernet MAC address 32768 +
MAC.
32768 + MAC
Priority A relative priority for each switch – lower numbers give a
higher priority and a greater chance of a given switch
being elected as the root bridge
32768
Hello Time The length of time between broadcasts of the hello
message by the switch 2 seconds
Maximum Age Timer Measures the age of a received BPDU for a port and
ensures that the BPDU is discarded when its age
exceeds the value of the maximum age timer.
20 seconds
Forward Delay Timer The amount of time spent by a port in the learning and
listening states waiting for a BPDU that may return the
port to the blocking state.
15 seconds
The following are the user-configurable STP parameters for the port or port group level:
Variable Description Default Value
Port Priority A relative priority for each port – lower
numbers give a higher priority and a
greater chance of a given port being
elected as the root port
128
Port Cost A value used by STP to evaluate paths –
STP calculates path costs and selects the
path with the minimum cost as the active
path
200,000-100Mbps Fast Ethernet ports
20,000-1000Mbps Gigabit Ethernet ports
0 - Auto
Default spanning-tree configuration
Feature Default Value
Enable state STP disabled for all ports
Port priority 128
Port cost 0
Bridge Priority 32,768
User-changeable STA parameters
The factory default settings for the switch should cover the majority of installations. It is
advisable to keep the default settings as set at the factory unless it is absolutely
necessary. The user changeable parameters in the switch are as follows:
• Priority – A priority for the switch can be set from 0 to 65535. 0 is equal to the
highest priority.
136 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
• Hello Time – The hello time can be from 1 to 10 seconds. This is the interval
between two transmissions of BPDU packets sent by the root bridge to tell all other
switches that it is indeed the root bridge. If you set a hello time for the switch and it
is not the root bridge, the set hello time will be used if and when the switch becomes
the root bridge.
Note: The hello time cannot be longer than the max. age or a configuration error will
occur.
• Max. Age – The max. age can be from 6 to 40 seconds. At the end of the max age,
if a BPDU has still not been received from the root bridge, the switch starts sending
its own BPDU to all other switches for permission to become the root bridge. If the
switch has the lowest bridge identifier, it will become the root bridge.
• Forward Delay Timer – The forward delay can be from 4 to 30 seconds. This is the
time any port on the switch spends in the listening state while moving from the
blocking state to the forwarding state.
Note: Observe the following formulas when setting the above parameters: Max.
Age _ 2 x (Forward Delay - 1 second), Max. Age _ 2 x (Hello Time + 1 second).
• Port Priority – A port priority can be from 0 to 240. The lower the number, the
greater the probability the port will be chosen as the root port.
• Port Cost – A port cost can be set from 0 to 200000000. The lower the number, the
greater the probability the port will be chosen to forward packets.
Illustration of STP
A simple illustration of three switches connected in a loop is depicted in the following
diagram. In this example, you can anticipate some major network problems if the STP
assistance is not applied.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 137
Chapter 4: Web configuration
If switch A broadcasts a packet to switch B, switch B broadcasts to switch C, and switch
C broadcasts back to switch A and so on. The broadcast packet will be passed
indefinitely in a loop, potentially causing a network failure. In this example, STP breaks
the loop by blocking the connection between switch B and C. The decision to block a
particular connection is based on the STP calculation of the most current bridge and
port settings.
Now, if switch A broadcasts a packet to switch C, then switch C drops the packet at port
2 and the broadcast ends there. Setting up STP using values other than the defaults,
can be complex. Therefore, you are advised to keep the default factory settings and
STP will automatically assign root bridges/ports and block loop connections. Influencing
STP to choose a particular switch as the root bridge using the priority setting, or
influencing STP to choose a particular port to block using the port priority and port cost
settings is, however, relatively straightforward.
In this example, only the default STP values are used:
The switch with the lowest bridge ID (switch C) was elected the root bridge, and the
ports were selected to give a high port cost between switches B and C. The two
(optional) Gigabit ports (default port cost = 20,000) on switch A are connected to one
(optional) Gigabit port on both switch B and C. The redundant link between switch B
and C is deliberately chosen as a 100 Mbps Fast Ethernet link (default port cost =
200,000). Gigabit ports could be used, but the port cost should be increased from the
default to ensure that the link between switch B and switch C is the blocked link.
138 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
STP system configuration
The STP Bridge Configuration page permits configuration of the STP system settings.
The settings are used by all STP bridge instances in the switch. The managed switch
supports the following spanning tree protocols:
• Compatible – Spanning Tree Protocol (STP): Provides a single path between end
stations, avoiding and eliminating loops.
• Normal – Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) : Detects and uses network
topologies that provide faster spanning tree convergence, without creating
forwarding loops.
• Extension – Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) : Defines an extension to
RSTP to further develop the usefulness of virtual LANs (VLANs). This "Per-VLAN"
MSTP configures a separate spanning tree for each VLAN group and blocks all but
one of the possible alternate paths within each spanning tree.
The page includes the following fields:
Basic settings
Object Description
Protocol Version The STP protocol version setting. Selections are STP, RSTP and MSTP.
Bridge Priority Controls the bridge priority. Lower numeric values have higher priority. The
bridge priority plus the MSTI instance number, concatenated with the 6-byte
MAC address of the switch forms a Bridge Identifier.
For MSTP operation, this is the priority of the CIST. Otherwise, this is the
priority of the STP/RSTP bridge.
Forward Delay The delay used by STP bridges to transition root and designated ports to
forwarding (used in STP compatible mode). Valid values are in the range of
4 to 30 seconds
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 139
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Object Description
Default: 15
Minimum: The higher of 4 or [(Max. Message Age / 2) + 1]
Maximum: 30
Max Age The maximum age of the information transmitted by the Bridge when it is the
Root Bridge. Valid values are in the range 6 to 40 seconds.
Default: 20
Minimum: The higher of 6 or [2 x (Hello Time + 1)].
Maximum: The lower of 40 or [2 x (Forward Delay -1)]
Maximum Hop Count This defines the initial value of remaining hops for MSTI information
generated at the boundary of an MSTI region. It defines how many bridges a
root bridge can distribute its BPDU information. Valid values are in the range
6 to 40 hops.
Transmit Hold Count The number of BPDU's a bridge port can send per second. When exceeded,
transmission of the next BPDU is delayed. Valid values are in the range of 1
to 10 BPDU's per second.
Advanced settings
Object Description
Edge Port BPDU
Filtering Controls whether a port explicitly configured as Edge will transmit and
receive BPDUs.
Edge Port BPDU
Guard Controls whether a port explicitly configured as Edge will disable itself upon
reception of a BPDU. The port enters the error-disabled state, and is
removed from the active topology.
Port Error Recovery Controls whether a port in the error-disabled state automatically will be
enabled after a certain time. If recovery is not enabled, ports have to be
disabled and re-enabled for normal STP operation. The condition is also
cleared by a system reboot.
Port Error Recovery
Timeout The time that has to pass before a port in the error-disabled state can be
enabled. Valid values are between 30 and 86400 seconds (24 hours).
Note: The managed switch implements the rapid spanning protocol as the default
spanning tree protocol. When selecting “Compatibles” mode, the system uses the
RSTP (802.1w) to be compatible and work with another STP (802.1D)’s BPDU control
packet.
Buttons
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
Bridge status
The STP Bridges page provides a status overview of all STP bridge instances. The
table contains a row for each STP bridge instance, and the columns display the
following information:
140 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
MSTI The bridge instance. This is also a link to the STP detailed bridge
status.
Bridge ID The bridge ID of this bridge instance.
Root ID The bridge ID of the currently elected root bridge.
Root Port The switch port currently assigned the root port role.
Root Cost Root Path Cost. For the root bridge this is zero. For all other bridges,
it is the sum of the port path costs on the least cost path to the root
bridge.
Topology Flag The current state of the topology change flag for this bridge instance.
Topology Change Last The time since the last topology change occurred.
Buttons
• Select the Auto-refresh check box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic
refresh occurs every three seconds.
• Click Refresh to refresh the page immediately.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 141
Chapter 4: Web configuration
CIST port configuration
This STP CIST Port Configuration page permits the user to inspect and change the
current STP CIST port configurations.
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Port The switch port number of the logical STP port.
STP Enabled Controls if RSTP is enabled on this switch port.
Path Cost Controls the path cost incurred by the port. The Auto setting sets the
path cost as appropriate by the physical link speed, using the 802.1D
recommended values. Using the Specific setting, a user-defined
value can be entered. The path cost is used when establishing the
active topology of the network. Lower path cost ports can be chosen
as forwarding ports in favor of higher path cost ports. Valid values are
in the range of 1 to 200000000.
Priority Controls the port priority. This can be used to control priority of ports
having identical port cost. (See above).
Default: 128
Range: 0-240, in steps of 16
AdminEdge Controls whether the operEdge flag should start as set or cleared (the
initial operEdge state when a port is initialized).
AutoEdge Controls if the bridge should enable automatic edge detection on the
bridge port. This allows operEdge to be derived from BPDUs received
on the port.
142 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Object Description
Restricted Role If enabled, causes the port not to be selected as root port for the
CIST or any MSTI, even if it has the best spanning tree priority
vector. Such a port will be selected as an alternate port after the root
port has been selected. If set, it can cause a lack of spanning tree
connectivity. It can be set by a network administrator to prevent
bridges external to a core region of the network and influence the
spanning tree active topology, possibly because those bridges are
not under the full control of the administrator. This feature is also
known as Root Guard.
Restricted TCN If enabled, causes the port not to propagate received topology
change notifications and topology changes to other ports. If set, it can
cause temporary loss of connectivity after changes in a spanning
tree's active topology as a result of persistently incorrect learned
station location information. It is set by a network administrator to
prevent bridges external to a core region of the network, causing
address flushing in that region, possibly because those bridges are
not under the full control of the administrator or the physical link state
of the attached LANs transits frequently.
BPDU Guard If enabled, causes the port to disable itself upon receiving valid
BPDU's. Contrary to the similar bridge setting, the port Edge status
does not effect this setting.
A port entering error-disabled state due to this setting is subject to the
bridge port error recovery setting as well.
Point-to-point Controls whether the port connects to a point-to-point LAN rather
than a shared medium. This can be automatically determined, or
forced either true or false. Transitions to the forwarding state is faster
for point-to-point LANs than for shared media.
Buttons
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
By default, the system automatically detects the speed and duplex mode used on each
port, and configures the path cost according to the following values. Path cost “0” is
used to indicate auto-configuration mode. When the short path cost method is selected
and the default path cost recommended by the IEEE 8021w standard exceeds 65,535,
the default is set to 65,535.
Recommended STP path cost range
Port Type IEEE 802.1D-1998 IEEE 802.1w-2001
Ethernet 50-600 200,000-20,000,000
Fast Ethernet 10-60 20,000-2,000,000
Gigabit Ethernet 3-10 2,000-200,000
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 143
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Recommended STP path costs
Port Type Link Type IEEE 802.1D-1998 IEEE 802.1w-2001
Ethernet Half Duplex
Full Duplex
Trunk
100
95
90
2,000,000
1,999,999
1,000,000
Fast Ethernet Half Duplex
Full Duplex
Trunk
19
18
15
200,000
100,000
50,000
Gigabit Ethernet Full Duplex
Trunk
4
3
10,000
5,000
Default STP path costs
Port Type Link Type IEEE 802.1w-2001
Ethernet Half Duplex
Full Duplex
Trunk
2,000,000
1,000,000
500,000
Fast Ethernet Half Duplex
Full Duplex
Trunk
200,000
100,000
50,000
Gigabit Ethernet Full Duplex
Trunk
10,000
5,000
MSTI priorities
The MSTI Configuration page permits the user to inspect and change the current STP
MSTI bridge instance priority configurations.
144 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
MSTI The bridge instance. The CIST is the default instance, which is
always active.
Priority Controls the bridge priority. Lower numerical values have higher
priority. The bridge priority plus the MSTI instance number,
concatenated with the 6-byte MAC address of the switch, forms a
bridge identifier.
Buttons
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
MSTI configuration
The MSTI Configuration page permits the user to inspect and change the current STP
MSTI bridge instance priority configurations.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 145
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Configuration identification
Object Description
Configuration Name The name identifiying the VLAN to MSTI mapping. Bridges must
share the name and revision, as well as the VLAN-to-MSTI mapping
configuration in order to share spanning trees for MSTI's. (Intra-
region). The name is a maximum of 32 characters.
Configuration Revision The revision of the MSTI configuration named above. This must be
an integer between 0 and 65535.
MSTI mapping
Object Description
MSTI The bridge instance. The CIST is not available for explicit mapping,
as it will receive the VLANs not explicitly mapped.
VLANs Mapped The list of VLAN's mapped to the MSTI. The VLANs must be
separated with a comma and/or space. A VLAN can only be mapped
to one MSTI. A unused MSTI should be left empty (i.e., not have any
VLANs mapped to it).
Buttons
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
MSTI ports configuration
The MSTI Port Configuration page permits the user to inspect and change the current
STP MSTI port configurations. A MSTI port is a virtual port, which is instantiated
separately for each active CIST (physical) port for each MSTI instance configured and
applicable for the port. The MSTI instance must be selected before displaying actual
MSTI port configuration options.
This page contains MSTI port settings for physical and aggregated ports. The
aggregation settings are stack global.
146 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
MTSI port configuration
Object Description
Select MSTI Select the bridge instance and set more detail configuration.
The page includes the following fields:
MSTx MTSI port configuration
Object Description
Port The switch port number of the corresponding STP CIST (and MSTI) port.
Path Cost Controls the path cost incurred by the port. The Auto setting sets the path cost
as appropriate by the physical link speed, using the 802.1D recommended
values. Using the Specific setting, a user-defined value can be entered. The
path cost is used when establishing the active topology of the network. Lower
path cost ports are chosen as forwarding ports in favor of higher path cost
ports. Valid values are in the range 1 to 200000000.
Priority Controls the port priority. This can be used to control priority of ports having
identical port cost.
Buttons
• Click Get to set MSTx configuration.
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 147
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Port status
The STP Port Status page displays the STP CIST port status for physical ports in the
currently selected switch.
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Port The switch port number of the logical STP port.
CIST Role The current STP port role of the ICST port. The port role can be one of the
following values:
AlternatePort
BackupPort
RootPort
DesignatedPort
Disable
CIST State The current STP port state of the CIST port . The port state can be one of
the following values:
Disabled
Learning
Forwarding
Uptime The time since the bridge port was last initialized.
Buttons
• Select the Auto-refresh check box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic
refresh occurs every three seconds.
• Click Refresh to refresh the page immediately.
Port statistics
The STP Statistics page displays the STP port statistics counters for physical ports in
the currently selected switch.
148 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Port The switch port number of the logical RSTP port.
MSTP The number of MSTP Configuration BPDU's received/transmitted on the
port.
RSTP The number of RSTP Configuration BPDU's received/transmitted on the
port.
STP The number of legacy STP Configuration BPDU's received/transmitted on
the port.
TCN The number of (legacy) Topology Change Notification BPDU's
received/transmitted on the port.
Discarded Unknown The number of unknown Spanning Tree BPDU's received (and discarded)
on the port.
Discarded Illegal The number of illegal Spanning Tree BPDU's received (and discarded) on
the port.
Buttons
• Select the Auto-refresh check box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic
refresh occurs every three seconds.
• Click Refresh to refresh the page immediately.
• Click Clear to clear the counters for all ports.
Multicast
IGMP snooping
The Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) allows hosts and routers share
information about multicast groups memberships. IGMP snooping is a switch feature
that monitors the exchange of IGMP messages and copies them to the CPU for feature
processing. The overall purpose of IGMP snooping is to limit the forwarding of multicast
frames to only ports that are a member of the multicast group.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 149
Chapter 4: Web configuration
About IGMP snooping
Computers and network devices that need to receive multicast transmissions must
inform nearby routers that they will become members of a multicast group. IGMP is
used to communicate this information. IGMP is also used to periodically check the
multicast group for members that are no longer active. In the case where there is more
than one multicast router on a sub network, one router is elected as ‘queried.’ This
router then keeps track of the membership of the multicast groups that have active
members. The information received from IGMP is then used to determine whether or
not multicast packets should be forwarded to a given sub network. Using IGMP, the
router can check to see if there is at least one member of a multicast group on a given
sub network. If there are no members on a sub network, packets will not be forwarded
to that sub network.
Multicast service
150 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Multicast flooding
IGMP snooping multicast stream control
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 151
Chapter 4: Web configuration
IGMP versions 1 and 2
Multicast groups allow members to join or leave at any time. IGMP provides the method
for members and multicast routers to communicate when joining or leaving a multicast
group. IGMP version 1 is defined in RFC 1112. It has a fixed packet size and no
optional data. The format of an IGMP packet is shown below:
IGMP message format
Octets:
0 8 16 31
Type Response Time Checksum
Group Address (all zeros if this is a query)
The IGMP type codes are shown below:
Type Meaning
0x11 Membership Query (if Group Address is 0.0.0.0)
0x11 Specific Group Membership Query (if Group Address is Present)
0x16 Membership Report (version 2)
0x17 Leave a Group (version 2)
0x12 Membership Report (version 1)
IGMP packets allow multicast routers to keep track of the membership of multicast
groups on their respective sub networks. The following outlines what is communicated
between a multicast router and a multicast group member using IGMP.
• A host sends an IGMP “report” to join a group
• A host will never send a report when it wants to leave a group (for version 1).
• A host will send a “leave” report when it wants to leave a group (for version 2).
Multicast routers send IGMP queries (to the all-hosts group address: 224.0.0.1)
periodically to see whether any group members exist on their sub networks. If there is
no response from a particular group, the router assumes that there are no group
members on the network.
The Time-to-Live (TTL) field of query messages is set to 1 so that the queries will not
be forwarded to other sub networks.
IGMP version 2 introduces some enhancements such as a method to elect a multicast
queried for each LAN, an explicit leave message, and query messages that are specific
to a given group.
The states a computer will go through to join or to leave a multicast group are as
follows:
152 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
IGMP querier
A router or multicast-enabled switch can periodically ask their hosts if they want to
receive multicast traffic. If there is more than one router/switch on the LAN performing
IP multicasting, one of these devices is elected “querier” and assumes the role of
querying the LAN for group members. It then propagates the service requests to any
upstream multicast switch/router to ensure that it will continue to receive the multicast
service.
Note: Multicast routers use this information, along with a multicast routing protocol such
as DVMRP or PIM, to support IP multicasting across the Internet.
Profile table
The IPMC Profile Configurations page provides IPMC Profile related configurations.
The IPMC profile is used to deploy the access control on IP multicast streams. It is
allowed to create at maximum 64 Profiles with a maximum of 128 corresponding rules
for each.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 153
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Global Profile Mode Enable/Disable the Global IPMC Profile. The system starts to do filtering
based on profile settings only when the global profile mode is enabled.
Delete Check to delete the entry. The designated entry is deleted during the next
save.
Profile Name The name used for indexing the profile table. Each entry has a unique name
which is composed of a maximum of 16 alphabetic and numeric characters.
At least one alphabet must be present.
Profile Description Additional description, which is composed of at maximum 64 alphabetic and
numeric characters, about the profile. No blank characters or spaces are
permitted as part of description. Use "_" or "-" to separate the description
sentence.
Rule When the profile is created, click the edit button to enter the rule setting
page of the designated profile. Summary about the designated profile will be
shown by clicking the view button. You can manage or inspect the rules of
the designated profile by using the following buttons:
: List the rules associated with the designated profile.
: Adjust the rules associated with the designated profile.
Buttons
• Click Add New IPMC Profile to add a new IPMC profile. Specify the name and
configure the new entry, and then click Save.
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
Address entry
The IPMC Profile Address Configuration page provides address range settings used in
the IPMC profile. The address entry is used to specify the address range associated
with the IPMC profile. It can create a maximum of 128 address entries in the system.
154 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Delete Click Delete to delete the entry. The designated entry is deleted during the
next save.
Entry Name The name used for indexing the address entry table. Each entry has a
unique name with a maximum of 16 alphabetic and numeric characters. At
least one alphabet must be present.
Start Address The starting IPv4/IPv6 multicast group address that will be used as an
address range.
End Address The ending IPv4/IPv6 multicast group address that will be used as an
address range.
Buttons
• Click Add New Address (Range) Entry to add a new address range. Specify the
name and configure the addresses, and then click Save.
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
• Click I<< to update the table starting from the first entry in the IPMC profile address
configuration.
• Click >> to update the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently
displayed.
IGMP snooping configuration
The IGMP Snooping Configuration page provides IGMP snooping-related configuration
information.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 155
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Snooping Enabled Enable Global IGMP snooping.
Unregistered IPMCv4
Flooding Enabled Enable unregistered IPMCv4 traffic flooding. The flooding control takes effect
only when IGMP Snooping is enabled.
When IGMP snooping is disabled, unregistered IPMCv4 traffic flooding is
always active.
IGMP SSM Range SSM (Source-Specific Multicast) range allows the SSM-aware hosts and
routers run the SSM service model for the groups in the address range.
Leave Proxy Enable Enable IGMP leave proxy. This feature can be used to avoid forwarding
unnecessary leave messages to the router side.
Proxy Enable Enable IGMP proxy. This feature can be used to avoid forwarding
unnecessary join and leave messages to the router side.
Router Port Specify which ports act as IGMP router ports. A router port is a port on the
Ethernet switch that leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or IGMP
querier. The switch forwards IGMP join or leave packets to an IGMP router
port. Selections are as follows:
Auto – The managed switch automatically uses the port as IGMP router port
if the port receives IGMP query packets.
Fix – The managed switch always uses the specified port as an IGMP router
port. Use this mode when connecting an IGMP multicast server or IP camera
with multicast protocol to the port.
None – The managed switch will not use the specified port as an IGMP
router port and will not keep any record of an IGMP router being connected
to this port. Use this mode when connecting other IGMP multicast servers
directly to the non-querier managed switch, and you don’t want the multicast
stream to be flooded to the uplink switch through the port that connected to
the IGMP querier.
Fast Leave Enable the fast leave on the port.
Throtting Enable to limit the number of multicast groups to which a switch port can
belong.
Buttons
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
156 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
IGMP snooping VLAN configuration
The IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration page shows up to 99 entries from the VLAN
table (default is 20 entries per page). The range of entries per page can be typed into
the Start from VLAN and entries per page fields. When initially accessing the page, it
shows the first 20 entries from the beginning of the VLAN table. The first entry shown
will be the one with the lowest VLAN ID found in the VLAN table.
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Delete Select this check box to delete the entry. The designated entry will be
deleted during the next save.
VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the entry.
IGMP Snooping
Enable Enable the per-VLAN IGMP Snooping. Only up to 32 VLANs can be
selected.
Querier Election Enable the IGMP Querier election in the VLAN. Disable to act as an IGMP
non-querier.
Querier Address Define the IPv4 address as source address used in IP header for IGMP
querier election.
When the querier address is not set, system uses IPv4 management
address of the IP interface associated with this VLAN.
When the IPv4 management address is not set, the system uses the first
available IPv4 management address. Otherwise, the system uses a pre-
defined value. By default, this value will be 192.0.2.1
Compatibility Compatibility is maintained by hosts and routers taking appropriate actions
depending on the versions of IGMP operating on hosts and routers within a
network. Selections include: IGMP-Auto (default selection), Forced
IGMPv1, Forced IGMPv2, Forced IGMPv3.
PRI Priority of Interface. It indicates the IGMP control frame priority level
generated by the system. These values can be used to prioritize different
classes of traffic.
The allowed range is 0 (best effort) to 7 (highest). The default interface
priority value is 0
RV Robustness Variable. The RV permits tuning for the expected packet loss on
a network. The allowed range is 1 to 255. The default robustness variable
value is 2.
QI Query Interval. The QI is the interval between general queries sent by the
querier. The allowed range is 1 to 31744 seconds. The default query interval
is 125 seconds.
QRI Query Response Interval. This is the maximum response time used to
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 157
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Object Description
calculate the maximum resp code inserted into the periodic general queries.
The allowed range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of seconds. The default query
response interval is 100 in tenths of seconds (10 seconds).
LLQI (LMQI for IGMP) Last Member Query Interval. The Last Member Query Time is the time value
represented by the Last Member Query Interval, multiplied by the Last
Member Query Count.
The allowed range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of seconds, default last member
query interval is 10 in tenths of seconds (1 second).
URI Unsolicited Report Interval. The Unsolicited Report Interval is the time
between repetitions of a host's initial report of membership in a group.
The allowed range is 0 to 31744 seconds, default unsolicited report interval
is 1 second.
Buttons
• Click Refresh to refresh the table starting from the Start from VLAN and entries
per page input fields.
• Click I<< to update the table starting from the first entry in the VLAN table (i.e., the
entry with the lowest VLAN ID).
• Click >> to updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently
displayed.
• Click Add New IGMP VLAN to add a new IGMP VLAN. Specify the VID and
configure the new entry, and then click Save. The specific IGMP VLAN starts
working after the corresponding static VLAN is also created
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
IGMP snooping port group filtering
In certain switch applications, the administrator may want to control the multicast
services that are available to end users (an IP/TV service based on a specific
subscription plan, for example). The IGMP filtering feature fulfills this requirement by
restricting access to specified multicast services on a switch port, and IGMP throttling
limits the number of simultaneous multicast groups a port can join.
The IGMP Snooping Port Group Filtering Configuration page permits assigning a profile
to a switch port that specifies multicast groups that are permitted or denied on the port.
An IGMP filter profile can contain one or more, or a range of, multicast addresses.
However, only one profile can be assigned to a port. When enabled, IGMP join reports
received on the port are checked against the filter profile. If a requested multicast group
is permitted, the IGMP join report is forwarded as normal. If a requested multicast group
is denied, the IGMP join report is dropped.
IGMP throttling sets a maximum number of multicast groups that a port can join at the
same time. When the maximum number of groups is reached on a port, the switch can
158 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
take one of two actions; either “deny” or “replace.” If the action is set to deny, any new
IGMP join reports will be dropped. If the action is set to replace, the switch randomly
removes an existing group and replaces it with the new multicast group.
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Port The logical port for the settings.
Filtering Profile Select the IPMC Profile as the filtering condition for the specific port.
Summary about the designated profile will be shown by clicking the view
button.
Buttons
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
IGMP snooping status
The IGMP Snooping Status page provides IGMP snooping status.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 159
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the entry.
Querier Version The current working querier version.
Host Version The current working host version.
Querier Status Shows whether the querier status is "ACTIVE" or "IDLE".
Querier Transmitted The number of transmitted queries.
Querier Received The number of received queries.
V1 Reports Received The number of received V1 reports.
V2 Reports Received The number of received V2 reports.
V3 Reports Received The number of received V3 reports.
V2 Leave Received The number of received V2 leave.
Router Port Displays the ports that are acting as router ports. A router port is a port on
the Ethernet switch that leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or IGMP
querier.
Static denotes the specific port is configured to be a router port. Dynamic
denotes the specific port is learned to be a router port. Both denote the
specific port is configured or learned to be a router port.
Port Switch port number.
Status Indicates whether or not the specific port is a router port.
Buttons
• Click Refresh to refresh the page immediately.
• Click Clear to clear all statistics counters.
• Select Auto-refresh to automatically refresh the page every three seconds.
IGMP group information
Entries in the IGMP group table are shown in the IGMP Snooping Group Information
page. The IGMP group table is sorted first by VLAN ID, and then by group.
Each page shows up to 99 entries from the IGMP group table (default is 20 entries per
page). The range of entries per page can be typed into the Start from VLAN and
entries per page fields. When initially accessing the page, it shows the first 20 entries
from the beginning of the IGMP Group table. The Start from VLAN and group
Address fields permit the user to select the starting point in the IGMP group table.
160 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
VLAN ID VLAN ID of the group.
Groups Group address of the group displayed.
Port Members Ports under this group.
Buttons
• Select Auto-refresh to automatically refresh the page every three seconds.
• Click Refresh to refresh the table starting from the input fields.
• Click I<< to update the table starting from the first entry in the IGMP group table.
• Click >> to update the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently
shown.
IGMPv3 information
Entries in the IGMP SFM (Source-Filtered Multicast) information table are shown on the
IGMP SFM Information page. The table also contains SSM (Source-Specific Multicast)
information. The table is sorted first by VLAN ID, then by group, and then by port
number. Different source addresses that belong to the same group are treated as a
single entry.
Each page shows up to 99 entries from the IGMP SFM Information table The range of
entries per page can be typed into the Start from VLAN and entries per page fields.
When initially accessing the page, it shows the first 20 entries from the beginning of the
IGMP Group table. The Start from VLAN and group Address fields permit the user to
select the starting point in the IGMP information table.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 161
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
VLAN ID VLAN ID of the group.
Group Group address of the group shown.
Port Switch port number.
Mode Indicates the filtering mode maintained per (VLAN ID, port number, Group
Address) basis. It can be either Include or Exclude.
Source Address IP Address of the source. Currently, system limits the total number of IP
source addresses for filtering to 128.
Type Indicates the type. It can be either Allow or Deny.
Hardware
Filter/Switch Indicates if the data plane destined to the specific group address from the
source IPv4 address can be accomodated by the chip.
Buttons
• Select Auto-refresh to automatically refresh the page every three seconds.
• Click Refresh to refresh the table starting from the input fields.
• Click I<< to update the table starting from the first entry in the IGMP group table.
• Click >> to update the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently
shown.
MLD snooping configuration
The MLD Snooping Configuration page provides MLD snooping-related configuration.
162 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Snooping Enabled Enable global MLD snooping.
Unregistered IPMCv6
Flooding enabled Enable unregistered IPMCv6 traffic flooding. The flooding control takes effect
only when MLD snooping is enabled.
When MLD snooping is disabled, unregistered IPMCv6 traffic flooding is
always active in spite of this setting.
MLD SSM Range SSM (Source-Specific Multicast) range allows the SSM-aware hosts and
routers to run the SSM service model for the groups in the address range.
Leave Proxy Enable Enable MLD leave proxy. This feature can be used to avoid forwarding
unnecessary leave messages to the router side.
Proxy Enable Enable MLD proxy. This feature can be used to avoid forwarding
unnecessary join and leave messages to the router side.
Router Port Specify which ports act as router ports. A router port is a port on the Ethernet
switch that leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or MLD querier.
If an aggregation member port is selected as a router port, the whole
aggregation acts as a router port. Selections are Auto, Fix, Fone, and the
default compatibility value is Auto.
Fast Leave Enable fast leave on the port.
Throtting Enable Throttling to limit the number of multicast groups to which a switch
port can belong.
Buttons
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
MLD snooping VLAN configuration
Each page shows up to 99 entries from the VLAN table (default is 20 entries per page).
The range of entries per page can be typed into the Start from VLAN and entries per
page fields. When initially accessing the page, it shows the first 20 entries from the
beginning of the VLAN table. The first entry shown will be the one with the lowest VLAN
ID found in the VLAN table.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 163
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Delete Select this check box to delete the entry. The designated entry will be
deleted during the next save.
VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the entry.
IGMP Snooping
Enable Enable the per-VLAN MLD snooping. Only up to 32 VLANs can be selected.
Querier Election Enable the MLD querier election in the VLAN. Disable to act as an IGMP
non-querier.
Compatibility Compatibility is maintained by hosts and routers taking appropriate actions
depending on the versions of IGMP operating on hosts and routers within a
network. Selections include: MLD-Auto (default selection), Forced MLDv1,
and Forced MLDv2.
PRI Priority of Interface. It indicates the MLD control frame priority level
generated by the system. These values can be used to prioritize different
classes of traffic.
The allowed range is 0 (best effort) to 7 (highest). The default interface
priority value is 0
RV Robustness Variable. The RV permits tuning for the expected packet loss on
a network. The allowed range is 1 to 255. The default robustness variable
value is 2.
QI Query Interval. The QI is the interval between general queries sent by the
querier. The allowed range is 1 to 31744 seconds. The default query interval
is 125 seconds.
QRI Query Response Interval. This is the maximum response time used to
calculate the maximum resp code inserted into the periodic general queries.
The allowed range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of seconds. The default query
response interval is 100 in tenths of seconds (10 seconds).
LLQI (LMQI for IGMP) Last Member Query Interval. The Last Member Query Time is the time value
represented by the Last Member Query Interval, multiplied by the Last
Member Query Count.
The allowed range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of seconds, default last member
query interval is 10 in tenths of seconds (1 second).
URI Unsolicited Report Interval. The Unsolicited Report Interval is the time
between repetitions of a host's initial report of membership in a group.
The allowed range is 0 to 31744 seconds, default unsolicited report interval
is 1 second.
Buttons
• Click Refresh to refresh the table starting from the Start from VLAN and entries
per page input fields.
• Click I<< to update the table starting from the first entry in the VLAN table (i.e., the
entry with the lowest VLAN ID).
• Click >> to updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently
displayed.
164 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
• Click Add New MLD VLAN to add a new MLD VLAN. Specify the VID and configure
the new entry, and then click Save. The specific MLD VLAN starts working after the
corresponding static VLAN is also created.
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
MLD snooping port group filtering
In certain switch applications, the administrator may want to control the multicast
services available to end users (such as an IP/TV service based on a specific
subscription plan, for example). The MLD filtering feature fulfills this requirement by
restricting access to specified multicast services on a switch port, and MLD throttling
limits the number of simultaneous multicast groups a port can join.
The MLD Snooping Port Filtering Profile Configuration page permits assigning a profile
to a switch port that specifies multicast groups that are permitted or denied on the port.
A MLD filter profile can contain one or more, or a range of, multicast addresses.
However, only one profile can be assigned to a port. When enabled, MLD join reports
received on the port are checked against the filter profile. If a requested multicast group
is permitted, the MLD join report is forwarded as normal. If a requested multicast group
is denied, the MLD join report is dropped.
MLD throttling sets a maximum number of multicast groups that a port can join at the
same time. When the maximum number of groups is reached on a port, the switch can
take one of two actions; either “deny” or “replace.” If the action is set to deny, any new
MLD join reports will be dropped. If the action is set to replace, the switch randomly
removes an existing group and replaces it with the new multicast group.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 165
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Port The logical port for the settings.
Filtering Group Select the IPMC Profile as the filtering condition for the specific port. Click
the View button to view a summary of the designated profile.
Buttons
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
MLD snooping status
The MLD Snooping Status page provides MLD snooping status.
166 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the entry.
Querier Version The current working querier version.
Host Version The current working host version.
Querier Status Shows whether the querier status is "ACTIVE" or "IDLE".
Querier Transmitted The number of transmitted queries.
Querier Received The number of received queries.
V1 Reports Received The number of received V1 reports.
V2 Reports Received The number of received V2 reports.
V3 Reports Received The number of received V3 reports.
V2 Leave Received The number of received V2 leave.
Router Port Displays the ports that are acting as router ports. A router port is a port on
the Ethernet switch that leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or IGMP
querier.
Static denotes the specific port is configured to be a router port. Dynamic
denotes the specific port is learned to be a router port. Both denote the
specific port is configured or learned to be a router port.
Port Switch port number.
Status Indicates whether or not the specific port is a router port.
Buttons
• Click Refresh to refresh the page immediately.
• Click Clear to clear all statistics counters.
• Select Auto-refresh to automatically refresh the page every three seconds.
MLD group information
Entries in the MLD group table are shown in the MLD Snooping Group Information
page. The MLD group table is sorted first by VLAN ID, and then by group.
Each page shows up to 99 entries from the MLD group table (default is 20 entries per
page). The range of entries per page can be typed into the Start from VLAN and
entries per page fields. When initially accessing the page, it shows the first 20 entries
from the beginning of the MLD Group table. The Start from VLAN and group Address
fields permit the user to select the starting point in the MLD group table.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 167
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
VLAN ID VLAN ID of the group.
Groups Group address of the group displayed.
Port Members Ports under this group.
Buttons
• Select Auto-refresh to automatically refresh the page every three seconds.
• Click Refresh to refresh the table starting from the input fields.
• Click I<< to update the table starting from the first entry in the MLD group table.
• Click >> to update the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently
shown.
MLDv2 information
Entries in the MLD SFM (Source-Filtered Multicast) information table are shown on the
IGMP SFM Information page. The table also contains SSM (Source-Specific Multicast)
information. The table is sorted first by VLAN ID, then by group, and then by port
number. Different source addresses that belong to the same group are treated as
single entry.
Each page shows up to 99 entries from the MLD SFM Information table The range of
entries per page can be typed into the Start from VLAN and entries per page fields.
When initially accessing the page, it shows the first 20 entries from the beginning of the
IGMP Group table. The Start from VLAN and Group fields permit the user to select
the starting point in the MLD information table.
168 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
VLAN ID VLAN ID of the group.
Group Group address of the group shown.
Port Switch port number.
Mode Indicates the filtering mode maintained per basis (VLAN ID, port number,
Group Address). It can be either Include or Exclude.
Source Address IP Address of the source. Currently, the system limits the total number of IP
source addresses for filtering to 128.
Type Indicates the type. It can be either Allow or Deny.
Hardware
Filter/Switch Indicates if the data plane destined to the specific group address from the
source IPv4 address can be accomodated by the chip.
Buttons
• Select Auto-refresh to automatically refresh the page every three seconds.
• Click Refresh to refresh the table starting from the input fields.
• Click I<< to update the table starting from the first entry in the MLD SFM information
table.
• Click >> to update the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently
shown.
MVR (Multicast VLAN Registration)
The MVR feature enables multicast traffic forwarding on the Multicast VLANs.
• In a multicast television application, a computer or a network television or a set-top
box can receive a multicast stream.
• Multiple set-top boxes or computers can be connected to one subscriber port, which
is a switch port configured as an MVR receiver port. When a subscriber selects a
channel, the set-top box or computer sends an IGMP/MLD report message to
Switch A to join the appropriate multicast group address.
• Uplink ports that send and receive multicast data to and from the multicast VLAN
are called MVR source ports.
A maximum of eight MVR VLANs with corresponding channel settings can be created
for each multicast VLAN. A maximum of 256 group addresses are available for channel
settings.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 169
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The MVR Configurations page provides MVR-related configuration information.
170 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
MVR Mode Enable/Disable the Global MVR.
The Unregistered Flooding control depends on the current configuration in
IGMP/MLD snooping. We suggest enabling Unregistered Flooding control
when the MVR group table is full.
Delete Select Delete to delete the entry. The designated entry will be deleted during
the next save.
MVR VID Specify the Multicast VLAN ID.
Caution: We do not recommend overlapping MVR source ports with
management VLAN ports.
MVR Name MVR Name is an optional attribute to indicate the name of the specific MVR
VLAN. The maximum length of the MVR VLAN Name string is 16
alphanumeric characters (it must contain at least one alpha character). The.
MVR VLAN name can be edited for the existing MVR VLAN entries or it can
be added to the new entries.
IGMP Address Define the IPv4 address as source address used in IP header for IGMP
control frames. The default IGMP address is not set (0.0.0.0). When the
IGMP address is not set, the system uses the IPv4 management address of
the IP interface associated with this VLAN.
When the IPv4 management address is not set, the system uses the first
available IPv4 management address. Otherwise, the system uses a pre-
defined value. By default, this value is 192.0.2.1.
Mode Specify the MVR mode of operation. In Dynamic mode (default setting),
MVR allows dynamic MVR membership reports on source ports. In
Compatible mode, MVR membership reports are forbidden on source ports.
Tagging Specify whether the traversed IGMP/MLD control frames will be sent as
Untagged or Tagged (default setting) with the MVR VID.
Priority Specify how the traversed IGMP/MLD control frames will be sent in a
prioritized manner. The default Priority is 0.
LLQI Define the maximun time to wait for IGMP/MLD report memberships on a
receiver port before removing the port from multicast group membership.
The value is in units of tenths of a seconds. The range is from 0 to 31744.
The default LLQI is five-tenths or one-half second.
Interface Channel
Setting When the MVR VLAN is created, select the IPMC Profile as the channel
filtering condition for the specific MVR VLAN. A summary of the Interface
Channel Profiling (of the MVR VLAN) appears after clicking the View button.
The profile selected for the designated interface channel cannot have an
overlapped permit group address.
Port The logical port for the settings.
Port Role Configure an MVR port of the designated MVR VLAN as one of the following
roles.
Inactive: The designated port does not participate in MVR operations.
Source: Configure uplink ports that receive and send multicast data as
source ports. Subscribers cannot be directly connected to source ports.
Receiver: Configure a port as a receiver port if it is a subscriber port and
should only receive multicast data. It does not receive data unless it
becomes a member of the multicast group by issuing IGMP/MLD messages.
Caution: We do not recommend overlapping MVR source ports with
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 171
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Object Description
management VLAN ports.
Select the port role by clicking the Role symbol to switch the setting.
I indicates Inactive; S indicates Source; R indicates Receiver. The default
Role is Inactive.
Immediate Leave Enable the fast leave on the port.
Buttons
• Click Add New MVR VLAN to add a new MVR VLAN. Specify the VID and
configure the new entry, and then click Save.
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
MVR status
The MVR Statistics page provides MVR status.
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
VLAN ID The multicast VLAN ID.
IGMP/MLD Queries
Received The number of received queries for IGMP and MLD, respectively.
IGMP/MLD Queries
Transmitted The number of transmitted queries for IGMP and MLD, respectively.
IGMPv1 Joins
Received The number of received IGMPv1 joins.
IGMPv2/MLDv1
Reports Received The number of received IGMPv2 joins and MLDv1 reports, respectively.
IGMPv3/MLDv2
Reports Received The number of received IGMPv1 joins and MLDv2 reports, respectively.
IGMPv2/MLDv1
Leaves Received The number of received IGMPv2 leaves and MLDv1 dones, respectively.
Buttons
• Click Refresh to refresh the page immediately.
• Click Clear to clear all statistics counters.
172 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
• Select Auto-refresh to automatically refresh the page every three seconds.
MVR groups information
Entries in the MVR group table are shown in the MVR Channels (Groups) Information
page. The MVR group table is sorted first by VLAN ID, and then by group.
Each page shows up to 99 entries from the MLD group table (default is 20 entries per
page). The range of entries per page can be typed into the Start from VLAN and
entries per page fields. When initially accessing the page, it shows the first 20 entries
from the beginning of the MVR Group table. The Start from VLAN and Group
Address fields permit the user to select the starting point in the MVR group table.
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
VLAN ID VLAN ID of the group.
Groups Group ID of the group shown.
Port Members Ports under this group.
Buttons
• Select Auto-refresh to automatically refresh the page every three seconds.
• Click Refresh to refresh the table starting from the input fields.
• Click I<< to update the table starting from the first entry in the MVR group table.
• Click >> to update the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently
shown.
MVR SFM information
Entries in the MVR SFM (Source-Filtered Multicast) information table are shown on the
MLD SFM Information page. The table also contains SSM (Source-Specific Multicast)
information. The table is sorted first by VLAN ID, then by group, and then by port
number. Different source addresses that belong to the same group are treated as
single entry.
Each page shows up to 99 entries from the MVR SFM information table The range of
entries per page can be typed into the Start from VLAN and entries per page fields.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 173
Chapter 4: Web configuration
When initially accessing the page, it shows the first 20 entries from the beginning of the
MVR SFM information table. The Start from VLAN and Group Address fields permit
the user to select the starting point in the MVR SFM information table.
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
VLAN ID VLAN ID of the group.
Group Group address of the group shown.
Port Switch port number.
Mode Indicates the filtering mode maintained per (VLAN ID, port number, Group
Address) basis. It can be either Include or Exclude.
Source Address IP Address of the source. Currently, the system limits the total number of IP
source addresses for filtering to 128.
Type Indicates the type. It can be either Allow or Deny.
Hardware
Filter/Switch Indicates if the data plane destined to the specific group address from the
source IPv4/IPv6 address can be accomodated by the chip.
Buttons
• Select Auto-refresh to automatically refresh the page every three seconds.
• Click Refresh to refresh the table starting from the input fields.
• Click I<< to update the table starting from the first entry in the MVR SFM information
table.
• Click >> to update the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently
shown.
Quality of Service (QoS)
Understanding QoS
Quality of Service (QoS) is an advanced traffic prioritization feature that allows you to
establish control over network traffic. QoS permits the assignment of various grades of
network service to different types of traffic such as multi-media, video, protocol-specific,
time critical, and file-backup traffic.
174 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
QoS reduces bandwidth limitations, delay, loss, and jitter. It also provides increased
reliability for delivery of data and permits prioritization of certain applications across the
network. You can define exactly how you want the switch to treat selected applications
and types of traffic. Use QoS on the system to control a wide variety of network traffic
functions by:
• Classifying traffic based on packet attributes.
• Assigning priorities to traffic (for example, setting higher priorities for time-critical or
business-critical applications).
• Applying security policy through traffic filtering.
• Providing predictable throughput for multimedia applications such as video
conferencing or voice over IP by minimizing delay and jitter.
• Improving performance for specific types of traffic and preserving performance as
the amount of traffic grows.
• Reducing the need to constantly add bandwidth to the network.
• Managing network congestion.
QoS terminology
• Classifier – Classifies the traffic on the network. Traffic classifications are
determined by protocol, application, source, destination, and so on. You can create
and modify classifications. The managed switch then groups classified traffic in
order to schedule them with the appropriate service level.
• DiffServ Code Point (DSCP) – Traffic prioritization bits within an IP header that are
encoded by certain applications and/or devices to indicate the level of service
required by the packet across a network.
• Service Level – Defines the priority given to a set of classified traffic. You can
create and modify service levels.
• Policy – Comprises a set of rules that are applied to a network so that a network
meets the needs of the business. That is, traffic can be prioritized across a network
according to its importance to that particular business type.
• QoS Profile – Consists of multiple sets of rules (classifier plus service level
combinations). The QoS profile is assigned to a port(s).
• Rules – Comprises a service level and a classifier to define how the managed
switch will treat certain types of traffic. Rules are associated with a QoS profile.
To implement QoS on a network, perform the following actions:
1. Define a service level to determine the priority that will be applied to traffic.
2. Apply a classifier to determine how the incoming traffic will be classified and thus
treated by the managed switch.
3. Create a QoS profile that associates a service level and a classifier.
4. Apply a QoS profile to a port(s).
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 175
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Port policing
The QoS Ingress Port Policers page permits configuration of the policer settings for all
switch ports.
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Port The port number for which the configuration below applies.
Enable Controls whether the policer is enabled on this switch port.
Rate Controls the rate for the policer. The default value is 500. This value is
restricted to 100-1000000 when the Unit is kbps or fps, and it is restricted to
1-3300 when the Unit is Mbps or kfps.
Unit Controls the unit of measure for the policer rate as kbps, Mbps, fps, or
kfps. The default value is kbps.
Flow Control If flow control is enabled and the port is in flow control mode, then pause
frames are sent instead of discarding frames.
Buttons
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
Port classification
The QoS Ingress Port Classification page permits configuration of the basic QoS
ingress classification settings for all switch ports.
176 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Port The port number for which the configuration below applies.
CoS Controls the default class of service.
All frames are classified to a CoS. There is a one to one mapping between
CoS, queue, and priority. A CoS of 0 (zero) has the lowest priority.
If the port is VLAN-aware and the frame is tagged, then the frame is
classified to a CoS that is based on the PCP value in the tag as shown
below. Otherwise, the frame is classified to the default CoS.
PCP value:
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
CoS value:
1
0
2
3
4
5
6
7
The classified CoS can be overruled by a QCL entry.
Note: If the default CoS has been dynamically changed, then the actual
default CoS is shown in parentheses after the configured default CoS.
DPL Controls the default drop precedence level.
All frames are classified to a drop precedence level.
If the port is VLAN-aware and the frame is tagged, then the frame is
classified to a DPL that is equal to the DEI value in the tag. Otherwise the
frame is classified to the default DPL. The classified DPL can be overruled
by a QCL entry
PCP Controls the default PCP value.
All frames are classified to a PCP value.
If the port is VLAN-aware and the frame is tagged, then the frame is
classified to the PCP value in the tag. Otherwise the frame is classified to the
default PCP value.
DEI Controls the default DEI value.
All frames are classified to a DEI value.
If the port is VLAN-aware and the frame is tagged, then the frame is
classified to the DEI value in the tag. Otherwise, the frame is classified to the
default DEI value.
Tag Class. Shows the classification mode for tagged frames on this port.
Disabled: Use default CoS and DPL for tagged frames.
Enabled: Use mapped versions of PCP and DEI for tagged frames.
Click on the mode to configure the mode and/or mapping.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 177
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Object Description
Note: This setting has no effect if the port is VLAN unaware. Tagged frames
received on VLAN unaware ports are always classified to the default CoS
and DPL.
DSCP Based Select DSCP Based to enable DSCP-based QoS ingress port classification.
Buttons
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
Queue policing
Configure the queue policer settings for all switch ports in the QoS Ingress Queue
Policers page.
178 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Port The port number for which the configuration below applies.
Enable (E) Enable or disable the queue policer for this switch port.
Rate Controls the rate for the queue policer. This value is restricted to 25-
13128147 when "Unit" is kbps, and 1-13128 when "Unit" is Mbps. The rate is
internally rounded up to the nearest value supported by the queue policer.
This field is only shown if at least one of the queue policers are enabled.
Unit Controls the unit of measure for the queue policer rate as kbps or Mbps.
This field is only shown if at least one of the queue policers are enabled.
Buttons
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
Port scheduler
The QoS Egress Port Schedulers page provides an overview of the QoS egress port
schedulers for all switch ports.
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row. Click on the port
number to configure the schedulers.
For more details, refer to “Understanding QoS” on page 174.
Mode Shows the scheduling mode for this port.
Q0 ~ Q7 Shows the weight for this queue and port.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 179
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Port shaping
The QoS Egress Port Shapers page provides an overview of the QoS egress port
shapers for all switch ports.
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row. Click on the port
number to configure the shapers.
For more details, refer to “Understanding QoS” on page 174.
Q0 ~Q7 Shows "disabled" or actual queue shaper rate (e.g., "800 Mbps").
Port Shows "disabled" or actual port shaper rate (e.g., "800 Mbps").
QoS egress port schedule and shapers
The port scheduler and shapers for a specific port are configured on the QoS Egress
Port Schedule and Shapers page.
180 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 181
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Scheduler Mode Controls whether the scheduler mode is Strict Priority or Weighted on this
switch port.
Queue Shaper
Enable Controls whether the queue shaper is enabled for this queue on this switch
port.
Queue Shaper Rate Controls the rate for the queue shaper. The default value is 500. This value
is restricted to 100-1000000 when the Unit is kbps, and it is restricted to 1-
13200 when the Unit is Mbps.
Queue Shaper Unit Controls the unit of measure for the queue shaper rate as kbps or Mbps.
The default value is kbps.
Queue Shaper
Excess Controls whether the queue is allowed to use excess bandwidth.
Queue Scheduler
Weight Controls the weight for this queue. The default value is 17. This value is
restricted to 1-100. This parameter only appears if Scheduler Mode is set to
Weighted.
Queue Scheduler
Percent Shows the weight in percent for this queue. This parameter only appears if
Scheduler Mode is set to Weighted.
Port Shaper Enable Controls whether the port shaper is enabled for this switch port.
Port Shaper Rate Controls the rate for the port shaper. The default value is 500. This value is
restricted to 100-1000000 when the Unit is kbps, and it is restricted to 1-
13200 when the Unit is Mbps.
Port Shaper Unit Controls the unit of measure for the port shaper rate as kbps or Mbps. The
default value is kbps.
Buttons
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
• Click Cancel to undo any changes made locally and return to the previous page.
Port tag remarking
The QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking page provides an overview of QoS egress port
tag remarking for all switch ports.
182 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row.
Click on the port number to configure tag remarking. For further details, refer
to “QoS egress port tag remarking” below.
Mode Shows the tag remarking mode for this port.
Classified: Use classified PCP/DEI values
Default: Use default PCP/DEI values.
Mapped: Use mapped versions of QoS class and DP level.
QoS egress port tag remarking
The QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking page can also provide an overview of QoS
egress port tag remarking for a specific port.
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Mode Controls the tag remarking mode for this port.
Classified: Use classified PCP/DEI values.
Default: Use default PCP/DEI values.
Mapped: Use mapped versions of QoS class and DP level.
PCP/DEI
Configuration Controls the default PCP and DEI values used when the mode is set to
Default.
(QoS class, DP level)
to (PCP, DEI)
Mapping
Controls the mapping of the classified (QoS class, DP level) to (PCP, DEI)
values when the mode is set to Mapped.
Buttons
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
Port DSCP
The QoS Port DSCP Configuration page permits configuration of the basic QoS port
DSCP settings for all switch ports.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 183
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Port The Port column shows the list of ports for which DSCP ingress and egress
settings can be configured.
Ingress Change ingress translation and classification settings for individual ports.
There are two configuration parameters available in Ingress:
Translate
Classify
Translate Select the Translate check box to enable the Ingress translation.
Classify Selections are as follows:
Disable: No Ingress DSCP Classification.
DSCP=0: Classify if incoming (or translated if enabled) DSCP is 0.
Selected: Classify only the selected DSCP for which classification is
enabled as specified in the DSCP Translation window for the specific DSCP.
All: Classify all DSCP.
Egress Selections for Rewrite are as follows:
Disable: No egress rewrite.
Enable: Rewrite enabled without remapping.
Remap DP Unaware: DSCP from the analyzer is remapped and the frame is
remarked with the remapped DSCP value. The remapped DSCP value is
always taken from the 'DSCP Translation->Egress Remap DP0' table.
Remap DP Aware: DSCP from the analyzer is remapped and the frame is
remarked with the remapped DSCP value. Depending on the DP level of the
frame, the remapped DSCP value is either taken from the 'DSCP
Translation->Egress Remap DP0' table or from the 'DSCP Translation-
>Egress Remap DP1' table.
Buttons
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
184 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
DSCP-based QoS
The QoS DSCP-Based QoS Ingress Classification page permits configuration of the
basic QoS DSCP-based QoS ingress classification settings for all switches.
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
DSCP Maximum number of supported DSCP values is 64.
Trust Controls whether a specific DSCP value is trusted. Only frames with trusted
DSCP values are mapped to a specific QoS class and Drop Precedence
Level. Frames with untrusted DSCP values are treated as a non-IP frame.
QoS Class QoS Class values can be between 0-7.
DPL Drop Precedence Level (0-1)
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 185
Chapter 4: Web configuration
DSCP translation
The DSCP Translation page permits configuration of the basic QoS DSCP translation
settings for all switches. DSCP translation can be done in Ingress or Egress.
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
DSCP The maximum number of supported DSCP values is 64 and valid DSCP
values range from 0 to 63.
Ingress The Ingress side of DSCP can be first translated to new DSCP before using
the DSCP for the QoS class and DPL map.
There are two configuration parameters for DSCP Translation:
Translate
Classify
Translate DSCP at the Ingress side can be translated to any of 0-63 DSCP values.
Classify Click Classify to enable classification at the Ingress side.
186 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Object Description
Egress Contains a configurable parameter for Remap.
Remap DP Select a DSCP value to which you want to remap from the Remap drop-
down list. DSCP values range from 0 to 63.
Buttons
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
DSCP classification
The DSCP Classification page permits mapping a DSCP value to a QoS Class and
DPL value.
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
QoS Class Available QoS Class values range from 0 to 7. QoS Class (0-7) can be
mapped to followed parameters.
DPL Actual Drop Precedence Level.
DSCP Select DSCP value (0-63) from DSCP menu to map DSCP to corresponding
QoS Class and DPL value
Buttons
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 187
Chapter 4: Web configuration
QoS control list
The QoS Control List Configuration page shows the QoS Control List (QCL), which is
made up of the QCEs. Each row describes a QCE that is defined. The maximum
number of QCEs is 256 on each switch. Click on the lowest plus sign to add a new
QCE to the list.
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
QCE# Indicates the index of QCE.
Port Indicates the list of ports configured with the QCE.
DMAC Specify the type of Destination MAC addresses for incoming frames.
Selections include:
Any: All types of Destination MAC addresses are allowed. Default value.
Unicast: Only Unicast MAC addresses are allowed.
Multicast: Only Multicast MAC addresses are allowed.
Broadcast: Only Broadcast MAC addresses are allowed.
SMAC Displays the OUI field of Source MAC address (i.e., the first three octets (in
bytes) of the MAC address).
Tag Type Indicates tag type. Selections include:
Any: Match tagged and untagged frames. Default value.
Untagged: Match untagged frames.
Tagged: Match tagged frames.
VID Indicates VLAN ID (either a specific VID or range of VIDs). VID can be in the
range of 1-4095 or Any.
PCP Priority Code Point: Valid PCP values are specific (0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7), a
range (0-1, 2-3, 4-5, 6-7, 0-3, 4-7), or Any.
DEI Drop Eligible Indicator: Selections include 0, 1, or Any.
Frame Type Indicates the type of frame to look for incoming frames. Selections include:
Any: The QCE will match all frame types.
Ethernet: Only Ethernet frames (with Ether Type 0x600-0xFFFF) are
allowed.
LLC: Only (LLC) frames are allowed.
SNAP: Only (SNAP) frames are allowed.
IPv4: The QCE only matches IPV4 frames.
IPv6: The QCE only matches IPV6 frames.
Action Indicates the classification action taken on the ingress frame if the
parameters configured match with the frame's content. Action fields include:
188 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Object Description
Class: Classified QoS class.
DPL: Classified Drop Precedence Level.
DSCP: Classified DSCP value.
Modification Buttons Modify each QCE in the table using the following buttons:
: Inserts a new QCE before the current row.
: Edits the QCE.
: Moves the QCE up the list.
: Moves the QCE down the list.
: Deletes the QCE.
: The lowest plus sign adds a new entry at the bottom of the list of QCL.
QoS control entry configuration
The QCE Configuration page appears as follows:
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 189
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Port Members Select the Port Members check boxes to make any port a member of the
QCL entry. All ports are selected by default.
Key Parameters Key configuration selections are as follows:
DMAC Type – Destination MAC type: possible values are unicast (UC),
multicast (MC), broadcast (BC) or Any.
SMAC – Source MAC address: 24 MS bits (OUI) or Any.
Tag – Value of Tag field can be Any, Untag, or Tag.
VID – Valid value of VLAN ID can be any value in the range 1-4095 or Any.
The user can enter either a specific value or a range of VIDs
PCP – Priority Code Point: Valid value PCP are specific (0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7)
or a range (0-1, 2-3, 4-5, 6-7, 0-3, 4-7) or Any.
DEI – Drop Eligible Indicator: Selections include 0, 1, or Any.
Frame Type – Frame Type can have any of the following values: Any,
Ethernet, LLC, SNAP, IPv4, or IPv6.
Note: These frame types are described below.
Any Allow all types of frames.
EtherType Ethernet Type –Ethernet types can have values of 0x600-0xFFFF or Any.
Excluding 0x800(IPv4) and 0x86DD(IPv6), the default value is Any.
LLC SSAP Address – SSAP (Source Service Access Point) selections are 0x00
to 0xFF or Any (default value).
DSAP Address – DSAP (Destination Service Access Point) selections are
0x00 to 0xFF or Any (default value).
Control Address – Control Address selections are 0x00 to 0xFF or Any
(default value).
SNAP PID – PID(a.k.a., Ethernet type) elections are 0x00 to 0xFFFF or Any
(default value).
IPv4 Protocol – IP protocol number: (0-255, TCP or UDP) or Any.
Source IP – Specific Source IP address in value/mask format or Any. IP and
Mask are in the format x.y.z.w where x, y, z, and w are decimal numbers
between 0 and 255. When the Mask is converted to a 32-bit binary string
and read from left to right, all bits following the first zero must also be zero.
DSCP – Diffserv Code Point value (DSCP): It can be a specific value, range
of values, or Any. DSCP values are in the range of 0-63 including BE, CS1-
CS7, EF or AF11-AF43.
IP Fragment – IPv4 frame fragmented option: yes, no, any.
Sport – Source TCP/UDP port: (0-65535) or Any, specific or port range
applicable for IP protocol UDP/TCP.
Dport – Destination TCP/UDP port: (0-65535) or Any, specific or port range
applicable for IP protocol UDP/TCP.
IPv6 Protocol – IP protocol number: (0-255, TCP or UDP) or Any.
Source IP – IPv6 source address: (a.b.c.d) or Any, 32 LS bits.
DSCP – Diffserv Code Point value (DSCP): It can be a specific value, range
of values, or Any. DSCP values are in the range 0-63 including BE, CS1-
CS7, EF or AF11-AF43.
Sport – Source TCP/UDP port:(0-65535) or Any, specific or port range
applicable for IP protocol UDP/TCP.
190 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Object Description
Dport – Destination TCP/UDP port:(0-65535) or Any, specific or port range
applicable for IP protocol UDP/TCP.
Action Parameters Class – QoS class: (0-7) or Default.
DPL – Drop Precedence Level selections include (0-3) or Default.
DSCP – DSCP selections include (0-63, BE, CS1-CS7, EF or AF11-AF43)
or Default. Default indicates that the default classified value is not modified
by this QCE.
Buttons
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
• Click Cancel to return to the previous page without saving the configuration change.
QCL status
The QoS Control List Status page shows the QCL status by different QCL users. Each
row describes the QCE that is defined. A conflict occurs if a specific QCE is not applied
to the hardware due to hardware limitations. The maximum number of QCEs is 256 on
each switch.
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
User Indicates the QCL user.
QCE# Indicates the index of QCE.
Port Indicates the list of ports configured with the QCE.
Frame Type Indicates the type of frame to look for incoming frames. Possible frame types
are:
Any: The QCE will match all frame types.
Ethernet: Only Ethernet frames (with Ether Type 0x600-0xFFFF) are
allowed.
LLC: Only (LLC) frames are allowed.
SNAP: Only (SNAP) frames are allowed.
IPv4: The QCE will match only IPV4 frames.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 191
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Object Description
IPv6: The QCE will match only IPV6 frames.
Action Indicates the classification action taken on ingress frame if parameters
configured are matched with the frame's content. Action fields are as follows:
Class: Classified QoS class. If a frame matches the QCE it will be put in the
queue.
DPL: Drop Precedence Level. If a frame matches the QCE then the DP level
will be set to the value shown under the DPL column.
DSCP: If a frame matches the QCE then DSCP will be classified with the
value shown under DSCP column.
Conflict Displays the conflict status of QCL entries when hardware resources are
shared by multiple applications. It may happen that resources required to
add a QCE may not be available, in which case it shows conflict status as
Yes, otherwise it is always No.
Conflict can be resolved by releasing the hardware resources required to
add the QCL entry by clicking the Resolve Conflict button.
Buttons
• Select the QCL status from the Combined drop-down list.
• Select the Auto-refresh check box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic
refresh occurs every three seconds.
• Click Resolve Conflict to release the resources required to add the QCL entry
when the conflict status for any QCL entry is Yes.
• Click Refresh to refresh the page.
Storm control configuration
Storm control for the switch is configured on the QoS Port Storm Control page. There is
a unicast storm rate control, multicast storm rate control, and a broadcast storm rate
control. These only affect flooded frames (i.e., frames with a (VLAN ID, DMAC) pair not
present on the MAC Address table).
The configuration indicates the permitted packet rate for unicast, multicast, or
broadcast traffic across the switch.
192 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Port The port number for which the configuration below applies.
Enable Enable storm control on this switch port.
Rate Controls the rate for the storm control. The default value is 500. This value is
restricted to 100-1000000 when the Unit is kbps or fps, and it is restricted to
1-13200 when the Unit is Mbps or kfps.
Unit Controls the unit of measure for the storm control rate as kbps, Mbps, fps
or kfps . The default value is kbps.
Buttons
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
WRED
Configure the Random Early Detection (RED) settings for queue 0 to 5 on the WRED
Configuration page. RED cannot be applied to queue 6 and 7. Through different RED
configurations for the queues (QoS classes), it is possible to obtain Weighted Random
Early Detection (WRED) operation between queues. The settings are global for all ports
in the switch.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 193
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Queue The queue number (QoS class) for which the configuration below applies.
Enable Controls whether RED is enabled for this queue.
Min. Threshold Controls the lower RED threshold. If the average queue filling level is below
this threshold, the drop probability is zero.
This value is restricted to 0-100.
Max. DP 1 Controls the drop probability for frames marked with Drop Precedence Level
1 when the average queue filling level is 100%.
This value is restricted to 0-100.
Max. DP2 Controls the drop probability for frames marked with Drop Precedence Level
2 when the average queue filling level is 100%.
This value is restricted to 0-100.
Max. DP3 Controls the drop probability for frames marked with Drop Precedence Level
3 when the average queue filling level is 100%.
This value is restricted to 0-100.
RED drop probability function
The following illustration shows the drop probability function with associated
parameters.
194 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Max. DP 1-3 is the drop probability when the average queue filling level is 100%.
Frames marked with Drop Precedence Level 0 are never dropped. Min. Threshold is
the average queue filling level where the queues randomly start dropping frames. The
drop probability for frames marked with Drop Precedence Level n increases linearly
from zero (at Min. Threshold average queue filling level) to Max. DP n (at 100%
average queue filling level).
Buttons
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
QoS statistics
The Queuing Counters page provides statistics for the different queues for all switch
ports.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 195
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row.
Q0 ~ Q7 There are eight QoS queues per port. Q0 is the lowest priority queue.
Rx/Tx The number of received and transmitted packets per queue.
Buttons
• Click Refresh to refresh the page.
• Click Clear to clear the counters for all ports.
• Select the Auto-refresh check box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic
refresh occurs every three seconds.
Voice VLAN configuration
The Voice VLAN Configuration page contains the Voice VLAN feature. This enables
voice traffic forwarding on the Voice VLAN, permitting the switch to classify and
schedule network traffic. We recommended that there be two VLANs on a port – one
for voice and one for data.
Before connecting the IP device to the switch, the IP phone should configure the voice
VLAN ID correctly. It should be configured through its own GUI.
196 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Mode Indicates the Voice VLAN mode operation. The MSTP feature must be
disabled before enabling Voice VLAN. This helps avoid an ingress filter
conflict. Selections include:
Enabled: Enable Voice VLAN mode operation.
Disabled: Disable Voice VLAN mode operation.
VLAN ID Indicates the Voice VLAN ID. It should be a unique VLAN ID in the system
and cannot equal each port PVID. A configuration conflict occurs if the value
equals management VID, MVR VID, PVID, etc.
The permitted range is 1 to 4095.
Aging Time Indicates the Voice VLAN secure learning age time. The permitted range is
10 to 10000000 seconds. It is used when the security mode or auto detect
mode is enabled. In other cases, it is based on hardware age time.
The actual age time is situated in the [age_time; 2 * age_time] interval.
Traffic Class Indicates the Voice VLAN traffic class. All traffic on the Voice VLAN applies
to this class.
Mode Indicates the Voice VLAN port mode. Selections include:
Disabled: Disjoin from Voice VLAN.
Auto: Enable auto detect mode. It detects if there is a VoIP phone attached
to the specific port and configures the Voice VLAN members automatically.
Forced: Force join to Voice VLAN.
Port Security Indicates the Voice VLAN port security mode. When the function is enabled,
all non-telephone MAC address in Voice VLAN are blocked 10 seconds.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 197
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Object Description
Selections include:
Enabled: Enable Voice VLAN security mode operation.
Disabled: Disable Voice VLAN security mode operation.
Port Discovery
Protocol Indicates the Voice VLAN port discovery protocol. It only works when auto
detect mode is enabled. Enable the LLDP feature before configuring the
discovery protocol to LLDP or Both. Changing the discovery protocol to OUI
or LLDP restarts the auto detect process. Selections include:
OUI: Detect telephony device by OUI address.
LLDP: Detect telephony device by LLDP.
Both: Both OUI and LLDP.
Voice VLAN OUI table
Configure Voice VLAN OUI table on the Voice VLAN OUI Table page. The maximum
entry number is 16. Modifying the OUI table restarts auto detection of the OUI process.
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Delete Select the check boxes to delete the entry. Entries are deleted during the
next save.
Telephony OUI An telephony OUI address is a globally unique identifier assigned to a
vendor by IEEE. It must be six characters long and the input format is "xx-xx-
xx" (x is a hexadecimal digit).
Description The description of the OUI address. Normally, it describes the vendor
telephony device it belongs to.
The allowed string length is 0 to 32.
198 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Buttons
• Click Add New Entry to add a new access management entry.
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
Access Control Lists (ACL)
ACL is an acronym for Access Control List. It is the list table of ACEs containing access
control entries that specify individual users or groups permitted or denied to specific
traffic objects, such as a process or a program.
Each accessible traffic object contains an identifier to its ACL. The privileges determine
if there are specific traffic object access rights.
ACL implementations can be quite complex (as when the ACEs are prioritized for
various situations). In networking, the ACL refers to a list of service ports or network
services that are available on a host or server, each with a list of hosts or servers
permitted or denied to use the service. ACLs can generally be configured to control
inbound traffic and, in this context, they are similar to firewalls.
ACE is an acronym for Access Control Entry. It describes access permission
associated with a particular ACE ID.
There are three ACE frame types (Ethernet Type, ARP, and IPv4) and two ACE actions
(permit and deny). The ACE also contains many detailed, different parameter options
that are available for individual applications.
ACL status
The Voice VLAN OUI Table page shows the ACL status by different ACL users. Each
row describes the ACE that is defined. A conflict occurs if a specific ACE is not applied
to the hardware due to hardware limitations. The maximum number of ACEs is 512 on
each switch.
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
User Indicates the ACL user.
Ingress Port Indicates the ingress port of the ACE. Values include:
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 199
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Object Description
All: The ACE matches all ingress ports.
Port: The ACE matches a specific ingress port.
Frame Type Indicates the frame type of the ACE. Values are:
Any: The ACE matches any frame type.
EType: The ACE matches Ethernet Type frames. Note that an Ethernet
Type based ACE will not get matched by IP and ARP frames.
ARP: The ACE matches ARP/RARP frames.
IPv4: The ACE matches all IPv4 frames.
IPv4/ICMP: The ACE matches IPv4 frames with ICMP protocol.
IPv4/UDP: The ACE matches IPv4 frames with UDP protocol.
IPv4/TCP: The ACE matches IPv4 frames with TCP protocol.
IPv4/Other: The ACE matches IPv4 frames, which are not ICMP/UDP/TCP.
IPv6: The ACE matches all IPv6 standard frames.
Action Indicates the forwarding action of the ACE.
Permit: Frames matching the ACE may be forwarded and learned.
Deny: Frames matching the ACE are dropped.
Rate Limiter Indicates the rate limiter number of the ACE. The allowed range is 1 to 16.
When Disabled is shown, the rate limiter operation is disabled.
Port Redirect Indicates the port redirect operation of the ACE. Frames matching the ACE
are redirected to the port number.
The allowed values are Disabled or a specific port number. When Disabled
is shown, the port redirect operation is disabled.
Mirror Specify the mirror operation of this port. The allowed values are:
Enabled: Frames received on the port are mirrored.
Disabled: Frames received on the port are not mirrored.
The default value is Disabled.
CPU Forward packet that matched the specific ACE to CPU.
CPU Once Forward first packet that matched the specific ACE to CPU.
Counter The counter indicates the number of times the ACE was hit by a frame.
Conflict Indicates the hardware status of the specific ACE. The specific ACE is not
applied to the hardware due to hardware limitations.
Buttons
• Select the Auto-refresh check box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic
refresh occurs every three seconds.
• Click Refresh to refresh the page.
ACL configuration
The Access Control List Configuration page shows the Access Control List (ACL),
which is made up of the ACEs defined on this switch. Each row describes the ACE that
is defined. The maximum number of ACEs is 512 on each switch.
200 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Click on the lowest plus sign to add a new ACE to the list. The reserved ACEs used for
internal protocol cannot be edited or deleted, the order sequence cannot be changed,
and the priority is highest.
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Ingress Port Indicates the ingress port of the ACE. Possible values are:
All: The ACE matches all ingress port.
Port: The ACE matches a specific ingress port.
Policy / Bitmask Indicates the policy number and bitmask of the ACE.
Frame Type Indicates the frame type of the ACE. Possible values are:
Any: The ACE matches any frame type.
EType: The ACE matches Ethernet Type frames. Note that an Ethernet
Type based ACE will not get matched by IP and ARP frames.
ARP: The ACE matches ARP/RARP frames.
IPv4: The ACE matches all IPv4 frames.
IPv4/ICMP: The ACE matches IPv4 frames with ICMP protocol.
IPv4/UDP: The ACE matches IPv4 frames with UDP protocol.
IPv4/TCP: The ACE matches IPv4 frames with TCP protocol.
IPv4/Other: The ACE matches IPv4 frames, which are not ICMP/UDP/TCP.
IPv6: The ACE matches all IPv6 standard frames.
Action Indicates the forwarding action of the ACE.
Permit: Frames matching the ACE may be forwarded and learned.
Deny: Frames matching the ACE are dropped.
Rate Limiter Indicates the rate limiter number of the ACE. The allowed range is 1 to 16.
When Disabled is shown, the rate limiter operation is disabled.
Port Redirect Indicates the port redirect operation of the ACE. Frames matching the ACE
are redirected to the port number.
The allowed values are Disabled or a specific port number. When Disabled
is shown, the port redirect operation is disabled.
Counter The counter indicates the number of times the ACE was hit by a frame.
Modification Buttons Modify each ACE (Access Control Entry) in the table using the following
buttons:
: Inserts a new ACE before the current row.
: Edits the ACE row.
: Moves the ACE up the list.
: Moves the ACE down the list.
: Deletes the ACE.
: The lowest plus sign adds a new entry at the bottom of the ACE listings.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 201
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Buttons
• Select the Auto-refresh check box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic
refresh occurs every three seconds.
• Click Refresh to refresh the page.
• Click Clear to clear the counters.
• Click Remove All to remove all ACEs.
ACE configuration
Configure an ACE (Access Control Entry) on the ACE Configuration page. An ACE
consists of several parameters that vary according to the frame type selected. First
select the ingress port for the ACE, and then select the frame type. Different parameter
options appear depending on the frame type selected. A frame that hits this ACE
matches the configuration that is defined here.
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Ingress Port Select the ingress port for which this ACE applies.
Any: The ACE applies to any port.
Port n: The ACE applies to this port number, where n is the number of the
switch port.
Policy Filter Specify the policy number filter for this ACE.
Any: No policy filter is specified (policy filter status is "don't-care”).
Specific: If you want to filter a specific policy with this ACE, choose this
value. Two fields for entering a policy value and bitmask appear.
Policy Value When Specific is selected for the policy filter, you can enter a specific policy
202 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Object Description
value.
The permitted range is 0 to 255.
Policy Bitmask When Specific is selected for the policy filter, you can enter a specific policy
bitmask. The permitted range is 0x0 to 0xff.
Frame Type Select the frame type for this ACE. These frame types are mutually
exclusive.
Any: Any frame can match this ACE.
Ethernet Type: Only Ethernet Type frames can match this ACE. The IEEE
802.3 describes the value of Length/Type Field specifications to be greater
than or equal to 1536 decimal (equal to 0600 hexadecimal).
ARP: Only ARP frames can match this ACE. Note that the ARP frames won't
match the ACE with Ethernet type.
IPv4: Only IPv4 frames can match this ACE. Note that the IPv4 frames won't
match the ACE with Ethernet type.
IPv6: Only IPv6 frames can match this ACE. Note that the IPv6 frames won't
match the ACE with Ethernet type.
Action Specify the action to take with a frame that hits this ACE.
Permit: The frame that hits this ACE is granted permission for the ACE
operation.
Deny: The frame that hits this ACE is dropped.
Rate Limiter Specify the rate limiter in number of base units.
The allowed range is 1 to 16.
Disabled indicates that the rate limiter operation is disabled.
Port Redirect Frames that hit the ACE are redirected to the port number specified here.
The allowed range is the same as the switch port number range.
Disabled indicates that the port redirect operation is disabled.
Logging Specify the logging operation of the ACE. The allowed values are:
Enabled: Frames matching the ACE are stored in the System Log.
Disabled: Frames matching the ACE are not logged.
Note: The logging feature only works when the packet length is less than
1518 (without VLAN tags) and the System Log memory size and logging rate
is limited.
Shutdown Specify the port shut down operation of the ACE. The allowed values are:
Enabled: If a frame matches the ACE, the ingress port will be disabled.
Disabled: Port shut down is disabled for the ACE.
Note: The shutdown feature only works when the packet length is less than
1518 (without VLAN tags).
Counter The counter indicates the number of times the ACE was hit by a frame.
MAC parameters
Object Description
SMAC Filter This is only shown when the frame type is Ethernet Type or ARP.
Specify the source MAC filter for this ACE.
Any: No SMAC filter is specified (SMAC filter status is "don't-care”).
Specific: If you want to filter a specific source MAC address with this ACE,
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 203
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Object Description
choose this value. A field for entering an SMAC value appears.
SMAC Value When Specific is selected for the SMAC filter, you can enter a specific
source MAC address. The legal format is "xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx" or
"xx.xx.xx.xx.xx.xx" or "xxxxxxxxxxxx" (x is a hexadecimal digit). A frame that
hits this ACE matches this SMAC value.
DMAC Filter Specify the destination MAC filter for this ACE.
Any: No DMAC filter is specified. (DMAC filter status is "don't-care”).
MC: Frame must be multicast.
BC: Frame must be broadcast.
UC: Frame must be unicast.
Specific: If you want to filter a specific destination MAC address with this
ACE, choose this value. A field for entering a DMAC value appears.
DMAC Value When Specific is selected for the DMAC filter, you can enter a specific
destination MAC address. The legal format is "xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx" or
"xx.xx.xx.xx.xx.xx" or "xxxxxxxxxxxx" (x is a hexadecimal digit). A frame that
hits this ACE matches this DMAC value.
VLAN parameters
Object Description
VLAN ID Filter Specify the VLAN ID filter for this ACE.
Any: No VLAN ID filter is specified. (VLAN ID filter status is "don't-care”).
Specific: If you want to filter a specific VLAN ID with this ACE, choose this
value. A field for entering a VLAN ID number appears.
VLAN ID When Specific is selected for the VLAN ID filter, you can enter a specific
VLAN ID number. The allowed range is 1 to 4095. A frame that hits this ACE
matches this VLAN ID value.
Tag Priority Specify the tag priority for this ACE. A frame that hits this ACE matches this
tag priority. The allowed number range is 0 to 7. The value Any means that
no tag priority is specified (tag priority is "don't-care”).
ARP parameters
Object Description
ARP/RARP Specify the available ARP/RARP opcode (OP) flag for this ACE.
Any: No ARP/RARP OP flag is specified. (OP is "don't-care”).
ARP: Frame must have ARP/RARP opcode set to ARP.
RARP: Frame must have ARP/RARP opcode set to RARP.
Other: Frame has unknown ARP/RARP Opcode flag.
Request/Reply Specify the available ARP/RARP opcode (OP) flag for this ACE.
Any: No ARP/RARP OP flag is specified. (OP is "don't-care”).
Request: Frame must have the ARP Request or RARP Request OP flag set.
Reply: Frame must have ARP Reply or RARP Reply OP flag.
Sender IP Filter Specify the sender IP filter for this ACE.
Any: No sender IP filter is specified. (Sender IP filter is "don't-care”).
Host: Sender IP filter is set to Host. Specify the sender IP address in the SIP
204 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Object Description
Address field that appears.
Network: Sender IP filter is set to Network. Specify the sender IP address
and sender IP mask in the SIP Address and SIP Mask fields that appear.
Sender IP Address When Host or Network is selected for the sender IP filter, you can enter a
specific sender IP address in dotted decimal notation.
Sender IP Mask When Network is selected for the sender IP filter, you can enter a specific
sender IP mask in dotted decimal notation.
Target IP Filter Specify the target IP filter for this specific ACE.
Any: No target IP filter is specified. (Target IP filter is "don't-care”).
Host: Target IP filter is set to Host. Specify the target IP address in the
Target IP Address field that appears.
Network: Target IP filter is set to Network. Specify the target IP address and
target IP mask in the Target IP Address and Target IP Mask fields that
appear.
Target IP Address When Host or Network is selected for the target IP filter, you can enter a
specific target IP address in dotted decimal notation.
Target IP Mask When Network is selected for the target IP filter, you can enter a specific
target IP mask in dotted decimal notation.
ARP Sender MAC
Match Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their sender hardware
address field (SHA) settings.
0: ARP frames where SHA is not equal to the SMAC address.
1: ARP frames where SHA is equal to the SMAC address.
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care”).
RARP Target MAC
Match Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their target hardware
address field (THA) settings.
0: RARP frames where THA is not equal to the SMAC address.
1: RARP frames where THA is equal to the SMAC address.
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care”).
IP/Ethernet Length Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their ARP/RARP
hardware address length (HLN) and protocol address length (PLN) settings.
0: ARP/RARP frames where the HLN is equal to Ethernet (0x06) and the
(PLN) is equal to IPv4 (0x04).
1: ARP/RARP frames where the HLN is equal to Ethernet (0x06) and the
(PLN) is equal to IPv4 (0x04).
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care”).
IP Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their ARP/RARP
hardware address space (HRD) settings.
0: ARP/RARP frames where the HLD is equal to Ethernet (1).
1: ARP/RARP frames where the HLD is equal to Ethernet (1).
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care”).
Ethernet Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their ARP/RARP
protocol address space (PRO) settings.
0: ARP/RARP frames where the PRO is equal to IP (0x800).
1: ARP/RARP frames where the PRO is equal to IP (0x800).
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care”).
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 205
Chapter 4: Web configuration
IP parameters
The IP parameters can be configured when IPv4 is selected as the Frame Type.
Object Description
IP Protocol Filter Specify the IP protocol filter for this ACE.
Any: No IP protocol filter is specified ("don't-care”).
Specific: If you want to filter a specific IP protocol filter with this ACE,
choose this value. A field for entering an IP protocol filter appears.
ICMP: Select ICMP to filter IPv4 ICMP protocol frames. Extra fields for
defining ICMP parameters appear.
UDP: Select UDP to filter IPv4 UDP protocol frames. Extra fields for defining
UDP parameters will appear.
TCP: Select TCP to filter IPv4 TCP protocol frames. Extra fields for defining
TCP parameters will appear.
IP Protocol Value When Specific is selected for the IP protocol value, you can enter a specific
value. The allowed range is 0 to 255. A frame that hits this ACE matches this
IP protocol value.
IP TTL Specify the Time-to-Live settings for this ACE.
zero: IPv4 frames with a Time-to-Live field greater than zero must not be
able to match this entry.
non-zero: IPv4 frames with a Time-to-Live field greater than zero must be
able to match this entry.
Any: Any value is allowed (“don't-care”).
IP Fragment Specify the fragment offset settings for this ACE. This involves the settings
for the More Fragments (MF) bit and the Fragment Offset (FRAG OFFSET)
field for an IPv4 frame.
No: IPv4 frames where the MF bit is set or the FRAG OFFSET field is
greater than zero must not be able to match this entry.
Yes: IPv4 frames where the MF bit is set or the FRAG OFFSET field is
greater than zero must be able to match this entry.
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care”).
IP Option Specify the options flag setting for this ACE.
No: IPv4 frames where the options flag is set must not be able to match this
entry.
Yes: IPv4 frames where the options flag is set must be able to match this
entry.
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care”).
SIP Filter Specify the source IP filter for this ACE.
Any: No source IP filter is specified. (Source IP filter is "don't-care”).
Host: Source IP filter is set to Host. Specify the source IP address in the SIP
Address field that appears.
Network: Source IP filter is set to Network. Specify the source IP address
and source IP mask in the SIP Address and SIP Mask fields that appear.
SIP Address When Host or Network is selected for the source IP filter, you can enter a
specific SIP address in dotted decimal notation.
SIP Mask When Network is selected for the source IP filter, you can enter a specific
SIP mask in dotted decimal notation.
DIP Filter Specify the destination IP filter for this ACE.
206 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Object Description
Any: No destination IP filter is specified. (Destination IP filter is "don't-care”).
Host: Destination IP filter is set to Host. Specify the destination IP address
in the DIP Address field that appears.
Network: Destination IP filter is set to Network. Specify the destination IP
address and destination IP mask in the DIP Address and DIP Mask fields
that appear.
DIP Address When Host or Network is selected for the destination IP filter, you can enter
a specific DIP address in dotted decimal notation.
DIP Mask When Network is selected for the destination IP filter, you can enter a
specific DIP mask in dotted decimal notation.
IPv6 parameters
Object Description
Next Header Fliter Specify the IPv6 next header filter for this ACE.
Any: No IPv6 next header filter is specified ("don't-care”).
Specific: If you want to filter a specific IPv6 next header filter with this ACE,
choose this value. A field for entering an IPv6 next header filter appears.
ICMP: Select ICMP to filter IPv6 ICMP protocol frames. Extra fields for
defining ICMP parameters appear.
UDP: Select UDP to filter IPv6 UDP protocol frames. Extra fields for defining
UDP parameters appear.
TCP: Select TCP to filter IPv6 TCP protocol frames. Extra fields for defining
TCP parameters appear.
Next Header Value When Specific is selected for the IPv6 next header value, you can enter a
specific value. The allowed range is 0 to 255. A frame that hits this ACE
matches this IPv6 protocol value.
SIP Filter Specify the source IPv6 filter for this ACE.
Any: No source IPv6 filter is specified. (Source IPv6 filter is "don't-care”).
Specific: Source IPv6 filter is set to Network. Specify the source IPv6
address and source IPv6 mask in the SIP Address fields that appear.
SIP Address When Specific is selected for the source IPv6 filter, you can enter a specific
SIPv6 address. The field only supports the last 32 bits for the IPv6 address.
SIP BitMask When Specific is selected for the source IPv6 filter, you can enter a specific
SIPv6 mask. The field only supports the last 32 bits for the IPv6 address.
Notice the usage of bitmask – if the binary bit value is "0", it means this bit is
"don't-care".
The real matched pattern is [sipv6_address & sipv6_bitmask] (last 32 bits).
For example, if the SIPv6 address is 2001::3 and the SIPv6 bitmask is
0xFFFFFFFE(bit 0 is "don't-care" bit), then SIPv6 address 2001::2 and
2001::3 are applied to this rule.
Hop Limit Specify the hop limit settings for this ACE.
zero: IPv6 frames with a hop limit field greater than zero must not be able to
match this entry.
non-zero: IPv6 frames with a hop limit field greater than zero must be able
to match this entry.
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care”).
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 207
Chapter 4: Web configuration
ICMP parameters
Object Description
ICMP Type Filter Specify the ICMP filter for this ACE.
Any: No ICMP filter is specified (ICMP filter status is "don't-care”).
Specific: To filter a specific ICMP filter with this ACE, you can enter a
specific ICMP value. A field for entering an ICMP value appears.
ICMP Type Value When Specific is selected for the ICMP filter, you can enter a specific ICMP
value.
The allowed range is 0 to 255. A frame that hits this ACE matches this ICMP
value.
ICMP Code Filter Specify the ICMP code filter for this ACE.
Any: No ICMP code filter is specified (ICMP code filter status is "don't-care”).
Specific: To filter a specific ICMP code filter with this ACE, you can enter a
specific ICMP code value. A field for entering an ICMP code value appears.
ICMP Code Value When Specific is selected for the ICMP code filter, you can enter a specific
ICMP code value.
The allowed range is 0 to 255. A frame that hits this ACE matches this ICMP
code value.
TCP/UDP parameters
Object Description
TCP/UDP Source
Filter Specify the TCP/UDP source filter for this ACE.
Any: No TCP/UDP source filter is specified (TCP/UDP source filter status is
"don't-care”).
Specific: To filter a specific TCP/UDP source filter with this ACE, you can
enter a specific TCP/UDP source value. A field for entering a TCP/UDP
source value appears.
Range: To filter a specific TCP/UDP source range filter with this ACE, you
can enter a specific TCP/UDP source range value. A field for entering a
TCP/UDP source value appears.
TCP/UDP Source No. When Specific is selected for the TCP/UDP source filter, you can enter a
specific TCP/UDP source value. The allowed range is 0 to 65535. A frame
that hits this ACE matches this TCP/UDP source value.
TCP/UDP Source
Range When Range is selected for the TCP/UDP source filter, you can enter a
specific TCP/UDP source range value. The allowed range is 0 to 65535. A
frame that hits this ACE matches this TCP/UDP source value.
TCP/UDP Destination
Filter Specify the TCP/UDP destination filter for this ACE.
Any: No TCP/UDP destination filter is specified (TCP/UDP destination filter
status is "don't-care”).
Specific: To filter a specific TCP/UDP destination filter with this ACE, you
can enter a specific TCP/UDP destination value. A field for entering a
TCP/UDP destination value appears.
Range: To filter a specific range TCP/UDP destination filter with this ACE,
you can enter a specific TCP/UDP destination range value. A field for
entering a TCP/UDP destination value appears.
TCP/UDP Destination
Number When Specific is selected for the TCP/UDP destination filter, you can enter
a specific TCP/UDP destination value. The allowed range is 0 to 65535. A
208 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Object Description
frame that hits this ACE matches this TCP/UDP destination value.
TCP/UDP Destination
Range When Range is selected for the TCP/UDP destination filter, you can enter a
specific TCP/UDP destination range value. The allowed range is 0 to 65535.
A frame that hits this ACE matches this TCP/UDP destination value.
TCP FIN Specify the TCP "No more data from sender" (FIN) value for this ACE.
0: TCP frames where the FIN field is set must not be able to match this
entry.
1: TCP frames where the FIN field is set must be able to match this entry.
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care”).
TCP SYN Specify the TCP "Synchronize sequence numbers" (SYN) value for this
ACE.
0: TCP frames where the SYN field is set must not be able to match this
entry.
1: TCP frames where the SYN field is set must be able to match this entry.
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care”).
TCP RST Specify the TCP "Reset the connection" (RST) value for this ACE.
0: TCP frames where the RST field is set must not be able to match this
entry.
1: TCP frames where the RST field is set must be able to match this entry.
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care”).
TCP PSH Specify the TCP "Push Function" (PSH) value for this ACE.
0: TCP frames where the PSH field is set must not be able to match this
entry.
1: TCP frames where the PSH field is set must be able to match this entry.
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care”).
TCP ACK Specify the TCP "Acknowledgment field significant" (ACK) value for this
ACE.
0: TCP frames where the ACK field is set must not be able to match this
entry.
1: TCP frames where the ACK field is set must be able to match this entry.
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care”).
TCP URG Specify the TCP "Urgent Pointer field significant" (URG) value for this ACE.
0: TCP frames where the URG field is set must not be able to match this
entry.
1: TCP frames where the URG field is set must be able to match this entry.
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care”).
Ethernet type parameters
Ethernet Type parameters can be configured when Ethernet Type is selected as the
Frame Type.
Object Description
EtherType Filter Specify the Ethernet type filter for this ACE.
Any: No EtherType filter is specified (EtherType filter status is "don't-care”).
Specific: If you want to filter a specific EtherType filter with this ACE, you
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 209
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Object Description
can enter a specific EtherType value. A field for entering a EtherType value
appears.
Ethernet Type Value When Specific is selected for the EtherType filter, you can enter a specific
EtherType value.
The allowed range is 0x600 to 0xFFFF but excluding 0x800(IPv4),
0x806(ARP) and 0x86DD(IPv6). A frame that hits this ACE matches this
EtherType value.
Buttons
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
• Click Cancel to return to the previous page.
ACL ports configuration
Configure the ACL parameters (ACE) of each switch port on the ACL Ports
Configuration page. These parameters will affect frames received on a port unless the
frame matches a specific ACE.
210 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row.
Policy ID Select the policy to apply to this port. The allowed values are 0 through 255.
The default value is 0.
Action Select whether forwarding is permitted (Permit) or denied (Deny).
The default value is Permit.
Rate Limiter ID Select which rate limiter to apply on this port. Selections include Disabled
(default value) or the values 1 through 16.
Port Redirect Select which port frames are redirected on. Selections include Disabled
(default value)or a specific port number and it can't be set when action is
permitted.
Logging Specify the logging operation of this port. Selections include:
Enabled: Frames received on the port are stored in the System Log.
Disabled: Frames received on the port are not logged.
The default value is Disabled.
Note: The System Log memory size and logging rate are limited.
Shutdown Specify the port shut down operation of this port. Selections include:
Enabled: If a frame is received on the port, the port will be disabled.
Disabled: Port shut down is disabled.
The default value is Disabled.
State Specify the port state of this port. Selections include:
Enabled: To reopen ports by changing the volatile port configuration of the
ACL user module.
Disabled: To close ports by changing the volatile port configuration of the
ACL user module.
The default value is Enabled.
Counter Counts the number of frames that match this ACE.
Buttons
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
• Click Refresh to refresh the page. Any changes made locally are undone.
• Click Clear to clear the counters.
ACL rate limiter configuration
Configure the rate limiter for the ACL of the managed switch on the ACL Rate Limiter
Configuration page.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 211
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Rate Limiter ID The rate limiter ID for the settings contained in the same row.
Rate (pps) The allowed values are: 0-3276700 in pps or 0, 100, 200, 300, ..., 1000000
in kbps.
Buttons
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
Authentication
This section describes user access and management control for the managed switch,
including user access and management control. The following main topics are covered:
• IEEE 802.1X port-based network access control
• MAC-based authentication
212 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
• User authentication
Overview of 802.1X (port-based) authentication
In 802.1X, the user is called the supplicant, the switch is the authenticator, and the
RADIUS server is the authentication server. The switch acts as the man-in-the-middle,
forwarding requests and responses between the supplicant and the authentication
server. Frames sent between the supplicant and the switch are special 802.1X EAPOL
(EAP Over LANs) frames. EAPOL frames encapsulate EAP PDUs (RFC3748). Frames
sent between the switch and the RADIUS server are RADIUS packets. RADIUS
packets also encapsulate EAP PDUs together with other attributes like the switch's IP
address, name, and the supplicant's port number on the switch. EAP is very flexible in
that it allows for different authentication methods like MD5-Challenge, PEAP, and TLS.
The authenticator (switch) doesn't need to know which authentication method the
supplicant and the authentication server are using, or how many information exchange
frames are needed for a particular method. The switch simply encapsulates the EAP
part of the frame into the relevant type (EAPOL or RADIUS) and forwards it.
When authentication is complete, the RADIUS server sends a special packet containing
a success or failure indication. Besides forwarding this decision to the supplicant, the
switch uses it to open up or block traffic on the switch port connected to the supplicant.
Overview of MAC-based authentication
Unlike 802.1X, MAC-based authentication is not a standard, but merely a best-
practices method adopted by the industry. In MAC-based authentication, users are
called clients, and the switch acts as the supplicant on behalf of clients. The initial
frame (any kind of frame) sent by a client is snooped by the switch, which in turn uses
the client's MAC address as both username and password in the subsequent EAP
exchange with the RADIUS server. The 6-byte MAC address is converted to a string on
the following form "xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx", that is, a dash (-) is used as separator between
the lower-cased hexadecimal digits. The switch only supports the MD5-Challenge
authentication method, so the RADIUS server must be configured accordingly.
When authentication is complete, the RADIUS server sends a success or failure
indication, which in turn causes the switch to open up or block traffic for that particular
client using static entries into the MAC table. Only then will frames from the client be
forwarded on the switch. There are no EAPOL frames involved in this authentication,
therefore MAC-based authentication has nothing to do with the 802.1X standard.
The advantage of MAC-based authentication over 802.1X is that several clients can be
connected to the same port (e.g., through a third party switch or a hub) and still require
individual authentication, and the clients don't need special supplicant software to
authenticate. The disadvantage is that MAC addresses can be spoofed by malicious
users, equipment whose MAC address is a valid RADIUS user that can be used by
anyone, and only the MD5-Challenge method is supported.
The 802.1X and MAC-based authentication configuration consists of two sections, a
system- and a port-wide.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 213
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Overview of user authentication
The managed switch may be configured to authenticate users logging into the system
for management access using local or remote authentication methods, such as telnet
and web browser. The managed switch provides secure network management access
using the following options:
• Remote Authentication Dial-in User Service (RADIUS)
• Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus (TACACS+)
• Local user name and privilege level control
RADIUS and TACACS+ are logon authentication protocols that use software running
on a central server to control access to RADIUS-aware or TACACS-aware devices on
the network. An authentication server contains a database of multiple user name /
password pairs with associated privilege levels for each user that requires management
access to the managed switch.
Understanding IEEE 802.1X port-based authentication
The IEEE 802.1X standard defines a client-server-based access control and
authentication protocol that restricts unauthorized clients from connecting to a LAN
through publicly accessible ports. The authentication server authenticates each client
connected to a switch port before making any services offered by the switch or the LAN
available.
Until the client is authenticated, 802.1X access control allows only Extensible
Authentication Protocol over LAN (EAPOL) traffic through the port to which the client is
connected. After authentication is successful, normal traffic can pass through the port.
Device roles
With 802.1X port-based authentication, the devices in the network have specific roles
as shown below.
214 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
• Client – The device (workstation) that requests access to the LAN and switch
services and responds to requests from the switch. The workstation must be running
802.1X-compliant client software such as that offered in the Microsoft operating
systems (the client is the supplicant in the IEEE 802.1X specification).
• Authentication server – Performs the actual authentication of the client. The
authentication server validates the identity of the client and notifies the switch if the
client is authorized to access the LAN and switch services. Because the switch acts
as the proxy, the authentication service is transparent to the client. In this release,
the Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) security system with
Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) extensions is the only supported
authentication server, which is available in the Cisco Secure Access Control Server
version 3.0. RADIUS operates in a client/server model in which secure
authentication information is exchanged between the RADIUS server and one or
more RADIUS clients.
• Switch (802.1X device) – Controls the physical access to the network based on the
authentication status of the client. The switch acts as an intermediary (proxy)
between the client and the authentication server, requesting identity information
from the client, verifying that information with the authentication server, and relaying
a response to the client. The switch includes the RADIUS client, which is
responsible for encapsulating and decapsulating the Extensible Authentication
Protocol (EAP) frames and interacting with the authentication server. When the
switch receives EAPOL frames and relays them to the authentication server, the
Ethernet header is stripped and the remaining EAP frame is re-encapsulated in the
RADIUS format. The EAP frames are not modified or examined during
encapsulation, and the authentication server must support EAP within the native
frame format. When the switch receives frames from the authentication server, the
server's frame header is removed, leaving the EAP frame which is then
encapsulated for Ethernet and sent to the client.
Authentication initiation and message exchange
The switch or the client can initiate authentication. If you enable authentication on a
port by using the dot1x port-control auto interface configuration command, the switch
must initiate authentication when it determines that the port link state transitions from
down to up. It then sends an EAP-request/identity frame to the client to request its
identity (typically, the switch sends an initial identity/request frame followed by one or
more requests for authentication information). Upon receipt of the frame, the client
responds with an EAP-response/identity frame.
However, if the client does not receive an EAP-request/identity frame from the switch
during bootup, the client can initiate authentication by sending an EAPOL-start frame
which prompts the switch to request the client's identity.
Note: If 802.1X is not enabled or supported on the network access device, any EAPOL
frames from the client are dropped. If the client does not receive an EAP-
request/identity frame after three attempts to start authentication, the client transmits
frames as if the port is in the authorized state. A port in the authorized state effectively
means that the client has been successfully authenticated.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 215
Chapter 4: Web configuration
When the client supplies its identity, the switch begins its role as the intermediary,
passing EAP frames between the client and the authentication server until
authentication succeeds or fails. If the authentication succeeds, the switch port
becomes authorized.
The specific exchange of EAP frames depends on the authentication method being
used. The diagram below shows a message exchange initiated by the client using the
One-Time-Password (OTP) authentication method with a RADIUS server.
Ports in authorized and unauthorized states
The switch port state determines if the client is granted access to the network. The port
starts in the unauthorized state. While in this state, the port disallows all ingress and
egress traffic except for 802.1X protocol packets. When a client is successfully
authenticated, the port transitions to the authorized state, allowing all traffic for the
client to flow normally.
If a client that does not support 802.1X is connected to an unauthorized 802.1X port,
the switch requests the client's identity. In this situation, the client does not respond to
the request, the port remains in the unauthorized state, and the client is not granted
access to the network.
In contrast, when an 802.1X-enabled client connects to a port that is not running the
802.1X protocol, the client initiates the authentication process by sending the EAPOL-
start frame. When no response is received, the client sends the request for a fixed
number of times. Because no response is received, the client begins sending frames as
if the port is in the authorized state
If the client is successfully authenticated (receives an accept frame from the
authentication server), the port state changes to authorized, and all frames from the
authenticated client are allowed through the port. If the authentication fails, the port
remains in the unauthorized state, but authentication can be retried. If the
authentication server cannot be reached, the switch can retransmit the request. If no
216 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
response is received from the server after the specified number of attempts,
authentication fails and network access is not granted.
When a client logs off, it sends an EAPOL-logoff message that causes the switch port
to transition to the unauthorized state.
If the link state of a port transitions from up to down, or if an EAPOL-logoff frame is
received, the port returns to the unauthorized state.
Authentication configuration
The Authentication Method Configuration page allows you to configure how a user is
authenticated when logging into the switch via one of the management client interfaces.
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Client The management client for which the configuration below applies.
Authentication
Method Authentication method can be set to one of the following values:
None: Authentication is disabled and login is not possible.
Local: Use the local user database on the switch for authentication.
RADIUS: Use a remote RADIUS server for authentication.
TACACS+: Use a remote TACACS+ server for authentication.
Methods that involve remote servers are timed out if the remote servers are
offline. In this case, the next method is tried. Each method is tried from left to
right and continues until a method either approves or rejects a user. If a
remote server is used for primary authentication, we recommend configuring
secondary authentication as local. This permits the management client to
log in via the local user database if none of the configured authentication
servers are valid.
Buttons
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 217
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Network access server configuration
Configure the IEEE 802.1X and MAC-based authentication system and port settings on
the Network Access Server Configuration page. The IEEE 802.1X standard defines a
port-based access control procedure that prevents unauthorized access to a network
by requiring users to first submit credentials for authentication. One or more central
servers, or the back end servers, determine if the user is allowed access to the
network. These back end (RADIUS) servers are configured on the "Configuration >
Security > AAA" page. The IEEE802.1X standard defines port-based operation, but
non-standard variants overcome security limitations.
MAC-based authentication permits authentication of more than one user on the same
port, and doesn't require the user to have special 802.1X supplicant software installed
on the system. The switch uses the MAC address to authenticate against the back end
server. Intruders can create counterfeit MAC addresses, which makes MAC-based
authentication less secure than 802.1X authentication. The NAS configuration consists
of two sections, a system- and a port-wide.
218 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
System configuration
Object Description
Mode Indicates if NAS is globally enabled or disabled on the switch. If globally
disabled, all ports are allowed forwarding of frames.
Reauthentication
Enabled If selected, successfully authenticated supplicants/clients are
reauthenticated after the interval specified by the reauthentication period.
Reauthentication for 802.1X-enabled ports can be used to detect if a new
device is plugged into a switch port or if a supplicant is no longer attached.
For MAC-based ports, reauthentication is only useful if the RADIUS server
configuration has changed. It does not involve communication between the
switch and the client, and therefore doesn't imply that a client is still present
on a port.
Reauthentication
Period Determines the period, in seconds, after which a connected client must be
reauthenticated. This is only active if the Reauthentication Enabled check
box is selected. Valid values are in the range 1 to 3600 seconds.
EAPOL Timeout Determines the time for retransmission of Request Identity EAPOL frames.
Valid values are in the range 1 to 65535 seconds. This has no effect on
MAC-based ports.
Aging Period This setting applies to the following modes (modes using port security
functionality to secure MAC addresses):
Single 802.1X
Multi 802.1X
MAC-Based Auth.
When the NAS module uses the port security module to secure MAC
addresses, the port security module needs to check for activity on the MAC
address in question at regular intervals and free resources if no activity is
seen within a given period of time. This parameter controls exactly this
period and can be set to a number between 10 and 1000000 seconds.
If reauthentication is enabled and the port is in a 802.1X-based mode, this is
not so criticial, since supplicants that are no longer attached to the port are
removed upon the next reauthentication, which will fail. But if
reauthentication is not enabled, the only way to free resources is by aging
the entries.
For ports in MAC-based Auth. mode, reauthentication doesn't cause direct
communication between the switch and the client, so this will not detect if the
client is still attached, and the only way to free any resources is to age the
entry.
Hold Time This setting applies to the following modes (i.e., modes using the Port
Security functionality to secure MAC addresses):
Single 802.1X
Multi 802.1X
MAC-Based Auth.
If a client is denied access, either because the RADIUS server denies the
client access or because the RADIUS server request times out (according to
the timeout specified on the "Configuration > Security > AAA" Page), the
client is put on hold in the Unauthorized state. The hold timer does not count
during an on-going authentication.
In MAC-based Auth. mode, the The switch will ignore new frames coming
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 219
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Object Description
from the client during the hold time.
The Hold Time can be set to a number between 10 and 1000000 seconds.
RADIUS-Assigned
QoS Enabled RADIUS-assigned QoS provides a means to centrally control the traffic class
to which traffic coming from a successfully authenticated supplicant is
assigned on the switch. The RADIUS server must be configured to transmit
special RADIUS attributes to take advantage of this feature.
The RADIUS-Assigned QoS Enabled check box provides a quick way to
globally enable/disable RADIUS-server assigned QoS Class functionality.
When selected, the individual ports' ditto setting determines whether
RADIUS-assigned QoS Class is enabled for that port. When deselected,
RADIUS-server assigned QoS Class is disabled for all ports.
RADIUS-Assigned
VLAN Enabled RADIUS-assigned VLAN provides a means to centrally control the VLAN on
which a successfully authenticated supplicant is placed on the switch.
Incoming traffic will be classified to and switched on the RADIUS-assigned
VLAN. The RADIUS server must be configured to transmit special RADIUS
attributes to take advantage of this feature.
The RADIUS-Assigned VLAN Enabled check box provides a quick way to
globally enable/disable RADIUS-server assigned VLAN functionality. When
selected, the individual ports' ditto setting determines whether RADIUS-
assigned VLAN is enabled for that port. When deselected, RADIUS-server
assigned VLAN is disabled for all ports.
Guest VLAN Enabled A Guest VLAN is a special VLAN, typically with limited network access, on
which 802.1X-unaware clients are placed after a network administrator-
defined timeout. The switch follows a set of rules for entering and leaving the
Guest VLAN as listed below.
The Guest VLAN Enabled check box provides a quick way to globally
enable/disable Guest VLAN functionality. When selected, the individual
ports' ditto setting determines whether the port can be moved into Guest
VLAN. When deselected, the ability to move to the Guest VLAN is disabled
for all ports.
Guest VLAN ID This is the value that a port's Port VLAN ID is set to if a port is moved into
the Guest VLAN. It is only changeable if the Guest VLAN option is globally
enabled.
Valid values are in the range 1 to 4095.
Max. Reauth. Count The number of times that the switch transmits an EAPOL Request Identity
frame without response before considering entering the Guest VLAN is
adjusted with this setting. The value can only be changed if the Guest VLAN
option is globally enabled.
Valid values are in the range 1 to 255.
Allow Guest VLAN if
EAPOL Seen The switch remembers if an EAPOL frame has been received on the port for
the lifetime of the port. Once the switch considers whether to enter the Guest
VLAN, it will first check if this option is enabled or disabled. If disabled
(default setting), the switch will only enter the Guest VLAN if an EAPOL
frame has not been received on the port for the lifetime of the port. If
enabled (selected), the switch considers entering the Guest VLAN even if an
EAPOL frame has been received on the port for the life-time of the port.
The value can only be changed if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled.
220 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Port configuration
The table has one row for each port on the selected switch and a number of columns,
which are:
Object Description
Port The port number for which the configuration below applies.
Admin State If NAS is globally enabled, this selection controls the port's authentication
mode. The following modes are available:
Force Authorized
In this mode, the switch sends one EAPOL success frame when the port link
comes up, and any client on the port will be permitted network access
without authentication.
Force Unauthorized
In this mode, the switch sends one EAPOL failure frame when the port link
comes up, and any client on the port will be disallowed network access.
Port-based 802.1X
In the 802.1X, the user is called the supplicant, the switch is the
authenticator, and the RADIUS server is the authentication server. The
authenticator acts as the man-in-the-middle, forwarding requests and
responses between the supplicant and the authentication server. Frames
sent between the supplicant and the switch are special 802.1X frames,
known as EAPOL (EAP Over LANs) frames. EAPOL frames encapsulate
EAP PDUs (RFC3748). Frames sent between the switch and the RADIUS
server are RADIUS packets. RADIUS packets also encapsulate EAP PDUs
together with other attributes like the switch's IP address, name, and the
supplicant's port number on the switch. EAP is very flexible in that it allows
for different authentication methods like MD5-Challenge, PEAP, and TLS.
The authenticator (switch) doesn't need to know which authentication
method the supplicant and the authentication server are using, or how many
information exchange frames are needed for a particular method. The switch
simply encapsulates the EAP part of the frame into the relevant type
(EAPOL or RADIUS) and forwards it.
When authentication is complete, the RADIUS server sends a special packet
containing a success or failure indication. Besides forwarding this decision to
the supplicant, the switch uses it to open up or block traffic on the switch port
connected to the supplicant.
Note: Suppose two back end servers are enabled and that the server
timeout is configured to X seconds (using the AAA configuration page), and
suppose that the first server in the list is currently down (but not considered
dead). In this case, if the supplicant retransmits EAPOL Start frames at a
rate faster than X seconds, then it will never get authenticated, because the
switch will cancel on-going back end authentication server requests
whenever it receives a new EAPOL Start frame from the supplicant. And
since the server hasn't yet failed (because the X seconds haven't expired),
the same server will be contacted upon the next back end authentication
server request from the switch. This scenario will loop forever. Therefore, the
server timeout should be smaller than the supplicant's EAPOL Start frame
retransmission rate.
Single 802.1X
In port-based 802.1X authentication, the whole port is opened for network
traffic after a supplicant is successfully authenticated on a port. This allows
other clients connected to the port (through a hub, for example) to piggy-
back on the successfully authenticated client and get network access even
though they really aren't authenticated. To overcome this security breach,
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 221
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Object Description
use the Single 802.1X variant.
Single 802.1X is really not an IEEE standard, but features many of the same
characteristics as does port-based 802.1X. In Single 802.1X, at most one
supplicant can get authenticated on the port at a time. Normal EAPOL
frames are used in the communication between the supplicant and the
switch. If more than one supplicant is connected to a port, the one that
comes first when the port's link comes up will be the first one considered. If
that supplicant doesn't provide valid credentials within a certain amount of
time, another supplicant will get a chance. After a supplicant is successfully
authenticated, only that supplicant will be allowed access. This is the most
secure of all the supported modes. In this mode, the Port Security module is
used to secure a supplicant's MAC address after successful authentication.
Multi 802.1X
Multi 802.1X is, like Single 802.1X, not an IEEE standard but a variant that
features many of the same characteristics. In Multi 802.1X, one or more
supplicants can get authenticated on the same port at the same time. Each
supplicant is authenticated individually and secured in the MAC table using
the port security module.
In Multi 802.1X, it is not possible to use the multicast BPDU MAC address as
destination MAC address for EAPOL frames sent from the switch towards
the supplicant, since that would cause all supplicants attached to the port to
reply to requests sent from the switch. Instead, the switch uses the
supplicant's MAC address, which is obtained from the first EAPOL Start or
EAPOL Response Identity frame sent by the supplicant. An exception to this
is when no supplicants are attached. In this case, the switch sends EAPOL
request identity frames using the BPDU multicast MAC address as
destination to wake up any supplicants that might be on the port.
The maximum number of supplicants that can be attached to a port can be
limited using the port security limit control functionality.
MAC-based authentication
Unlike port-based 802.1X, MAC-based authentication is not a standard, but
merely a best practices method adopted by the industry. In MAC-based
authentication, users are called clients, and the switch acts as the supplicant
on behalf of clients. The initial frame (any kind of frame) sent by a client is
snooped by the switch, which in turn uses the client's MAC address as both
username and password in the subsequent EAP exchange with the RADIUS
server. The 6-byte MAC address is converted to a string in the format "xx-xx-
xx-xx-xx-xx", that is, a dash (-) is used as separator between the lower-
cased hexadecimal digits. The switch only supports the MD5-Challenge
authentication method, so the RADIUS server must be configured
accordingly.
When authentication is complete, the RADIUS server sends a success or
failure indication, which in turn causes the switch to open up or block traffic
for that particular client, using the port security module. Only then will frames
from the client be forwarded on the switch. There are no EAPOL frames
involved in this authentication, therefore MAC-based authentication has
nothing to do with the 802.1X standard.
The advantage of MAC-based authentication over port-based 802.1X is that
several clients can be connected to the same port (e.g., through a third party
switch or a hub) and still require individual authentication, and that the
clients don't need special supplicant software to authenticate. The
advantage of MAC-based authentication over 802.1X-based authentication
is that the clients don't need special supplicant software to authenticate. The
disadvantage is that MAC addresses can be spoofed by malicious users -
equipment whose MAC address is a valid RADIUS user can be used by
222 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Object Description
anyone. Also, only the MD5-Challenge method is supported. The maximum
number of clients that can be attached to a port can be limited using the port
security limit control functionality.
RADIUS-Assigned
QoS Enabled When RADIUS-Assigned QoS is both globally enabled and enabled
(selected) for a given port, the switch reacts to QoS Class information
carried in the RADIUS access-accept packet transmitted by the RADIUS
server when a supplicant is successfully authenticated. If present and valid,
traffic received on the supplicant's port will be classified to the given QoS
Class. If (re-)authentication fails or the RADIUS access-accept packet no
longer carries a QoS Class, it is invalid, or the supplicant is otherwise no
longer present on the port, the port's QoS Class immediately reverts to the
original QoS Class (which may be changed by the administrator in the
meantime without affecting the RADIUS-assigned).
This option is only available for single-client modes (i.e., Port-based 802.1X
and Single 802.1X).
RADIUS attributes used in identifying a QoS Class:
The User-Priority-Table attribute defined in RFC4675 forms the basis for
identifying the QoS Class in an access-accept packet.
Only the first occurrence of the attribute in the packet will be considered and,
to be valid, it must follow this rule:
All eight octets in the attribute's value must be identical and consist of ASCII
characters in the range '0' - '7', which translates into the required QoS Class
in the range [0; 7].
RADIUS-Assigned
VLAN Enabled When RADIUS-Assigned VLAN is both globally enabled and enabled
(selected) for a given port, the switch reacts to VLAN ID information carried
in the RADIUS Access-Accept packet transmitted by the RADIUS server
when a supplicant is successfully authenticated. If present and valid, the
port's Port VLAN ID will be changed to this VLAN ID, the port will be set to
be a member of that VLAN ID, and the port will be forced into VLAN unaware
mode. Once assigned, all traffic arriving on the port will be classified and
switched on the RADIUS-assigned VLAN ID.
If (re-)authentication fails or the RADIUS Access-Accept packet no longer
carries a VLAN ID or it's invalid, or the supplicant is otherwise no longer
present on the port, the port's VLAN ID immediately reverts to the original
VLAN ID (which may be changed by the administrator in the meanwhile
without affecting the RADIUS-assigned).
This option is only available for single-client modes (i.e., Port-based 802.1X
and Single 802.1X).
For troubleshooting VLAN assignments, use the "Monitor > VLANs > VLAN
Membership and VLAN Port" pages. These pages show which modules
have (temporarily) overridden the current Port VLAN configuration.
RADIUS attributes used in identifying a VLAN ID:
RFC2868 and RFC3580 form the basis for the attributes used in identifying a
VLAN ID in an Access-Accept packet. The following criteria are used:
The Tunnel-Medium-Type, Tunnel-Type, and Tunnel-Private-Group-ID
attributes must all be present at least once in the Access-Accept packet.
The switch looks for the first set of these attributes that have the same Tag
value and fulfill the following requirements (if Tag == 0 is used, the Tunnel-
Private-Group-ID does not need to include a Tag):
Value of Tunnel-Medium-Type must be set to "IEEE-802" (ordinal 6).
Value of Tunnel-Type must be set to "VLAN" (ordinal 13).
Value of Tunnel-Private-Group-ID must be a string of ASCII chars in the
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 223
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Object Description
range '0' - '9', which is interpreted as a decimal string representing the VLAN
ID. Leading '0's are discarded. The final value must be in the range [1;
4095].
Guest VLAN Enabled When Guest VLAN is both globally enabled and enabled (selected) for a
given port, the switch considers moving the port into the Guest VLAN
according to the rules outlined below.
This option is only available for EAPOL-based modes (i.e., Port-based
802.1X, Single 802.1X, and Multi 802.1X)
For troubleshooting VLAN assignments, use the "Monitor > VLANs > VLAN
Membership and VLAN Port" pages. These pages show which modules
have (temporarily) overridden the current Port VLAN configuration.
Guest VLAN Operation:
When a Guest VLAN enabled port link comes up, the switch starts
transmitting EAPOL Request Identity frames. If the number of transmissions
of such frames exceeds Max. Reauth. Count and no EAPOL frames have
been received in the meantime, the switch considers entering the Guest
VLAN. The interval between transmission of EAPOL Request Identity frames
is configured with EAPOL Timeout. If Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen is
enabled, the port is placed in the Guest VLAN. If disabled, the switch will first
check its history to see if an EAPOL frame has previously been received on
the port (this history is cleared if the port link goes down or the port's Admin
State is changed), and if not, the port is placed in the Guest VLAN.
Otherwise, it will not move to the Guest VLAN but continue transmitting
EAPOL Request Identity frames at the rate given by EAPOL Timeout.
Once in the Guest VLAN, the port is considered authenticated, and all
attached clients on the port are allowed access on this VLAN. The switch will
not transmit an EAPOL Success frame when entering the Guest VLAN.
While in the Guest VLAN, the switch monitors the link for EAPOL frames,
and if one such frame is received, the switch immediately takes the port out
of the Guest VLAN and starts authenticating the supplicant according to the
port mode. If an EAPOL frame is received, the port will never be able to go
back into the Guest VLAN if the Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen check
box is deselected.
Port State The current state of the port. It can undertake one of the following values:
Globally Disabled: NAS is globally disabled.
Link Down: NAS is globally enabled, but there is no link on the port.
Authorized: The port is in force authorized or a single-supplicant mode and
the supplicant is authorized.
Unauthorized: The port is in force unauthorized or a single-supplicant mode
and the supplicant is not successfully authorized by the RADIUS server.
X Auth/Y Unauth: The port is in a multi-supplicant mode. Currently X clients
are authorized and Y are unauthorized.
Restart Two buttons are available for each row. The buttons are only enabled when
authentication is globally enabled and the port's Admin State is in an
EAPOL-based or MAC-based mode.
Clicking these buttons will not cause settings changed on the page to take
effect.
Reauthenticate: Schedules a reauthentication to whenever the quiet-period
of the port runs out (EAPOL-based authentication). For MAC-based
authentication, reauthentication is attempted immediately.
The button only has an effect for successfully authenticated clients on the
port and will not cause the clients to get temporarily unauthorized.
224 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Object Description
Reinitialize: Forces a reinitialization of the clients on the port and thereby a
reauthentication immediately. The clients transfer to the unauthorized state
while the reauthentication is in progress.
Buttons
• Click Refresh to refresh the page.
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
Network access overview
The Network Access Overview page provides an overview of the current NAS port
states for the selected switch.
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Port The switch port number. Click to navigate to detailed NAS statistics.
Admin State The port's current administrative state. Refer to NAS Admin State for a
description of possible values.
Port State The current state of the port. Refer to NAS Port State for a description of the
individual states.
Last Source The source MAC address carried in the most recently received EAPOL
frame for EAPOL-based authentication, and the most recently received
frame from a new client for MAC-based authentication.
Last ID The user name (supplicant identity) carried in the most recently received
Response Identity EAPOL frame for EAPOL-based authentication, and the
source MAC address from the most recently received frame from a new
client for MAC-based authentication.
QoS Class QoS Class assigned to the port by the RADIUS server if enabled.
Port VLAN ID The VLAN ID that NAS has put the port in. The field is blank, if the Port
VLAN ID is not overridden by NAS.
If the VLAN ID is assigned by the RADIUS server, "(RADIUS-assigned)" is
appended to the VLAN ID. Read more about RADIUS-assigned VLANs here.
If the port is moved to the Guest VLAN, "(Guest)" is appended to the VLAN
ID. Read more about Guest VLANs here.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 225
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Buttons
• Click Refresh to refresh the page immediately.
• Click Auto-refresh to to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs
every three seconds.
Network access statistics
The Network Access Statistics page provides detailed NAS statistics for a specific
switch port running EAPOL-based IEEE 802.1X authentication. For MAC-based ports, it
only shows selected back end server (RADIUS Authentication Server) statistics. Use
the port drop-down menu to select the port details to be displayed.
The page includes the following fields:
Port state
Object Description
Admin State The port's current administrative state. Refer to NAS Admin State for a
description of possible values.
Port State The current state of the port. Refer to NAS Port State for a description of the
individual states.
QoS Class The QoS class assigned by the RADIUS server. The field is blank if no QoS
class is assigned.
Port VLAN ID The VLAN ID that NAS has put the port in. The field is blank if the Port VLAN
ID is not overridden by NAS.
If the VLAN ID is assigned by the RADIUS server, "(RADIUS-assigned)" is
appended to the VLAN ID.
If the port is moved to the Guest VLAN, "(Guest)" is appended to the VLAN
ID.
226 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Port counters
Object Description
EAPOL Counters These supplicant frame counters are available for the following administrative
states:
Force Authorized
Force Unauthorized
Port-based 802.1X
Single 802.1X
Multi 802.1X
Direction Name IEEE Name Description
Rx Total dot1xAuthEapolFrame
sRx The number of valid
EAPOL frames of any
type that have been
received by the switch.
Rx Response ID dot1xAuthEapolRespI
dFramesRx The number of valid
EAPOL Response Identity
frames that have been
received by the switch.
Rx Responses dot1xAuthEapolRespF
ramesRx The number of valid
EAPOL response frames
(other than Response
Identity frames) that have
been received by the
switch.
Rx Start dot1xAuthEapolStartFr
amesRx The number of EAPOL
Start frames that have
been received by the
switch.
Rx Logoff dot1xAuthEapolLogoff
FramesRx The number of valid
EAPOL Logoff frames that
have been received by the
switch.
Rx Invalid Type dot1xAuthInvalidEapol
FramesRx The number of EAPOL
frames that have been
received by the switch in
which the frame type is
not recognized.
Rx Invalid Length dot1xAuthEapLengthE
rrorFramesRx The number of EAPOL
frames that have been
received by the switch in
which the Packet Body
Length field is invalid.
Tx Total dot1xAuthEapolFrame
sTx The number of EAPOL
frames of any type that
have been transmitted by
the switch.
Tx Request ID dot1xAuthEapolReqId
FramesTx The number of EAPOL
Request Identity frames
that have been
transmitted by the switch.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 227
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Tx Requests dot1xAuthEapolReqFr
amesTx The number of valid
EAPOL Request frames
(other than Request
Identity frames) that have
been transmitted by the
switch.
Back end Server
Counters These back end (RADIUS) frame counters are available for the following
administrative states:
Port-based 802.1X
Single 802.1X
Multi 802.1X
MAC-based Auth.
Direction Name IEEE Name Description
Rx Access
Challenge
s
dot1xAuthBack
endAccessChallenges 802.1X-based:
Counts the number of
times that the switch
receives the first request
from the back end server
following the first response
from the supplicant.
Indicates that the back end
server has communication
with the switch.
MAC-based:
Counts all Access
Challenges received from
the back end server for this
port (left-most table) or
client (right-most table).
Rx Other
Requests
dot1xAuthBack
endOtherRequestsTo
Supplicant
802.1X-based:
Counts the number of
times that the switch sends
an EAP Request packet
following the first to the
supplicant. Indicates that
the back end server chose
an EAP-method.
MAC-based:
Not applicable.
Rx Auth.
Successe
s
dot1xAuthBack
endAuthSuccesses 802.1X- and MAC-based:
Counts the number of
times that the switch
receives a success
indication. Indicates that
the supplicant/client has
successfully authenticated
to the back end server.
Rx Auth.
Failures
dot1xAuthBack
endAuthFails 802.1X- and MAC-based:
Counts the number of
times that the switch
receives a failure message.
This indicates that the
supplicant/client has not
228 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
authenticated to the back
end server.
Tx Response
s dot1xAuthBack
endResponses 802.1X-based:
Counts the number of
times that the switch
attempts to send a
supplicant's first response
packet to the back end
server. Indicates the switch
attempted communication
with the back end server.
Possible retransmissions
are not counted.
MAC-based:
Counts all the back end
server packets sent from
the switch towards the
back end server for a given
port (left-most table) or
client (right-most table).
Possible retransmissions
are not counted.
Last
Supplicant/Client
Info
Information about the last supplicant/client that attempted to authenticate. This
information is available for the following administrative states:
Port-based 802.1X
Single 802.1X
Multi 802.1X
MAC-based Auth.
Name IEEE Name Description
MAC Address dot1xAuthLastEapo
lFrameSource The MAC address of the last
supplicant/client.
VLAN ID - The VLAN ID on which the last frame from
the last supplicant/client was received.
Version dot1xAuthLastEapo
lFrameVersion 802.1X-based:
The protocol version number carried in the
most recently received EAPOL frame.
MAC-based:
Not applicable.
Identity - 802.1X-based:
The user name (supplicant identity) carried
in the most recently received Response
Identity EAPOL frame.
MAC-based:
Not applicable.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 229
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Selected counters
Object Description
Selected Counters The Selected Counters table is visible when the port is one of the following
administrative states:
Multi 802.1X
MAC-based Auth.
The table is identical to and is placed next to the Port Counters table, and
will be empty if no MAC address is currently selected. To populate the table,
select one of the attached MAC Addresses from the table below.
Attached MAC address
Object Description
Identity Shows the identity of the supplicant, as received in the Response Identity
EAPOL frame.
Clicking the link causes the supplicant's EAPOL and back end server
counters to be shown in the Selected Counters table. If no supplicants are
attached, it shows No supplicants attached.
This column is not available for MAC-based Auth.
MAC Address For Multi 802.1X, this column holds the MAC address of the attached
supplicant.
For MAC-based Auth., this column holds the MAC address of the attached
client.
Clicking the link causes the client's back end server counters to be shown in
the Selected Counters table. If no clients are attached, it shows no clients
attached.
VLAN ID This column holds the VLAN ID that the corresponding client is currently
secured through the Port Security module.
State The client can either be authenticated or unauthenticated. In the
authenticated state, it is allowed to forward frames on the port, and in the
unauthenticated state, it is blocked. As long as the back end server hasn't
successfully authenticated the client, it is unauthenticated. If an
authentication fails for one or the other reason, the client will remain in the
unauthenticated state for Hold Time seconds.
Last Authentication Shows the date and time of the last authentication of the client (successful
as well as unsuccessful).
Buttons
• Select the Auto-refresh check box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic
refresh occurs every three seconds.
• Click Refresh to refresh the page immediately.
• Click Clear to clear the counters for the selected port. This button is available in the
following modes:
• Force Authorized
• Force Unauthorized
• Port-based 802.1X
230 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
• Single 802.1X
• Click Clear All to clear both the port counters and all of the attached client's
counters. Performing this action will not clear "Last Client." This button is available
in the following modes:
• Multi 802.1X
• MAC-based Auth.X
• Click Clear This to clear only the currently selected client's counter. This button is
available in the following modes:
• Multi 802.1X
• MAC-based Auth.X
RADIUS
Configure the RADIUS servers on the RADIUS Server Configuration page.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 231
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Global configuration
These settings are common for all of the RADIUS Servers.
Object Description
Timeout Timeout is the number of seconds, in the range 1 to 1000, to wait for a reply
from a RADIUS server before retransmitting the request.
Retransmit Retransmit is the number of times, in the range 1 to 1000, a RADIUS request
is retransmitted to a server that is not responding. If the server has not
responded after the last retransmit it is considered to be dead.
Dead Time The Dead Time, which can be set to a number between 0 and 3600
seconds, is the period during which the switch will not send new requests to
a server that has failed to respond to a previous request. This will stop the
switch from continually trying to contact a server that it has already
determined as dead.
Setting the Dead Time to a value greater than 0 (zero) will enable this
feature, but only if more than one server has been configured.
Key The secret key – up to 63 characters long – shared between the RADIUS
server and the switch.
NAS-IP-Address The IPv4 address to be used as attribute 4 in RADIUS Access-Request
packets. If this field is left blank, the IP address of the outgoing interface is
used.
NAS-IPv6-Address The IPv6 address to be used as attribute 95 in RADIUS Access-Request
packets. If this field is left blank, the IP address of the outgoing interface is
used.
NAS-Identifier The identifier – up to 253 characters long – to be used as attribute 32 in
RADIUS Access-Request packets. If this field is left blank, the NAS-Identifier
is not included in the packet.
Server configuration
The table has one row for each RADIUS Server and a number of columns, which are:
Object Description
Delete To delete a RADIUS server entry, check this box. The entry will be deleted
during the next save.
Hostname The IP address or hostname of the RADIUS server.
Auth Port The UDP port to use on the RADIUS server for authentication.
Acct Port The UDP port to use on the RADIUS server for accounting.
Timeout This optional setting overrides the global timeout value. Leaving it blank will
use the global timeout value.
Retransmit This optional setting overrides the global retransmit value. Leaving it blank
will use the global retransmit value.
Key This optional setting overrides the global key. Leaving it blank will use the
global key.
232 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Buttons
• Click Add New Server to add a new RADIUS server. An empty row is added to the
table, and the RADIUS server can be configured as needed. Up to five servers are
supported.
• Click Delete to undo the addition of the new server.
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
TACACS+
The TACACS+ Server Configuration page permits configuration of the TACACS+
Servers.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 233
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Global configuration
These settings are common for all of the TACACS+ Servers.
Object Description
Timeout Timeout is the number of seconds, in the range 1 to 1000, to wait for a reply
from a TACACS+ server before it is considered to be dead.
Dead Time The Dead Time, which can be set to a number between 0 and 3600
seconds, is the period during which the switch will not send new requests to
a server that has failed to respond to a previous request. This will stop the
switch from continually trying to contact a server that it has already
determined as dead.
Setting the Dead Time to a value greater than 0 (zero) will enable this
feature, but only if more than one server has been configured.
Key The secret key – up to 63 characters long – shared between the RADIUS
server and the switch.
Server configuration
The table has one row for each TACACS+ server and a number of columns, which are:
Object Description
Delete To delete a TACACS+ server entry, select this check box. The entry will be
deleted during the next save.
Hostname The IP address or hostname of the TACACS+ server.
Port The TCP port to use on the TACACS+server for authentication.
Timeout This optional setting overrides the global timeout value. Leaving it blank will
use the global timeout value.
Key This optional setting overrides the global key. Leaving it blank will use the
global key.
Buttons
• Click Add New Server to add a new TACACS+server. An empty row is added to
the table, and the RADIUS server can be configured as needed. Up to five servers
are supported.
• Click Delete to undo the addition of the new server.
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
RADIUS overview
The RADIUS Authentication/Accounting Server Overview page provides an overview of
the status of the RADIUS servers configurable on the authentication configuration
page.
234 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
RADIUS authentication/accounting server status overview
Object Description
# The RADIUS server number. Click to navigate to detailed statistics for this
server.
IP Address The IP address and UDP port number (in <IP Address>:<UDP Port>
notation) of this server.
Status The current state of the server. This field takes one of the following values:
Disabled: The server is disabled.
Not Ready: The server is enabled, but IP communication is not yet up and
running.
Ready: The server is enabled, IP communication is up and running, and the
RADIUS module is ready to accept access or accounting attempts.
Dead (X seconds left): Access or accounting attempts were made to this
server, but it did not reply within the configured timeout. The server has
temporarily been disabled, but will get re-enabled when the dead-time
expires. The number of seconds left before this occurs is displayed in
parentheses. This state is only reachable when more than one server is
enabled.
Buttons
• Click Refresh to refresh the page immediately.
• Click Auto-refresh to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs
every three seconds.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 235
Chapter 4: Web configuration
RADIUS details
The RADIUS Authentication Statistics for Server overview page provides detailed
statistics for a particular RADIUS server.
The page includes the following fields:
RADIUS authentication statistics
The statistics map closely to those specified in RFC4668 - RADIUS Authentication
Client MIB. Use the server select box to switch between the back end servers to show
details for each.
236 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Object Description
Packet Counters RADIUS authentication server packet counter. There are seven receive and four
transmit counters.
Direction Name RFC4668 Name Description
Rx Access
Accepts radiusAuthClientEx
tAccessAccepts The number of RADIUS
Access-Accept packets
(valid or invalid) received
from the server.
Rx Access
Rejects radiusAuthClientEx
tAccessRejects The number of RADIUS
Access-Reject packets
(valid or invalid) received
from the server.
Rx Access
Challenges radiusAuthClientEx
tAccessChallenges The number of RADIUS
Access-Challenge packets
(valid or invalid) received
from the server.
Rx Malformed
Access
Responses
radiusAuthClientEx
tMalformedAccess
Responses
The number of malformed
RADIUS Access-Response
packets received from the
server. Malformed packets
include packets with an
invalid length. Bad
authenticators or Message
Authenticator attributes or
unknown types are not
included as malformed
access responses.
Rx Bad
Authenticator
s
radiusAuthClientEx
tBadAuthenticators The number of RADIUS
Access-Response packets
containing invalid
authenticators or Message
Authenticator attributes
received from the server.
Rx Unknown
Types radiusAuthClientEx
tUnknownTypes The number of RADIUS
packets that were received
from the server on the
authentication port and
dropped for some other
reason.
Rx Packets
Dropped radiusAuthClientEx
tPacketsDropped The number of RADIUS
packets that were received
from the server on the
authentication port and
dropped for some other
reason.
Tx Access
Requests radiusAuthClientEx
tAccessRequests The number of RADIUS
Access-Request packets
sent to the server. This
does not include
retransmissions.
Tx Access
Retransmissi radiusAuthClientEx
tAccessRetransmis The number of RADIUS
Access-Request packets
retransmitted to the
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 237
Chapter 4: Web configuration
ons
sions
RADIUS authentication
server.
Tx Pending
Requests radiusAuthClientEx
tPendingRequests The number of RADIUS
Access-Request packets
destined for the server that
have not yet timed out or
received a response. This
variable is incremented
when an Access-Request
is sent and decremented
due to receipt of an
Access-Accept, Access-
Reject, Access-Challenge,
timeout, or retransmission.
Tx Timeouts radiusAuthClientEx
tTimeouts The number of
authentication timeouts to
the server. After a timeout,
the client may retry to the
same server, send to a
different server, or give up.
A retry to the same server
is counted as a retransmit
as well as a timeout. A
send to a different server is
counted as a Request as
well as a timeout.
Other Info This section contains information about the state of the server and the latest
round-trip time.
Name RFC4668
Name Description
IP Address
- IP address and UDP port for the authentication
server in question.
State
- Shows the state of the server. It takes one of
the following values:
Disabled: The selected server is disabled.
Not Ready: The server is enabled, but IP
communication is not yet up and running.
Ready: The server is enabled, IP
communication is up and running, and the
RADIUS module is ready to accept access
attempts.
Dead (X seconds left): Access attempts were
made to this server, but it did not reply within
the configured timeout. The server has
temporarily been disabled, but will get re-
enabled when the dead-time expires. The
number of seconds left before this occurs is
displayed in parentheses. This state is only
reachable when more than one server is
enabled.
Round-Trip
Time radiusAuthClie
ntExtRoundTrip
Time
The time interval (measured in milliseconds)
between the most recent Access-Reply/Access-
Challenge and the Access-Request that
matched it from the RADIUS authentication
238 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
server. The granularity of this measurement is
100 ms. A value of 0 ms indicates that there
has yet to be round-trip communication with the
server.
RADIUS accounting statistics
The statistics map closely to those specified in RFC4670 - RADIUS Accounting Client
MIB. Use the server check box to switch between the back end servers to show details
for each.
Object Description
Packet Counters RADIUS accounting server packet counter. There are five receive and four
transmit counters.
Direction Name RFC4670 Name Description
Rx
Responses
radiusAccClientEx
tResponses The number of RADIUS
packets (valid or invalid)
received from the server.
Rx
Malformed
Responses radiusAccClientEx
tMalformedRespo
nses
The number of malformed
RADIUS packets received
from the server.
Malformed packets
include packets with an
invalid length. Bad
authenticators or or
unknown types are not
included as malformed
access responses.
Rx
Bad
Authenticators radiusAcctClientE
xtBadAuthenticato
rs
The number of RADIUS
packets containing invalid
authenticators received
from the server.
Rx
Unknown Types
radiusAccClientEx
tUnknownTypes The number of RADIUS
packets of unknown types
that were received from
the server on the
accounting port.
Rx
Packets Dropped
radiusAccClientEx
tPacketsDropped The number of RADIUS
packets that were
received from the server
on the accounting port
and dropped for some
other reason.
Tx
Requests
radiusAccClientEx
tRequests The number of RADIUS
packets sent to the server.
This does not include
retransmissions.
Tx
Retransmissions
radiusAccClientEx
tRetransmissions The number of RADIUS
packets retransmitted to
the RADIUS accounting
server.
Tx
Pending
radiusAccClientEx The number of RADIUS
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 239
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Requests
tPendingRequests
packets destined for the
server that have not yet
timed out or received a
response. This variable is
incremented when a
Request is sent and
decremented due to
receipt of a response,
timeout, or retransmission.
Tx
Timeouts
radiusAccClientEx
tTimeouts The number of accounting
timeouts to the server.
After a timeout, the client
may retry to the same
server, send to a different
server, or give up. A retry
to the same server is
counted as a retransmit as
well as a timeout. A send
to a different server is
counted as a request as
well as a timeout.
Other Info This section contains information about the state of the server and the latest
round-trip time.
Name RFC4670 Name Description
IP Address
-
IP address and UDP port for the
accounting server in question.
State
-
Shows the state of the server. It takes
one of the following values:
Disabled: The selected server is
disabled.
Not Ready: The server is enabled, but IP
communication is not yet up and running.
Ready: The server is enabled, IP
communication is up and running, and
the RADIUS module is ready to accept
accounting attempts.
Dead (X seconds left): Accounting
attempts were made to this server, but it
did not reply within the configured
timeout. The server has temporarily been
disabled, but will get re-enabled when the
dead-time expires. The number of
seconds left before this occurs is
displayed in parentheses. This state is
only reachable when more than one
server is enabled.
Round-Trip
Time radiusAccClientExt
RoundTripTime The time interval (measured in
milliseconds) between the most recent
Response and the Request that matched
it from the RADIUS accounting server.
The granularity of this measurement is
100 ms. A value of 0 ms indicates that
there has yet to be round-trip
communication with the server.
240 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Buttons
• Select the Auto-refresh check box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic
refresh occurs every three seconds.
• Click Refresh to refresh the page immediately.
• Click Clear to clear the counters for the selected server. The "Pending Requests"
counter will not be cleared by this operation.
Windows platform RADIUS server configuration
Set up the RADIUS server and assign the client IP address to the managed switch (in
this case, the field in the default IP address of the managed switch with 192.168.0.100).
Ensure that the shared secret key is as same as the one you had set at the managed
switch’s 802.1x system configuration (12345678 in this case).
1. Configure the IP Address of remote RADIUS server and secret key.
2. Click New RADIUS Client on the Windows 2003 server.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 241
Chapter 4: Web configuration
3. Assign the client IP address to the managed switch.
4. The shared secret key should be as same as the key configured on the managed
switch.
242 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
5. Configure ports attribute of 802.1X, the same as “802.1X Port Configuration.”
6. Create user data. The establishment of the user data needs to be created on the
Radius Server PC. For example, select Active Directory Users and Computers
and create legal user data (Windows Server 2003).
7. Right-click a user that you created and then type in properties and configure
settings.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 243
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Note: Set the Port Authenticate Status to “Force Authorized” if the port is connected to
the RADIUS server or the port is an uplink port that is connected to another switch.
Otherwise, the switch might not be able to access the RADIUS server after the 802.1X
starts to work.
802.1X client configuration
Windows XP has native support for 802.1X. The following procedures show how to
configure 802.1X Authentication in Windows XP.
244 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Please note that if you want to change the 802.1x authentication type of a wireless
client, (i.e., switch to EAP-TLS from EAP-MD5), you must remove the current existing
wireless network from your preferred connection first, and add it in again.
Configuration sample: EAP-MD5 authentication
1. Go to Start > Control Panel, and then double-click on Network Connections.
2. Right-click on the Local Network Connection.
3. Click Properties to open up the Properties setting window.
4. Click the Authentication tab.
5. Select Enable network access control using IEEE 802.1X to enable 802.1x
authentication.
6. Select MD-5 Challenge from the drop-down list box for EAP type.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 245
Chapter 4: Web configuration
7. Click OK.
8. When the client has associated with the managed switch, a user authentication
notice appears in the system tray. Click on the notice to continue.
9. Type the user name, password and the logon domain that your account belongs to.
10. Click OK to complete the validation process.
246 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Security
This section describes how to control access to the managed switch, including user
access and management control.
The Security page contains links to the following main topics:
• Port Limit Control
• Access Management
• HTTPs / SSH
• DHCP Snooping
• IP Source Guard
• ARP Inspection
Port limit control
The Port Limit Control Configuration page allows you to configure the port security limit
control system and port settings. Limit control allows for limiting the number of users on
a given port. A user is identified by a MAC address and VLAN ID. If limit control is
enabled on a port, the limit specifies the maximum number of users on the port. If this
number is exceeded, an action is taken. The action can be one of the four different
actions as described below.
The limit control module utilizes a lower-layer port security module that manages MAC
addresses learned on the port. The limit control configuration consists of two sections,
a system- and a port-wide.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 247
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
System configuration
Object Description
Mode Indicates if Limit Control is globally enabled or disabled on the switchstack. If
globally disabled, other modules may still use the underlying functionality,
but limit checks and corresponding actions are disabled.
Aging Enabled If this check box is selected, secured MAC addresses are subject to aging as
discussed under Aging Period.
Aging Period If Aging Enabled is selected, then the aging period is controlled with this
input. If other modules are using the underlying port security for securing
MAC addresses, they may have other requirements to the aging period. The
underlying port security will use the shorter requested aging period of all
modules that use the functionality.
The Aging Period can be set to a number between 10 and 10,000,000
seconds.
To understand why aging may be required, consider the following scenario:
Suppose an end-host is connected to a third party switch or hub, which in
turn is connected to a port on this switch on which Limit Control is enabled.
The end-host will be allowed to forward if the limit is not exceeded. Now
suppose that the end-host logs off or powers down. If it wasn't for aging, the
end-host would still take up resources on this switch and will be allowed to
forward. To overcome this situation, select Aging Enabled. With aging
enabled, a timer is started once the end-host gets secured. When the timer
expires, the switch starts looking for frames from the end-host, and if these
frames are not seen within the next aging period, the end-host is assumed to
be disconnected, and the corresponding resources are freed on the switch.
248 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Port configuration
The table has one row for each port on the selected switch and a number of columns,
which are:
Object Description
Port The port number for which the configuration below applies.
Mode Enable/disable Limit Control on this port. Both this and the Global Mode
must be set to Enabled for Limit Control to be in effect. Note that other
modules may still use the underlying port security features without enabling
Limit Control on a given port.
Limit The maximum number of MAC addresses that can be secured on this port.
This number cannot exceed 1024. If the limit is exceeded, the corresponding
action is taken.
The switch is "born" with a total number of MAC addresses from which all
ports draw whenever a new MAC address is seen on a port security-enabled
port. Since all ports draw from the same pool, it may happen that a
configured maximum cannot be granted if the remaining ports have already
used all available MAC addresses.
Action If the limit is reached, the switch can take one of the following actions:
None: Do not allow more than Limit MAC addresses on the port, but take no
further action.
Trap: If Limit + 1 MAC addresses are seen on the port, send an SNMP trap.
If Aging is disabled, only one SNMP trap will be sent, but with Aging
enabled, new SNMP traps will be sent every time the limit is exceeded.
Shutdown: If Limit + 1 MAC addresses are seen on the port, shut down the
port. This implies that all secured MAC addresses will be removed from the
port and no new addresses will be learned. Even if the link is physically
disconnected and reconnected on the port (by disconnecting the cable), the
port will remain shut down. There are three ways to re-open the port:
1. Boot the stack or elect a new master switch.
2. Disable and re-enable Limit Control on the port or the switch.
3. Click the Reopen button.
Trap & Shutdown: If Limit + 1 MAC addresses are seen on the port, both
the "Trap" and the "Shutdown" actions described above will be taken.
State This column shows the current state of the port as seen from the Limit
Control's point of view. The state takes one of four values:
Disabled: Limit Control is either globally disabled or disabled on the port.
Ready: The limit is not yet reached. This can be shown for all actions.
Limit Reached: Indicates that the limit is reached on this port. This state can
only be shown if Action is set to None or Trap.
Shutdown: Indicates that the port is shut down by the Limit Control module.
This state can only be shown if Action is set to Shutdown or Trap &
Shutdown.
Re-open Button If a port is shut down by this module, you may reopen it by clicking this
button, which will only be enabled if this is the case. For other methods, refer
to Shutdown in the Action section.
Note: Clicking the reopen button causes the page to be refreshed, resulting
in the loss of non-committed changes.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 249
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Buttons
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
• Click Refresh to refresh the page. Note that non-committed changes are lost.
Access management
Configure the access management table on the Access Management Configuration
page. The maximum entry number is 16. If the application's type match any one of the
access management entries, it will allow access to the switch.
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Mode Indicates the access management mode operation. Possible modes are:
Enabled: Enable access management mode operation.
Disabled: Disable access management mode operation.
Delete Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next apply .
VLAN ID Indicates the VLAN ID for the access management entry.
Start IP address Indicates the start IP address for the access management entry.
End IP address Indicates the end IP address for the access management entry.
HTTP/HTTPS Indicates the host can access the switch from the HTTP/HTTPS interface
and that the host IP address matched the entry.
SNMP Indicates the host can access the switch from the SNMP interface and that
the host IP address matched the entry.
TELNET/SSH Indicates the host can access the switch from the TELNET/SSH interface
and that the host IP address matched the entry.
Buttons
• Click Add New Entry to add a new access management entry.
• Click Apply to apply changes.
250 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
Access management statistics
The Access Management Statistics page provides statistics for access management.
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Interface The interface that allowed the remote host can access the switch.
Receive Packets The received packets number from the interface under access management
mode is enabled.
Allow Packets The allowed packets number from the interface under access management
mode is enabled.
Discard Packets The discarded packets number from the interface under access
management mode is enabled.
Buttons
• Click Refresh to refresh the page immediately.
• Click Auto-refresh to to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs
every three seconds.
• Click Clear to clear all statistics.
HTTPs
Configure HTTPS on the HTTPS Configuration page.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 251
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Mode Indicates the HTTPS mode operation. When the current connection is
HTTPS, applying the HTTPS disabled mode operation automatically
redirects the web browser to an HTTP connection. Selections include:
Enabled: Enable HTTPS mode operation.
Disabled: Disable HTTPS mode operation.
Automatic Redirect Indicates the HTTPS redirect mode operation. It is only significant if HTTPS
mode Enabled is selected. It automatically redirects the web browser to an
HTTPS connection when both HTTPS mode and Automatic Redirect are
enabled or redirects web browser to an HTTP connection when both are
disabled. Selections include:
Enabled: Enable HTTPS redirect mode operation.
Disabled: Disable HTTPS redirect mode operation.
Buttons
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
SSH
Configure SSH on the SSH Configuration page. This page shows the Port Security
status. Port Security is a module with no direct configuration. Configuration comes
indirectly from other user modules. When a user module has enabled port security on a
port, the port is set up for software-based learning. In this mode, frames from unknown
MAC addresses are passed on to the port security module, which in turn asks all user
modules whether to allow this new MAC address to forward or block it. For a MAC
address to be set in the forwarding state, all enabled user modules must unanimously
agree on allowing the MAC address to forward. If only one chooses to block it, it will be
blocked until that user module decides otherwise. The status page is divided into two
sections – one with a legend of user modules and one with the actual port status.
252 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Mode Indicates the SSH mode operation. Selections include:
Enabled: Enable SSH mode operation.
Disabled: Disable SSH mode operation..
Buttons
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
Port security status
The Port Security Status page shows the Port Security status. Port security is a module
with no direct configuration. Configuration comes indirectly from other user modules.
When a user module has enabled port security on a port, the port is set up for software-
based learning. In this mode, frames from unknown MAC addresses are passed on to
the port security module, which in turn asks all user modules whether to allow this new
MAC address to forward or block it. For a MAC address to be set in the forwarding
state, all enabled user modules must unanimously agree on allowing the MAC address
to forward. If only one chooses to block it, it will be blocked until that user module
decides otherwise.
The status page is divided into two sections – one with a legend of user modules and
one with the actual port status.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 253
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
User module legend
The legend shows all user modules that may request Port Security services.
Object Description
User Module Name The full name of a module that may request port security services.
Abbr A one-letter abbreviation of the user module. This is used in the Users
column in the port status table.
Port status
The table has one row for each port on the selected switch in the switch and a number
of columns, which are:
254 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Object Description
Port The port number for which the status applies. Click the port number to see
the status for this particular port.
Users Each of the user modules has a column that shows if that module has
enabled Port Security. A '-' means that the corresponding user module is not
enabled, whereas a letter indicates that the user module abbreviated by that
letter has enabled port security.
State Shows the current state of the port. It can take one of four values:
Disabled: No user modules are currently using the Port Security service.
Ready: The Port Security service is in use by at least one user module, and
is awaiting frames from unknown MAC addresses to arrive.
Limit Reached: The Port Security service is enabled by at least the Limit
Control user module, and that module has indicated that the limit is reached
and no more MAC addresses should be taken in.
Shutdown: The Port Security service is enabled by at least the Limit Control
user module, and that module has indicated that the limit is exceeded. No
MAC addresses can be learned on the port until it is administratively re-
opened on the Limit Control configuration web page.
MAC Count
(Current, Limit)
The two columns indicate the number of currently learned MAC addresses
(forwarding as well as blocked) and the maximum number of MAC
addresses that can be learned on the port, respectively.
If no user modules are enabled on the port, the Current column will show a
dash (-).
If the Limit Control user module is not enabled on the port, the Limit column
will show a dash (-).
Buttons
• Click Refresh to refresh the page immediately.
• Click Auto-refresh to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs
every three seconds.
Port security detail
The Port Security Port Status page shows the MAC addresses secured by the Port
Security module. Port Security is a module with no direct configuration. Configuration
comes indirectly from other user modules. When a user module has enabled port
security on a port, the port is set up for software-based learning. In this mode, frames
from unknown MAC addresses are passed on to the port security module, which in turn
asks all user modules whether to allow this new MAC address to forward or block it. For
a MAC address to be set in the forwarding state, all enabled user modules must
unanimously agree on allowing the MAC address to forward. If only one chooses to
block it, it will be blocked until that user module decides otherwise.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 255
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
MAC Address &
VLAN ID The MAC address and VLAN ID that is seen on this port. If no MAC
addresses are learned, a single row stating "No MAC addresses attached" is
displayed.
State Indicates whether the corresponding MAC address is blocked or forwarding.
In the blocked state, it will not be allowed to transmit or receive traffic.
Time of Addition Shows the date and time when this MAC address was first seen on the port.
Age/Hold If at least one user module has decided to block this MAC address, it will
stay in the blocked state until the hold time (measured in seconds) expires.
If all user modules have decided to allow this MAC address to forward, and
aging is enabled, the Port Security module will periodically check that this
MAC address still forwards traffic.
If the age period (measured in seconds) expires and no frames have been
seen, the MAC address will be removed from the MAC table. Otherwise a
new age period will begin.
If aging is disabled or a user module has decided to hold the MAC address
indefinitely, a dash (-) will be shown.
DHCP snooping
DHCP snooping is used to block intruders on the untrusted ports of DUT when it tries to
intervene by injecting a bogus DHCP reply packet to a legitimate conversation between
the DHCP client and server.
256 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Configure DHCP Snooping on the DHCP Snooping Configuration page.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 257
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Snooping Mode Indicates the DHCP snooping mode operation. Possible modes are:
Enabled: Enable DHCP snooping mode operation. When the DHCP
snooping mode operation is enabled, the request DHCP messages will be
forwarded to trusted ports and only allow reply packets from trusted ports.
Disabled: Disable the DHCP snooping mode operation.
Port Mode
Configuration Indicates the DHCP snooping port mode. Possible port modes are:
Trusted: Configures the port as trusted sources of the DHCP message.
Untrusted: Configures the port as untrusted sources of the DHCP message.
Buttons
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
Snooping table
The Dynamic DHCP Snooping Table page displays the dynamic IP assigned
information after DHCP Snooping mode is disabled. All DHCP clients that obtained the
dynamic IP address from the DHCP server will be listed in this table except for local
VLAN interface IP addresses. Entries in the Dynamic DHCP snooping Table are shown
on this page.
Buttons
• Click Auto-refresh to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs
every three seconds.
• Click >> to use the last entry of the currently displayed table as a basis for the next
lookup. “No more entries” is shown in the table.
• Click I<< to start over.
IP source guard configuration
IP Source Guard is a secure feature used to restrict IP traffic on DHCP snooping
untrusted ports by filtering traffic based on the DHCP Snooping Table or manually
configured IP Source Bindings. It helps prevent IP spoofing attacks when a host tries to
258 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
spoof and use the IP address of another host. The IP Source Guard Configuration page
provides IP Source Guard-related configuration data.
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Mode of IP Source
Guard Configuration Enable/disable the Global IP Source Guard. All configured ACEs will be lost
when the mode is enabled.
Port Mode
Configuration Specify on which ports IP Source Guard is enabled. Only when both Global
Mode and Port Mode on a given port are enabled will IP Source Guard be
enabled on this port.
Max Dynamic Clients Specify the maximum number of dynamic clients that can be learned on
given ports. This value can be 0, 1, 2, and unlimited. If the port mode is
enabled and the value of max dynamic client is equal 0, it only allows the
forwarding of IP packets that are matched in static entries on the specific
port.
Buttons
• Click Translate Dynamic to Static to translate all dynamic entries to static entries.
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
IP source guard static table
The Static IP Source Guard Table page appears as below:
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 259
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Delete Select to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
Port The logical port for the settings.
VLAN ID The VLAN ID for the settings.
IP Address Allowed Source IP address.
MAC Address Allowed Source MAC address.
Buttons
• Click Add New Entry to add a new entry to the Static IP Source Guard table.
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
Dynamic IP source guard table
Entries in the Dynamic IP Source Guard Table are shown on this page. The Dynamic
IP Source Guard Table is sorted first by port, then by VLAN ID, then by IP address, and
then by IP mask.
Navigating the dynamic IP source guard table
Each page shows up to 99 entries from the Dynamic IP source guard table, selected
through the "entries per page" input field (default is 20). When first visited, the web
page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the table. The first entry
260 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
displayed will be the one with the lowest VLAN ID and the lowest MAC address found
in the table.
The Start from port address, IP Address, and VLAN input fields allow the user to
select the starting point in the table. Clicking the Refresh button updates the displayed
table starting from that or the closest next Dynamic IP source guard table match.
In addition, the two input fields will, after clicking the Refresh button, assume the value
of the first displayed entry, allowing for continuous refresh with the same start address.
The >> will use the last entry of the currently displayed VLAN/IP address pairs as a
basis for the next lookup. When the end is reached the text "no more entries" is shown
in the displayed table. Use the I<< button to start over.
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Port The port number for which the status applies. Click the port number to see
the status for this particular port.
VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the entry.
MAC Address The MAC address of the entry.
IP Address The IP address of the entry.
Buttons
• Click Auto-refresh to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs
every three seconds.
• Click Refresh to refresh the displayed table starting from the MAC address and
VLAN input fields.
• Click Clear to flush all dynamic entries.
• Click I<< to update the table starting from the first entry in the MAC table (i.e., the
entry with the lowest VLAN ID and MAC address).
• Click >> to update the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently
displayed.
ARP inspection
ARP Inspection is a secure feature. Several types of attacks can be launched against a
host or devices connected to Layer 2 networks by "poisoning" the ARP caches. This
feature is used to block such attacks. Only valid ARP requests and responses can go
through DUT. The ARP Inspection Configuration page provides ARP Inspection related
configuration.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 261
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Mode of ARP
Inspection
Configuration
Enable/disable the Global ARP Inspection.
Port Mode
Configuration Specify the ports on which ARP Inspection is enabled. Only when both
Global Mode and Port Mode on a given port are enabled will ARP Inspection
be enabled on this port. Possible modes are:
Enabled: Enable ARP Inspection operation.
Disabled: Disable ARP Inspection operation.
To inspect the VLAN configuration, select Enabled under Check VLAN. The
default setting of Check VLAN is disabled. When Check VLAN is set to
Disabled, the log type of ARP Inspection refers to the port setting. When
Check VLAN is set to Enabled, the log type of ARP Inspection will refer to
the VLAN setting. Possible modes are:
Enabled: Enable check VLAN operation.
Disabled: Disable check VLAN operation.
When the Global Mode and Port Mode on a given port are set to Enabled,
and Check VLAN is set to Disabled, the log type of ARP Inspection will refer
to the port setting. There are four log types which are:
None: Log nothing.
Deny: Log denied entries.
Permit: Log permitted entries.
ALL: Log all entries.
Buttons
• Click Translate Dynamic to Static to translate all dynamic entries to static entries.
• Click Apply to apply changes.
262 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
ARP inspection static table
The Static ARP Inspection Table page provides Static ARP Inspection data.
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Delete Select to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
Port The logical port for the settings.
VLAN ID The VLAN ID for the settings.
MAC Address Allowed Source MAC address in ARP request packets.
IP Address Allowed Source IP address in ARP request packets.
Buttons
• Click Add New Entry to add a new entry to the Static ARP inspection table.
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
Dynamic ARP inspection table
Entries in the Dynamic ARP Inspection Table are shown on this page. The Dynamic
ARP Inspection Table contains up to 1024 entries, and is sorted first by port, then by
VLAN ID, then by MAC address, and then by IP address.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 263
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Navigating the ARP inspection table
Each page shows up to 99 entries from the Dynamic ARP inspection table, selected
through the "entries per page" input field (default is 20). When first visited, the web
page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the Dynamic ARP inspection
table. The first entry displayed will be the one with the lowest VLAN ID and the lowest
MAC address found in the table.
The Start from port address, MAC Address, IP Address and VLAN input fields allow
the user to select the starting point in the table. Clicking the Refresh button updates the
displayed table starting from that or the closest next Dynamic ARP inspection match.
In addition, the two input fields will, after clicking the Refresh button, assume the value
of the first displayed entry, allowing for continuous refresh with the same start address.
The >> will use the last entry of the currently displayed VLAN/MAC address pairs as a
basis for the next lookup. When the end is reached the text "no more entries" is shown
in the displayed table. Use the I<< button to start over.
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Port The port number for which the status applies. Click the port number to see
the status for this particular port.
VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the entry.
MAC Address The MAC address of the entry.
IP Address The IP address of the entry.
Buttons
• Click Auto-refresh to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs
every three seconds.
• Click Refresh to refresh the displayed table starting from the MAC address and
VLAN input fields.
• Click Clear to flush all dynamic entries.
• Click I<< to update the table starting from the first entry in the MAC table (i.e., the
entry with the lowest VLAN ID and MAC address).
• Click >> to update the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently
displayed.
MAC address table
Switching of frames is based upon the DMAC address contained in the frame. The
managed switch builds up a table that maps MAC addresses to switch ports for
knowing which ports the frames should go to (based upon the DMAC address in the
frame). This table contains both static and dynamic entries. The static entries are
264 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
configured by the network administrator if the administrator wants to do a fixed mapping
between the DMAC address and switch ports.
The frames also contain a MAC address (SMAC address) that shows the MAC address
of the equipment sending the frame. The SMAC address is used by the switch to
automatically update the MAC table with these dynamic MAC addresses. Dynamic
entries are removed from the MAC table if no frame with the corresponding SMAC
address have been seen after a configurable age time.
MAC table configuration
The MAC Address Table is configured on the MAC Address Table Configuration page.
Set timeouts for entries in the dynamic MAC Table and configure the static MAC table
here.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 265
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Aging configuration
Object Description
Disable Automatic
Aging Enables/disables the automatic aging of dynamic entries
Aging Time The time after which a learned entry is discarded. By default, dynamic
entries are removed from the MAC after 300 seconds. This removal is also
called aging.
(Range: 10-10000000 seconds; Default: 300 seconds)
MAC table learning
If the learning mode for a given port is greyed out, another module is in control of the
mode so that it cannot be changed by the user. An example of such a module is the
MAC-Based Authentication under 802.1X.
Object Description
Auto Learning is done automatically as soon as a frame with
unknown SMAC is received.
Disable No learning is done.
Secure Only static MAC entries are learned, all other frames are
dropped.
Note: Make sure that the link used for managing the switch
is added to the Static Mac Table before changing to secure
learning mode, otherwise the management link is lost and
can only be restored by using another non-secure port or by
connecting to the switch via the serial interface.
Static MAC table configuration
The static entries in the MAC table are shown in this table. The static MAC table can
contain 64 entries. The MAC table is sorted first by VLAN ID and then by MAC address.
Object Description
Delete Select to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next
save.
VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the entry.
MAC Address The MAC address of the entry.
Port Members Checkmarks indicate which ports are members of the entry.
Select or deselect as needed to modify the entry.
Adding a New Static Entry Click Add New Static Entry to add a new entry to the static
MAC table. Specify the VLAN ID, MAC address, and port
members for the new entry. Click Save.
Buttons
• Click Apply to apply changes.
266 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
MAC address table status
Dynamic MAC table
Entries in the MAC table are shown on this page. The MAC table contains up to 8192
entries and is sorted first by VLAN ID, then by MAC address.
Navigating the MAC table
Each page shows up to 99 entries from the MAC table, selected through the "entries
per page" input field (default is 20). When first visited, the web page will show the first
20 entries from the beginning of the MAC Table. The first entry displayed will be the
one with the lowest VLAN ID and the lowest MAC address found in the MAC Table.
The "Start from MAC address" and VLAN input fields allow the user to select the
starting point in the MAC Table. Clicking the Refresh button updates the displayed
table starting from that or the closest next MAC Table match.
In addition, the two input fields will, after clicking the Refresh button, assume the value
of the first displayed entry, allowing for continuous refresh with the same start address.
The >> button uses the last entry of the currently displayed VLAN/MAC address pairs
as a basis for the next lookup. When the end is reached the text "no more entries" is
shown in the displayed table. Use the I<< button to start over.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 267
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Type Indicates if the entry is a static or dynamic entry.
VLAN The VLAN ID of the entry.
MAC Address The MAC address of the entry.
Port Members The ports that are members of the entry.
Buttons
• Click Auto-refresh to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs
every three seconds.
• Click Refresh to refresh the displayed table starting from the MAC address and
VLAN input fields.
• Click Clear to flush all dynamic entries.
• Click I<< to update the table starting from the first entry in the MAC table (i.e., the
entry with the lowest VLAN ID and MAC address).
• Click >> to update the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently
displayed.
LLDP
Link Layer Discovery Protocol
Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) is used to discover basic information about
neighboring devices on the local broadcast domain. LLDP is a Layer 2 protocol that
uses periodic broadcasts to advertise information about the sending device. Advertised
information is represented in Type Length Value (TLV) format according to the IEEE
802.1ab standard, and can include details such as device identification, capabilities,
and configuration settings. LLDP also defines how to store and maintain information
gathered about the neighboring network nodes it discovers.
Link Layer Discovery Protocol – Media Endpoint Discovery (LLDP-MED) is an
extension of LLDP intended for managing endpoint devices such as Voice over IP
(VoIP) phones and network switches. The LLDP-MED TLVs advertise information such
as network policy, power, inventory, and device location details. LLDP and LLDP-MED
information can be used by SNMP applications to simplify troubleshooting, enhance
network management, and maintain an accurate network topology.
LLDP configuration
The LLDP Configuration page allows the user to inspect and configure the current
LLDP port settings.
268 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
LLDP parameters
Object Description
Tx Interval The switch is periodically transmitting LLDP frames to its neighbors for
having the network discovery information up-to-date. The interval between
each LLDP frame is determined by the Tx Interval value. Valid values are
restricted to 5 - 32768 seconds.
Default: 30 seconds
This attribute must comply with the following rule:
(Transmission Interval * Hold Time Multiplier) ≤65536, and Transmission
Interval >= (4 * Delay Interval)
Tx Hold Each LLDP frame contains information about how long the information in the
LLDP frame shall be considered valid. The LLDP information valid period is
set to Tx Hold multiplied by Tx Interval seconds. Valid values are restricted
to 2 - 10 times.
TTL in seconds is based on the following rule:
(Transmission Interval * Holdtime Multiplier) ≤ 65536.
Therefore, the default TTL is 4*30 = 120 seconds.
Tx Delay If some configuration is changed (e.g., the IP address) a new LLDP frame is
transmitted, but the time between the LLDP frames will always be at least
the value of Tx Delay seconds. Tx Delay cannot be larger than 1/4 of the Tx
Interval value. Valid values are restricted to 1 - 8192 seconds.
This attribute must comply with the rule:
(4 * Delay Interval) ≤Transmission Interval
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 269
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Object Description
Tx Reinit When a port is disabled, LLDP is disabled, or the switch is rebooted, a LLDP
shutdown frame is transmitted to the neighboring units, signaling that the
LLDP information is no longer valid. Tx Reinit controls the amount of
seconds between the shutdown frame and a new LLDP initialization. Valid
values are restricted to 1 - 10 seconds.
LLDP port configuration
The LLDP port settings relate to the current unit, as reflected by the page header.
Object Description
Port The switch port number of the logical LLDP port.
Mode Select LLDP mode.
Rx only The switch will not send out LLDP information, but LLDP
information from neighbor units is analyzed.
Tx only The switch will drop LLDP information received from neighbors, and
will send out LLDP information.
Disabled The switch will not send out LLDP information, and will drop LLDP
information received from neighbors.
Enabled The switch will send out LLDP information, and will analyze LLDP
information received from neighbors.
CDP Aware Select CDP awareness.
The CDP operation is restricted to decoding incoming CDP frames (The
switch doesn't transmit CDP frames). CDP frames are only decoded if
LLDP on the port is enabled.
Only CDP TLVs that can be mapped to a corresponding field in the LLDP
neighbors' table are decoded. All other TLVs are discarded (Unrecognized
CDP TLVs and discarded CDP frames are not shown in the LLDP statistics).
CDP TLVs are mapped onto LLDP neighbours' table as shown below.
CDP TLV "Device ID" is mapped to the LLDP "Chassis ID" field.
CDP TLV "Address" is mapped to the LLDP "Management Address" field.
The CDP address TLV can contain multiple addresses, but only the first
address is shown in the LLDP neighbours table.
CDP TLV "Port ID" is mapped to the LLDP "Port ID" field.
CDP TLV "Version and Platform" is mapped to the LLDP "System
Description" field.
Both the CDP and LLDP support "system capabilities", but the CDP
capabilities cover capabilities that are not part of the LLDP. These
capabilities are shown as "others" in the LLDP neighbors' table.
If all ports have CDP awareness disabled, the switch forwards CDP frames
received from neighbor devices. If at least one port has CDP awareness
enabled, all CDP frames are terminated by the switch.
Note: When CDP awareness on a port is disabled the CDP information isn't
removed immediately, but gets removed when the hold time is exceeded.
Port Description Optional TLV: When selected, the "port description" is included in LLDP
information transmitted.
System Name Optional TLV: When selected, the "system name" is included in LLDP
information transmitted.
System Description Optional TLV: When selected, the "system description" is included in LLDP
270 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Object Description
information transmitted.
System Capabilites Optional TLV: When selected, the "system capability" is included in LLDP
information transmitted.
Management
Address Optional TLV: When selected, the "management address" is included in
LLDP information transmitted.
Buttons
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
LLDP-MED configuration
The LLDP-MED Configuration page permits configuration of the LLDP-MED.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 271
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Fast start repeat count
Object Description
Fast start repeat
count Rapid startup and Emergency Call Service Location Identification Discovery
of endpoints is a critically important aspect of VoIP systems. In addition, it is
best to advertise only those pieces of information which are specifically
relevant to particular endpoint types (e.g., only advertise the voice network
policy to permitted voice-capable devices), both in order to conserve the
limited LLDPU space and to reduce security and system integrity issues that
can come with inappropriate knowledge of the network policy.
With this in mind, LLDP-MED defines an LLDP-MED Fast Start interaction
between the protocol and the application layers on top of the protocol in
order to achieve these related properties. Initially, a Network Connectivity
Device will only transmit LLDP TLVs in an LLDPDU. Only after an LLDP-
MED Endpoint Device is detected will an LLDP-MED capable Network
Connectivity Device start to advertise LLDP-MED TLVs in outgoing
LLDPDUs on the associated port. The LLDP-MED application will
temporarily speed up the transmission of the LLDPDU to start within a
second when a new LLDP-MED neighbor has been detected in order to
share LLDP-MED information as fast as possible to new neighbors.
Because there is a risk of an LLDP frame being lost during transmission
between neighbors, we recommend repeating the fast start transmission
multiple times to increase the possibility of the neighbors receiving the LLDP
frame. With Fast start repeat count it is possible to specify the number of
times the fast start transmission would be repeated. The recommended
value is four times, given that four LLDP frames with a one second interval
will be transmitted when an LLDP frame with new information is received.
It should be noted that LLDP-MED and the LLDP-MED Fast Start
mechanism is only intended to run on links between LLDP-MED network
connectivity devices and endpoint devices, and as such does not apply to
links between LAN infrastructure elements, including network connectivity
devices, or other types of links.
Coordinates location
Object Description
Latitude Latitude SHOULD be normalized to within 0-90° with a maximum of four
digits.
It is possible to specify the direction to either North of the equator or South
of the equator.
Longitude Longitude SHOULD be normalized to within 0-180° with a maximum of four
digits.
It is possible to specify the direction to either East of the prime meridian or
West of the prime meridian.
Altitude Altitude SHOULD be normalized to within -32767 to 32767 with a maximum
of four digits.
It is possible to select between two altitude types (floors or meters).
Meters: Representing meters of Altitude defined by the vertical datum
specified.
Floors: Representing altitude in a form more relevant in buildings which
have different floor-to-floor dimensions. An altitude of 0.0 is meaningful even
272 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Object Description
outside a building, and represents ground level at the given latitude and
longitude. Inside a building, 0.0 represents the floor level associated with
ground level at the main entrance.
Map Datum The Map Datum used for the coordinates given in this option.
WGS84: (Geographical 3D) - World Geodesic System 1984, CRS Code
4327, Prime Meridian Name: Greenwich.
NAD83/NAVD88: North American Datum 1983, CRS Code 4269, Prime
Meridian Name: Greenwich; The associated vertical datum is the North
American Vertical Datum of 1988 (NAVD88). This datum pair is to be used
when referencing locations on land, not near tidal water (which would use
Datum = NAD83/MLLW).
NAD83/MLLW: North American Datum 1983, CRS Code 4269, Prime
Meridian Name: Greenwich; The associated vertical datum is Mean Lower
Low Water (MLLW). This datum pair is to be used when referencing
locations on water/sea/ocean.
Civic address location
IETF Geopriv Civic Address based Location Configuration Information (Civic Address
LCI).
Object Description
Country code The two-letter ISO 3166 country code in capital ASCII letters -
Example: DK, DE or US.
State National subdivisions (state, canton, region, province, prefecture).
County County, parish, gun (Japan), district.
City City, township, shi (Japan) - Example: Copenhagen
City district City division, borough, city district, ward, chou (Japan)
Block (Neighborhood) Neighborhood, block
Street Street - Example: Poppelvej
Leading street direction Leading street direction - Example: N
Trailing street suffix Trailing street suffix - Example: SW
Street suffix Street suffix - Example: Ave, Platz
House no. House number - Example: 21
House no. suffix House number suffix - Example: A, 1/2
Landmark Landmark or vanity address - Example: Columbia University
Additional location info Additional location info - Example: South Wing
Name Name (residence and office occupant) - Example: Flemming Jahn
Zip code Postal/zip code - Example: 2791
Building Building (structure) - Example: Low Library
Apartment Unit (Apartment, suite) - Example: Apt 42
Floor Floor - Example: 4
Room no. Room number - Example: 450F
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 273
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Object Description
Place type Place type - Example: Office
Postal community name Postal community name - Example: Leonia
P.O. Box Post office box (P.O. BOX) - Example: 12345
Additional code Additional code - Example: 1320300003
Emergency call service
Emergency Call Service (e.g., E911 and others), such as defined by TIA or NENA.
Object Description
Emergency Call
Service Emergency Call Service ELIN identifier data format is defined to carry the
ELIN identifier as used during emergency call setup to a traditional CAMA or
ISDN trunk-based PSAP. This format consists of a numerical digit string
corresponding to the ELIN to be used for emergency calling.
Policies
Network policy discovery enables the efficient discovery and diagnosis of mismatch
issues with the VLAN configuration, along with the associated Layer 2 and Layer 3
attributes, which apply for a set of specific protocol applications on that port. Improper
network policy configurations are a very significant issue in VoIP environments that
frequently result in voice quality degradation or loss of service.
Policies are only intended for use with applications that have specific ‘real-time’ network
policy requirements, such as interactive voice and/or video services.
The network policy attributes advertised are:
• Layer 2 VLAN ID (IEEE 802.1Q-2003)
• Layer 2 priority value (IEEE 802.1D-2004)
• Layer 3 Diffserv code point (DSCP) value (IETF RFC 2474)
This network policy is potentially advertised and associated with multiple sets of
application types supported on a given port. The application types specifically
addressed are:
• Voice
• Guest Voice
• Softphone Voice
• Video Conferencing
• Streaming Video
• Control / Signaling (conditionally support a separate network policy for the media
types above)
A large network may support multiple VoIP policies across the entire organization, and
different policies per application type. LLDP-MED allows multiple policies to be
advertised per port, each corresponding to a different application type. Different ports
274 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
on the same network connectivity device may advertise different sets of policies, based
on the authenticated user identity or port configuration.
It should be noted that LLDP-MED is not intended to run on links other than between
network connectivity devices and endpoints, and therefore does not need to advertise
the multitude of network policies that frequently run on an aggregated link interior to the
LAN.
Object Description
Delete Select this check box to delete the policy. It will be deleted during the next
save.
Policy ID ID for the policy. This is auto generated and is used when selecting the
polices mapped to the specific ports.
Application Type Intended use of the application types:
Voice – For use by dedicated IP Telephony handsets and other similar
appliances supporting interactive voice services. These devices are typically
deployed on a separate VLAN for ease of deployment and enhanced
security by isolation from data applications.
Voice Signaling (conditional) – For use in network topologies that require
a different policy for the voice signaling than for the voice media. This
application type should not be advertised if all the same network policies
apply as those advertised in the Voice application policy.
Guest Voice – Support a separate 'limited feature–set' voice service for
guest users and visitors with their own IP Telephony handsets and other
similar appliances supporting interactive voice services.
Guest Voice Signaling (conditional) – For use in network topologies that
require a different policy for the guest voice signaling than for the guest
voice media. This application type should not be advertised if all the same
network policies apply as those advertised in the Guest Voice application
policy.
Softphone Voice – For use by softphone applications on typical data centric
devices, such as PCs or laptops. This class of endpoints frequently does not
support multiple VLANs, if at all, and are typically configured to use an
'untagged’ VLAN or a single 'tagged’ data specific VLAN. When a network
policy is defined for use with an 'untagged’ VLAN (see Tagged flag below)
then the L2 priority field is ignored and only the DSCP value has relevance.
Video Conferencing – For use by dedicated video conferencing equipment
and other similar appliances supporting real–time interactive video/audio
services.
Streaming Video – For use by broadcast or multicast based video content
distribution and other similar applications supporting streaming video
services that require specific network policy treatment. Video applications
relying on TCP with buffering would not be an intended use of this
application type.
Video Signaling (conditional) – For use in network topologies that require
a separate policy for the video signaling than for the video media. This
application type should not be advertised if all the same network policies
apply as those advertised in the video conferencing application policy.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 275
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Object Description
Tag Tag indicates if the specified application type is using a 'tagged’ or an
'untagged’ VLAN.
Untagged indicates that the device is using an untagged frame format and
as such does not include a tag header as defined by IEEE 802.1Q-2003. In
this case, both the VLAN ID and the Layer 2 priority fields are ignored and
only the DSCP value has relevance.
Tagged indicates that the device is using the IEEE 802.1Q tagged frame
format, and that both the VLAN ID and the Layer 2 priority values are being
used, as well as the DSCP value. The tagged format includes an additional
field, known as the tag header. The tagged frame format also includes
priority tagged frames as defined by IEEE 802.1Q-2003.
VLAN ID VLAN identifier (VID) for the port as defined in IEEE 802.1Q-2003
L2 Priority L2 Priority is the Layer 2 priority to be used for the specified application type.
L2 Priority may specify one of eight priority levels (0 through 7), as defined
by IEEE 802.1D-2004. A value of 0 represents use of the default priority as
defined in IEEE 802.1D-2004.
DSCP DSCP value to be used to provide Diffserv node behavior for the specified
application type as defined in IETF RFC 2474. DSCP may contain one of 64
code point values (0 through 63). A value of 0 represents use of the default
DSCP value as defined in RFC 2475.
Adding a new policy Click Add New Policy to add a new policy. Specify the Application type,
Tag, VLAN ID, L2 Priority and DSCP for the new policy. Click Save.
The number of policies supported is 32
Port policies configuration
Every port may advertise a unique set of network policies or different attributes for the
same network policies based on the authenticated user identity or port configuration.
Object Description
Port The port number for which the configuration applies.
Policy ID The set of policies for a given port. The set of policies is selected by
selecting the check boxes that correspond to the policies
Buttons
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
LLDP-MED neighbor
The LLDP-MED Neighbor Information page provides a status overview of all LLDP-
MED neighbors. The table contains a row for each port on which an LLDP neighbor is
detected. The columns hold the following information:
276 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Fast start repeat count
Object Description
Port The port on which the LLDP frame was received.
Device Type LLDP-MED Devices are comprised of two primary Device Types: Network
Connectivity Devices and Endpoint Devices.
LLDP-MED Network Connectivity Device Definition
LLDP-MED Network Connectivity Devices, as defined in TIA-1057, provide
access to the IEEE 802 based LAN infrastructure for LLDP-MED Endpoint
Devices. An LLDP-MED Network Connectivity Device is a LAN access
device based on any of the following technologies:
1. LAN Switch/Router
2. IEEE 802.1 Bridge
3. IEEE 802.3 Repeater (included for historical reasons)
4. IEEE 802.11 Wireless Access Point
5. Any device that supports the IEEE 802.1AB and MED extensions defined
by TIA-1057 and can relay IEEE 802 frames via any method.
LLDP-MED Endpoint Device Definition
Within the LLDP-MED Endpoint Device category, the LLDP-MED scheme is
broken into further Endpoint Device Classes, as defined in the following.
Each LLDP-MED Endpoint Device Class is defined to build upon the
capabilities defined for the previous Endpoint Device Class. For example,
any LLDP-MED Endpoint Device claiming compliance as a Media Endpoint
(Class II) will also support all aspects of TIA-1057 applicable to Generic
Endpoints (Class I), and any LLDP-MED Endpoint Device claiming
compliance as a Communication Device (Class III) will also support all
aspects of TIA-1057 applicable to both Media Endpoints (Class II) and
Generic Endpoints (Class I).
LLDP-MED Generic Endpoint (Class I)
The LLDP-MED Generic Endpoint (Class I) definition is applicable to all
endpoint products that require the base LLDP discovery services defined in
TIA-1057 but do not support IP media or act as an end-user communication
appliance. Such devices may include (but are not limited to) IP
Communication Controllers, other communication related servers, or any
device requiring basic services as defined in TIA-1057. Discovery services
defined in this class include LAN configuration, device location, network
policy, power management, and inventory management.
LLDP-MED Media Endpoint (Class II)
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 277
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Object Description
The LLDP-MED Media Endpoint (Class II) definition is applicable to all
endpoint products that have IP media capabilities but may or may not be
associated with a particular end user. Capabilities include all of the
capabilities defined for the previous Generic Endpoint Class (Class I), and
are extended to include aspects related to media streaming. Example
product categories expected to adhere to this class include (but are not
limited to) voice/media gateways, conference bridges, media servers, etc.
Discovery services defined in this class include media-type-specific network
layer policy discovery.
LLDP-MED Communication Endpoint (Class III)
The LLDP-MED Communication Endpoint (Class III) definition is applicable
to all endpoint products that act as end user communication appliances
supporting IP media. Capabilities include all of the capabilities defined for
the previous Generic Endpoint (Class I) and Media Endpoint (Class II)
classes, and are extended to include aspects related to end user devices.
Example product categories expected to adhere to this class include (but are
not limited to) end user communication appliances, such as IP Phones, PC-
based softphones, or other communication appliances that directly support
the end user.
Discovery services defined in this class include provision of location identifier
(including ECS / E911 information), embedded L2 switch support, and
inventory management
LLDP-MED
Capabilities LLDP-MED Capabilities describes the neighbor unit's LLDP-MED
capabilities. The possible capabilities are:
1. LLDP-MED capabilities
2. Network Policy
3. Location Identification
4. Extended Power via MDI - PSE
5. Extended Power via MDI - PD
6. Inventory
7. Reserved
Application Type Application Type indicating the primary function of the application(s) defined
for this network policy, advertised by an Endpoint or Network Connectivity
Device. The possible application types are as follows:
Voice – For use by dedicated IP Telephony handsets and other similar
appliances supporting interactive voice services. These devices are typically
deployed on a separate VLAN for ease of deployment and enhanced
security by isolation from data applications.
Voice Signaling – For use in network topologies that require a different
policy for the voice signaling than for the voice media.
Guest Voice – Supports a separate limited feature–set voice service for
guest users and visitors with their own IP Telephony handsets and other
similar appliances supporting interactive voice services.
Guest Voice Signaling – For use in network topologies that require a
different policy for the guest voice signaling than for the guest voice media.
Softphone Voice – For use by softphone applications on typical data-centric
devices, such as PCs or laptops.
Video Conferencing – For use by dedicated video conferencing equipment
and other similar appliances supporting real–time interactive video/audio
services.
Streaming Video – For use by broadcast or multicast based video content
278 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Object Description
distribution and other similar applications supporting streaming video
services that require specific network policy treatment. Video applications
relying on TCP with buffering would not be an intended use of this
application type.
Video Signaling – For use in network topologies that require a separate
policy for the video signaling than for the video media.
Policy Policy indicates that an Endpoint Device wants to explicitly advertise that
the policy is required by the device. Can be either Defined or Unknown.
Unknown: The network policy for the specified application type is currently
unknown.
Defined: The network policy is defined.
TAG TAG is indicating whether the specified application type is using a tagged or
an untagged VLAN. Can be Tagged or Untagged.
Untagged: The device is using an untagged frame format and as such does
not include a tag header as defined by IEEE 802.1Q-2003.
Tagged: The device is using the IEEE 802.1Q tagged frame format.
VLAN ID VLAN ID is the VLAN identifier (VID) for the port as defined in IEEE 802.1Q-
2003. A value of 1 through 4094 is used to define a valid VLAN ID. A value
of 0 (Priority Tagged) is used if the device is using priority tagged frames as
defined by IEEE 802.1Q-2003, meaning that only the IEEE 802.1D priority
level is significant and the default PVID of the ingress port is used instead.
Priority Priority is the Layer 2 priority to be used for the specified application type.
One of eight priority levels (0 through 7).
DSCP DSCP is the DSCP value to be used to provide Diffserv node behavior for
the specified application type as defined in IETF RFC 2474. Contain one of
64 code point values (0 through 63).
Auto-negotiation Auto-negotiation identifies if MAC/PHY auto-negotiation is supported by the
link partner.
Auto-negotiation
status Auto-negotiation status identifies if auto-negotiation is currently enabled at
the link partner. If Auto-negotiation is supported and Auto-negotiation
status is disabled, the 802.3 PMD operating mode will be determined by the
operational MAU type field value rather than by auto-negotiation.
Buttons
• Click Auto-refresh to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs
every three seconds.
• Click Refresh to refresh the page immediately.
Neighbor
The LLDP Neighbor Information page provides a status overview for all LLDP
neighbors. The displayed table contains a row for each port on which an LLDP
neighbor is detected.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 279
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Local Port The port on which the LLDP frame was received.
Chassis ID The identification of the neighbor's LLDP frames.
Port ID The identification of the neighbor port.
Port Description The port description advertised by the neighbor unit.
System Name The name advertised by the neighbor unit.
System Capabilities System Capabilities describes the neighbor unit's capabilities. The possible
capabilities are:
1. Other
2. Repeater
3. Bridge
4. WLAN Access Point
5. Router
6. Telephone
7. DOCSIS cable device
8. Station only
9. Reserved
When a capability is enabled, the capability is followed by (+). If the
capability is disabled, the capability is followed by (-).
Management
Address The neighbor unit's address that is used for higher layer entities to assist the
discovery by the network management. This could, for instance, hold the
neighbor's IP address.
Buttons
• Click Auto-refresh to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs
every three seconds.
• Click Refresh to refresh the page immediately.
Port statistics
The LLDP Global/Statistics Local Counters page provides an overview of all LLDP
traffic. Two types of counters are shown. Global counters are counters that refer to the
switch, while local counters refers to counters for the currently selected switch.
280 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Global counters
Object Description
Neighbor entries
were last changed Shows the time when the last entry was last deleted or added. It also shows
the time elapsed since the last change was detected.
Total Neighbors
Entries Added Shows the number of new entries added since switch reboot.
Total Neighbors
Entries Deleted Shows the number of new entries deleted since switch reboot.
Total Neighbors
Entries Dropped Shows the number of LLDP frames dropped due to the entry table being full.
Total Neighbors
Entries Aged Out Shows the number of entries deleted due to Time-To-Live expiring.
LLDP statistics local counters
The displayed table contains a row for each port. The columns hold the following
information:
Object Description
Local Port The port on which LLDP frames are received or transmitted.
Tx Frames The number of LLDP frames transmitted on the port.
Rx Frames The number of LLDP frames received on the port.
Rx Errors The number of received LLDP frames containing some kind of error.
Frames Discarded If an LLDP frame is received on a port, and the switch's internal table has
run full, the LLDP frame is counted and discarded. This situation is known as
"Too Many Neighbors" in the LLDP standard. LLDP frames require a new
entry in the table when the Chassis ID or Remote Port ID is not already
contained within the table. Entries are removed from the table when a given
port links down, an LLDP shutdown frame is received, or when the entry
ages out.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 281
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Object Description
TLVs Discarded Each LLDP frame can contain multiple pieces of information, known as TLVs
(TLV is short for "Type Length Value"). If a TLV is malformed, it is counted
and discarded.
TLVs Unrecognized The number of well-formed TLVs, but with an unknown type value.
Org. Discarded The number of organizationally TLVs received.
Age-Outs Each LLDP frame contains information about how long time the LLDP
information is valid (age-out time). If no new LLDP frame is received within
the age out time, the LLDP information is removed, and the Age-Out counter
is incremented.
Buttons
• Click Auto-refresh to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs
every three seconds.
• Click Refresh to refresh the page immediately.
• Click Clear to clear the local counters. All counters (including global counters) are
cleared upon reboot.
Network diagnostics
This section provides the physical layer and IP layer network diagnostics tools for
troubleshooting. The diagnostic tools are designed for network managers to help them
quickly diagnose problems and better service customers.
Use the Diagnostics menu items to display and configure basic administrative details of
the managed switch. Under System, the following topics are provided to configure and
view the system information:
• Ping
• IPv6 Ping
• Remote IP Ping
• Cable Diagnostics
Ping
The ping and IPv6 ping permit the issuance of ICMP PING packets to troubleshoot IP
connectivity issues. The managed switch transmits ICMP packets, and the sequence
number and roundtrip time are displayed upon reception of a reply.
Cable diagnostics
Cable diagnostics performs tests on copper cables. These functions have the ability to
identify the cable length and operating conditions, and to isolate a variety of common
faults that can occur on the Cat5 twisted-pair cabling. There might be two states, which
are as follows:
282 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
• If the link is established on the twisted-pair interface in 1000BASE-T mode, the
cable diagnostics can run without disruption of the link or of any data transfer.
• If the link is established in 100BASE-TX or 10BASE-T, the cable diagnostics cause
the link to drop while the diagnostics are running.
After the diagnostics are finished, the link is re-established and the following functions
are available.
• Coupling between cable pairs
• Cable pair termination
• Cable Length
Ping
The ICMP Ping page allows you to issue ICMP ping packets to troubleshoot IP
connectivity issues.
After clicking Start, five ICMP packets are transmitted, and the sequence number and
roundtrip time are displayed upon reception of a reply. The page refreshes
automatically until responses to all packets are received, or until a timeout occurs.
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
IP Address The destination IP Address.
Ping Length The payload size of the ICMP packet. Values range from 2 bytes to 1452
bytes.
Note: Be sure the target IP address is within the same network subnet of the managed
switch, otherwise the correct gateway IP address must be set up.
Buttons
• Click Start to transmit ICMP packets.
• Click New Ping to re-start diagnostics with ping.
IPv6 ping
The ICMPv6 Ping page allows you to issue ICMPv6 ping packets to troubleshoot IPv6
connectivity issues. After clicking Start, five ICMPv6 packets are transmitted, and the
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 283
Chapter 4: Web configuration
sequence number and roundtrip time are displayed upon reception of a reply. The page
refreshes automatically until responses to all packets are received, or until a timeout
occurs.
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
IP Address The destination IP address.
Ping Length The payload size of the ICMP packet. Values range from 2 bytes to 1452
bytes.
Egress Interface The VLAN ID (VID) of the specific egress IPv6 interface to which the ICMP
packet goes. The given VID ranges from 1 to 4094 and will be effective only
when the corresponding IPv6 interface is valid. When the egress interface is
not provided, PING6 finds the best match interface for destination.
Do not specify an egress interface for loopback addresses.
Do specify an egress interface for link-local or multicast addresses.
Buttons
• Click Start to transmit ICMP packets.
• Click New Ping to re-start diagnostics with ping.
Remote IP ping test
This Remote ICMP Ping Test page allows you to issue ICMP PING packets to
troubleshoot IP connectivity issues on a special port. After clicking Test, five ICMP
packets are transmitted, and the sequence number and roundtrip time are displayed
upon reception of a reply. The page refreshes automatically until responses to all
packets are received, or until a timeout occurs.
284 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Port The logical port for the settings.
Remote IP Address The destination IP address.
Ping Size The payload size of the ICMP packet. Values range from 8 bytes to 1400
bytes.
Result Display the ping result.
Buttons
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
• Click Clear to clear the IP address and the result of the ping value.
Cable diagnostics
The VeriPHY Cable Diagnostics page is used for running cable diagnostics.
Click Start to run the diagnostics. This will take approximately five seconds. If all ports
are selected, this can take approximately 15 seconds. When completed, the page
refreshes automatically, and the cable diagnostics results appear in the cable status
table. Note that cable diagnostics is only accurate for cables of 7–140 meters in length.
10 and 100 Mbps ports are linked down while running cable diagnostics. Therefore,
running cable diagnostics on a 10 or 100 Mbps management port causes the switch to
stop responding until VeriPHY is complete. The ports belong to the current unit, as
reflected by the page header.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 285
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Port The port where you are requesting cable diagnostics.
Description Display per port description.
Cable Status Port:
Port number.
Pair:
The status of the cable pair.
OK - Correctly terminated pair
Open - Open pair
Short - Shorted pair
Short A - Cross-pair short to pair A
Short B - Cross-pair short to pair B
Short C - Cross-pair short to pair C
Short D - Cross-pair short to pair D
Cross A - Abnormal cross-pair coupling with pair A
Cross B - Abnormal cross-pair coupling with pair B
Cross C - Abnormal cross-pair coupling with pair C
Cross D - Abnormal cross-pair coupling with pair D
Length:
The length (in meters) of the cable pair. The resolution is 3 meters
Buttons
• Click Start to run the diagnostics.
Loop protection
This section describes the enable loop protection function that provides loop protection
to prevent broadcast loops in the managed switch.
286 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Loop protection configuration
The Loop Protection Configuration page allows the user to inspect and change the
current loop protection configurations.
This page includes the following fields:
General settings
Object Description
Enable Loop
Protection Controls whether loop protections is enabled (as a whole).
Transmission Time The interval between each loop protection PDU sent on each port. Valid
values are 1 to 10 seconds.
Shutdown Time The period (in seconds) for which a port will be kept disabled in the event
that a loop is detected and the port action shuts down the port. Valid values
are 0 to 604800 seconds (seven days). A value of zero keeps a port
disabled until the next device restart.
Port configuration
Object Description
Port The switch port number.
Enable Controls loop protection enable/disable on this switch port.
Action Configures the action performed when a loop is detected on a port.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 287
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Object Description
Selections include Shutdown Port, Shutdown Port and Log or Log Only.
Tx Mode Controls if the port is actively generating loop protection PDUs or if it is just
passively looking for looped PDU's.
Buttons
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
Loop protection status
The Loop Protection Status page shows the loop protection port status of the switch.
This page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Port The port number of the logical port.
Action The currently configured port action.
Transmit The currently configured port transmit mode.
Loops The number of loops detected on this port.
Status The current loop protection status of the port.
Loop Indicates if a loop is currently detected on the port.
Time of Last Loop The time of the last loop event detected.
Buttons
• Click Auto-refresh to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs
every three seconds.
• Click Refresh to refresh the page immediately.
RMON
RMON is an expansion of standard SNMP. RMON is a set of MIB definitions used to
define standard network monitor functions and interfaces, enabling communication
288 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
between SNMP management terminals and remote monitors. RMON provides a highly
efficient method to monitor actions inside the subnets.
The MID of RMON consists of 10 groups. The switch supports the most frequently used
groups:
• Statistics: Maintain basic usage and error statistics for each subnet monitored by
the agent.
• History: Record periodical statistic samples.
• Alarm: Allow management console users to set any count or integer for sample
intervals and alert thresholds for RMON agent records.
• Event: A list of all events generated by the RMON agent.
Alarm depends on the implementation of an event. Statistics and History display
current or history subnet statistics. Alarm and Event provide a method to monitor any
integer data change in the network, and provide some alerts upon abnormal events
(sending Trap or record in logs).
RMON alarm configuration
Configure RMON alarm table on the RMON Alarm Configuration page. The entry index
key is ID.
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Delete Select the Delete check box to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the
next save.
ID Indicates the index of the entry. The range is from 1 to 65535.
Interval Indicates the interval in seconds for sampling and comparing the rising and
falling threshold. The range is from 1 to 2^31-1.
Variable Indicates the particular variable to be sampled. The possible variables are:
InOctets: The total number of octets received on the interface, including
framing characters.
InUcastPkts: The number of uni-cast packets delivered to a higher-layer
protocol.
InNUcastPkts: The number of broadcast and multicast packets delivered to
a higher-layer protocol.
InDiscards: The number of inbound packets that are discarded when the
packets are normal.
InErrors: The number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 289
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Object Description
them from being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol.
InUnknownProtos: The number of inbound packets that were discarded
because of an unknown or unsupported protocol.
OutOctets: The number of octets transmitted out of the interface, including
framing characters.
OutUcastPkts: The number of unicast packets that requested to transmit.
OutNUcastPkts: The number of broadcast and multicast packets that
requested to transmit.
OutDiscards: The number of outbound packets that are discarded when the
packets are normal.
OutErrors: The number of outbound packets that could not be transmitted
because of errors.
OutQLen: The length of the output packet queue (in packets).
Sample Type The method of sampling the selected variable and calculating the value to be
compared against the thresholds. Possible sample types are:
Absolute: Get the sample directly.
Delta: Calculate the difference between samples (default).
Value The value of the statistic during the last sampling period.
Startup Alarm The method of sampling the selected variable and calculating the value to be
compared against the thresholds. Possible sample types are:
Rising: Triggers alarm when the first value is larger than the rising threshold.
Falling: Triggers alarm when the first value is less than the falling threshold.
RisingOrFalling: Triggers alarm when the first value is larger than the rising
threshold or less than the falling threshold (default).
Rising Threshold Rising threshold value (-2147483648-2147483647).
Rising Index Rising event index (1-65535).
Falling Threshold Falling threshold value (-2147483648-2147483647)
Falling Index Falling event index (1-65535).
Buttons
• Click Add New Entry to add a new community entry.
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
RMON alarm status
The RMON Alarm Overview page provides an overview of RMON Alarm entries. Each
page shows up to 99 entries from the Alarm table (default is 20 entries per page). The
range of entries per page can be typed into the Start from Control Index and entries
per page fields. When initially accessing the page, it shows the first 20 entries from the
beginning of the Alarm table. The first entry shown will be the one with the lowest ID
found in the Alarm table.
290 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
ID Indicates the index of alarm control entry.
Interval Indicates the interval in seconds for sampling and comparing the rising and
falling threshold.
Variable Indicates the particular variable to be sampled
Sample Type The method of sampling the selected variable and calculating the value to be
compared against the thresholds.
Value The value of the statistic during the last sampling period.
Startup Alarm The alarm that may be sent when this entry is first set to valid.
Rising Threshold Rising threshold value.
Rising Index Rising event index.
Falling Threshold Falling threshold value.
Falling Index Falling event index.
Buttons
• Click Refresh to refresh the page immediately.
• Click the Auto-refresh check box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic
refresh occurs every three seconds.
• Click I<< to update the table starting from the first entry in the alarm table (i.e., the
entry with the lowest ID).
• Click >> to update the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently
displayed.
RMON event configuration
Configure the RMON Event table on the RMON Event Configuration page. The entry
index key is ID.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 291
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Delete Select to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
ID Indicates the index of the entry. The range is from 1 to 65535.
Desc Indicates the event. The string length is from 0 to 127, default is a null string.
Type Indicates the notification of the event. The possible types are:
none: The total number of octets received on the interface, including framing
characters.
log: The number of unicast packets delivered to a higher-layer protocol.
snmptrap: The number of broadcast and multicast packets delivered to a
higher-layer protocol.
logandtrap: The number of inbound packets that are discarded when the
packets are normal.
Community Specify the community when trap is sent. The string length is from 0 to 127,
default is "public."
Event Last Time Indicates the value of sysUpTime at the time this event entry last generated
an event.
Buttons
• Click Add New Entry to add a new community entry.
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
RMON event status
The RMON Event Overview page provides an overview of RMON Event table entries.
Each page shows up to 99 entries from the Event table (default is 20 entries per page).
The range of entries per page can be typed into the Start from Control Index and
entries per page fields. When initially accessing the page, it shows the first 20 entries
from the beginning of the Event table. The first entry shown will be the one with the
lowest ID found in the Event table
292 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Event Index Indicates the index of the event entry.
Log Index Indicates the index of the log entry.
LogTime Indicates event log time.
LogDescription Indicates the event description.
Buttons
• Click Refresh to refresh the page immediately.
• Click the Auto-refresh check box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic
refresh occurs every three seconds.
• Click I<< to update the table starting from the first entry in the alarm table (i.e., the
entry with the lowest ID).
• Click >> to update the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently
displayed.
RMON history configuration
Configure RMON History on the RMON History Configuration page. The entry index
key is ID.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 293
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Delete Select to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
ID Indicates the index of the entry. The range is from 1 to 65535.
Data Source Indicates the port ID to be monitored. If in the switch, the value must add
1000*(switch ID-1). For example, if the port is switch 3 port 5, the value is
2005.
Interval Indicates the interval in seconds for sampling the history statistics data. The
range is from 1 to 3600, default value is 1800 seconds.
Buckets Indicates the maximum data entries associated with this history control entry
stored in RMON. The range is from 1 to 3600, default value is 50.
Buckets Granted The number of data to be saved in the RMON.
Buttons
• Click Add New Entry to add a new community entry.
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
RMON history status
The RMON History Overview page provides details of RMON history entries.
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
History Index Indicates the index of history control entry.
Sample Index Indicates the index of the data entry associated with the control entry.
Sample Start The value of sysUpTime at the start of the interval over which this sample
was measured.
Drop The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due
to lack of resources.
294 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Object Description
Octets The total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) received
on the network.
Pkts The total number of packets (including bad packets, broadcast packets, and
multicast packets) received.
Broadcast The total number of good packets received that were directed to the
broadcast address.
Multicast The total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast
address.
CRC Errors The total number of packets received that had a length (excluding framing
bits, but including FCS octets) of between 64 and 1518 octets inclusive, but
had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of
octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets
(Alignment Error).
Undersize The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets.
Oversize The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets.
Frag. The number of frames with a size less than 64 octets received with invalid
CRC.
Jabb. The number of frames with a size larger than 64 octets received with invalid
CRC.
Coll. The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment.
Utilization The best estimate of the mean physical layer network utilization on this
interface during this sampling interval, in hundredths of a percent.
Buttons
• Click Refresh to refresh the page immediately.
• Click the Auto-refresh check box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic
refresh occurs every three seconds.
• Click I<< to update the table starting from the first entry in the alarm table (i.e., the
entry with the lowest ID).
• Click >> to update the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently
displayed.
RMON statistics configuration
Configure the RMON Statistics table on the RMON Statistics Configuration page. The
entry index key is ID.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 295
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Delete Select to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
ID Indicates the index of the entry. The range is from 1 to 65535.
Data Source Indicates the port ID to be monitored. If in the switch, the value must add
1000*(switch ID-1). For example, if the port is switch 3 port 5, the value is
2005.
Buttons
• Click Add New Entry to add a new community entry.
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
RMON statistics status
The RMON Statistics Status Overview page provides an overview of RMON Statistics
entries. Each page shows up to 99 entries from the Statistics table (default is 20 entries
per page). The range of entries per page can be typed into the Start from Control
Index and entries per page fields. When initially accessing the page, it shows the first
20 entries from the beginning of the Statistics table. The first entry shown will be the
one with the lowest ID found in the Statistics table
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
ID Indicates the index of statistics entry.
Data Source (ifIndex) The port ID to be monitored.
Drop The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due
to lack of resources.
Octets The total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) received
on the network.
Pkts The total number of packets (including bad packets, broadcast packets, and
multicast packets) received.
Broadcast The total number of good packets received that were directed to the
broadcast address.
296 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Object Description
Multicast The total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast
address.
CRC Errors The total number of packets received that had a length (excluding framing
bits, but including FCS octets) of between 64 and 1518 octets.
Undersize The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets.
Oversize The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets.
Frag. The number of frames with a size less than 64 octets received with invalid
CRC.
Jabb. The number of frames with a size larger than 64 octets received with invalid
CRC.
Coll. The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment.
64 Bytes The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were 64
octets in length.
65~127 The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were
between 65 to 127 octets in length.
128~255 The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were
between 128 to 255 octets in length.
256~511 The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were
between 256 to 511 octets in length.
512~1023 The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were
between 512 to 1023 octets in length.
1024~1518 The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were
between 1024 to 1518 octets in length.
Buttons
• Click Refresh to refresh the page immediately.
• Click the Auto-refresh check box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic
refresh occurs every three seconds.
• Click I<< to update the table starting from the first entry in the alarm table (i.e., the
entry with the lowest ID).
• Click >> to update the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently
displayed.
Ring
ITU-T G.8032 Ethernet Ring Protection Switching (ERPS) is a link layer protocol
applied on Ethernet loop protection to provide sub-50 ms protection and recovery
switching for Ethernet traffic in a ring topology.
ERPS provides a faster redundant recovery than Spanning Tree topology. The action is
similar to STP or RSTP, but the algorithms between them are not the same. In the ring
topology, every switch should be enabled with the ring function and two ports should be
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 297
Chapter 4: Web configuration
assigned as the member ports in the ERPS. Only one switch in the ring group would be
set as the RPL owner switch in which one port (the owner port) would be blocked, and
the PRL neighbour switch has one port (the neighbor port) that would be blocked. The
neighbor port is connected to the owner port directly and this link is called the Ring
Protection Link (RPL). Each switch sends an ETH-CCM message to check the link
status in the ring group. When the failure of a network connection occurs, the nodes
block the failed link and report the signal failure message. The RPL owner switch will
automatically unblock the PRL to recover from the failure.
298 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
MEP configuration
Maintenance entity point instances are configured in the Maintenance Entity Point
page.
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Delete Select this check box to mark an MEP for deletion in the next save
operation.
Instance The ID of the MEP. Click on the ID of an MEP to enter the configuration
page.
Domain Port: This is an MEP in the Port Domain. 'Flow Instance' is a Port.
Esp: Future use
Evc: This is an MEP in the EVC Domain. 'Flow Instance' is an EVC.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 299
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Object Description
Mpls: Future use
Mode MEP: This is a Maintenance Entity End Point.
MIP: This is a Maintenance Entity Intermediate Point.
Direction Ingress: This is an ingress (down) MEP monitoring ingress traffic on the
Residence Port.
Egress: This is an egress (up) MEP monitoring egress traffic on the
Residence Port.
Residence Port The port where MEP is monitoring. See Direction.
Level The MEG level of this MEP.
Flow Instance The MEP is related to this flow. See Domain.
Tagged VID Port MEP: An outer C/S-tag (depending on VLAN port type) is added with
this VID.
Entering '0' means no TAG added.
This MAC The MAC of this MEP can be used by other MEPs when unicast is selected
(Info only).
Alarm There is an active alarm on the MEP.
Buttons
• Click Add New MEP to add a new MEP entry.
• Click Refresh to refresh the page immediately.
• Click Save to save changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
Detailed MEP configuration
This page allows the user to inspect and configure the current MEP instance.
300 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Instance data
Object Description
MEP Instance The ID of the MEP.
Domain Click Help when on the MEP web page.
Mode Click Help when on the MEP web page.
Direction Click Help when on the MEP web page.
Residence Port Click Help when on the MEP web page.
Flow Instance Click Help when on the MEP web page.
Tagged VID Click Help when on the MEP web page.
This MAC Click Help when on the MEP web page.
Instance configuration
Object Description
Level Click Help when on the MEP web page.
Format This is the configuration of the two possible Maintenance Association
Identifier formats.
ITU ICC: This is defined by ITU. 'ICC' can be a maximum of six characters.
'MEG id' can be a maximum of seven characters.
IEEE String: This is defined by IEEE. 'Domain Name' can be a maximum of
eight characters. 'MEG id' can be a maximum of eight characters.
ICC/Domain Name This is either ITU ICC (MEG ID value[1-6]) or IEEE Maintenance Domain
Name, depending on 'Format'. See Format.
MEG Id This is either ITU UMC (MEG ID value[7-13]) or IEEE Short MA Name,
depending on 'Format'. See Format. In the case of ITU ICC formatting, this
can be a maximum of seven characters. If only six characters are entered,
the MEG ID value[13] will become NULL.
MEP Id This value will become the transmitted two byte CCM MEP ID.
cLevel Fault cause indicating that a CCM is received with a lower level than
configured for this MEP.
cMEG Fault cause indicating that a CCM is received with an MEG ID different from
what is configured for this MEP.
cMEP Fault cause indicating that a CCM is received with an MEP ID different from
all 'Peer MEP IDs' configured for this MEP.
cAIS Fault cause indicating that AIS PDU is received.
cLCK Fault cause indicating that LCK PDU is received.
cSSF Fault cause indicating that the server layer is indicating Signal Fail.
aBLK The consequent action of blocking service frames in this flow is active.
aTSF The consequent action of indicating Trail Signal Fail protection is active.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 301
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Object Description
Delete Select this check box to mark a Peer MEP for deletion in the next save
operation.
Peer MEP ID This value will become an expected MEP ID in a received CCM. See cMEP.
Unicast Peer MAC This MAC will be used when unicast is selected with this peer MEP. Also this
MAC is used to create HW checking of the receiving CCM PDU (LOC
detection) from this MEP.
cLOC Fault cause indicating that no CCM has been received (in 3,5 periods) from
this peer MEP.
cRDI Fault cause indicating that a CCM is received with Remote Defect Indication
from this peer MEP.
cPeriod Fault cause indicating that a CCM is received from this peer MEP with a
period different from what is configured for this MEP.
cPriority Fault cause indicating that a CCM is received from this peer MEP with a
priority different from what is configured for this MEP.
Buttons
• Click Add New Peer MEP to add a new peer MEP.
Functional configuration
Instance data
Object Description
Enable Continuity check based on transmitting/receiving CCM PDU that can be
enabled/disabled. The CCM PDU is always transmitted as Multicast Class 1.
Priority The priority to be inserted as PCP bits in a TAG (if any). In case of enabling
continuity check and loss measurement both implemented on SW based
CCM, 'Priority' has to be the same.
Frame rate Selects the frame rate of CCM PDU. This is the inverse of the transmission
period as described in Y.1731. This value has the following uses:
• The transmission rate of the CCM PDU.
• Fault cause cLOC is declared if no CCM PDU has been received within
3.5 periods - see 'cLOC'.
• Fault cause cPeriod is declared if a CCM PDU has been received with
different period - see 'cPeriod'.
Selecting 300f/sec or 100f/sec will configure HW based CCM (if possible).
Selecting other frame rates will configure SW-based CCM. In case of
enabling continuity check and loss measurement both implemented on SW
based CCM, 'Frame Rate' has to be the same.
APS protocol
Object Description
Enable Automatic Protection Switching protocol information transportation based on
transmitting/receiving R-APS/L-APS PDU can be enabled/disabled. APS
must be enabled to support ERPS/ELPS implementing APS. This is only
valid with one peer MEP configured.
302 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Object Description
Priority The priority to be inserted as PCP bits in TAG (if any).
Cast Selection of APS PDU transmitted unicast or multicast. The unicast MAC will
be taken from the 'Unicast Peer MAC' configuration. Unicast is only valid for
L-APS. See Type. The R-APS PDU is always transmitted with multicast
MAC as described in G.8032.
Type R-APS: APS PDU is transmitted as R-APS. This is for ERPS.
L-APS: APS PDU is transmitted as L-APS. This is for ELPS.
Last Octet This is the last octet of the transmitted and expected RAPS multicast MAC.
In G.8031 (03/2010) a RAPS multi-cast MAC is defined as 01-19-A7-00-00-
XX. In the current standard the value for this last octet is '01' and the usage
of other values is for further study.
Buttons
• Click Fault Management to go to the Fault Management page.
• Click Performance Monitoring to go to the Performance Monitor page.
• Click Refresh to refresh the page immediately.
• Click Save to save changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
Ethernet Ring Protocol Switch (ERPS)
Configure the Ethernet ring protection switch instances on the Ethernet Ring Protection
Switching page.
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Delete Select this check box to mark an ERPS for deletion in the next save
operation.
Port 0 This creates a Port 0 of the switch in the ring.
Port 1 This creates "Port 1" of the switch in the Ring. As the interconnected sub-
ring will have only one ring port, "Port 1" is configured as "0" for the
interconnected sub-ring. "0" in this field indicates that no "Port 1" is
associated with this instance
Port 0 SF MEP The Port 0 Signal Fail reporting MEP.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 303
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Object Description
Port 1 SF MEP The Port 1 Signal Fail reporting MEP. As only one SF MEP is associated
with the interconnected sub-ring without a virtual channel, it is configured as
"0" for such ring instances. "0" in this field indicates that no Port 1 SF MEP is
associated with this instance.
Port 0 APS MEP The Port 0 APS PDU handling MEP.
Port 1 APS MEP The Port 1 APS PDU handling MEP. As only one APS MEP is associated
with the interconnected sub-ring without a virtual channel, it is configured as
"0" for such ring instances. "0" in this field indicates that no Port 1 APS MEP
is associated with this instance.
Ring Type Type of protecting ring. It can be either major ring or sub-ring.
Major Ring ID Major ring group ID for the interconnected sub-ring. It is used to send
topology change updates on the major ring. If the ring is major, this value is
the same as the protection group ID of this ring.
Alarm There is an active alarm on the ERPS.
Buttons
• Click Add New Protection Group to add a new protection group entry.
• Click Refresh to refresh the page immediately.
• Click Save to save changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
ERPS configuration
This page allows the user to inspect and configure the current ERPS instance.
The page includes the following fields:
304 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Instance data
Object Description
ERPS ID The ID of the protection group.
Port 0 Click Help when on the ERPS web page.
Port 1 Click Help when on the ERPS web page.
Port 0 SF MEP Click Help when on the ERPS web page.
Port 1 SF MEP Click Help when on the ERPS web page.
Port 0 APS MEP Click Help when on the ERPS web page.
Port 1 APS MEP Click Help when on the ERPS web page.
Ring Type Type of protected ring. It can be either major ring or sub-ring.
Instance configuration
Object Description
Configuration Red: This ERPS is only created, has not yet been configured, and is not
active.
Green: This ERPS is configured and is active.
Guard Time Guard timeout value to be used to prevent ring nodes from receiving
outdated R-APS messages.
The period of the guard timer can be configured in 10 ms steps between 10
ms and 2 seconds, with a default value of 500 ms.
WTR Time The wait to restore timing value to be used in revertive switching.
The period of the WTR time can be configured by the operator in 1 minute
steps between 5 and 12 minutes with a default value of 5 minutes.
Hold Off Time The timing value to be used to make persistent check on Signal Fail before
switching.
The range of the hold off timer is 0 to 10 seconds in steps of 100 ms.
Version ERPS Protocol Version - v1 or v2.
Revertive In revertive mode, after the conditions causing a protection switch has
cleared, the traffic channel is restored to the working transport entity (i.e.,
blocked on the RPL).
In non-revertive mode, the traffic channel continues to use the RPL, if it has
not failed, after a protection switch condition has cleared.
VLAN Config VLAN configuration of the Protection Group. Click on the VLAN Config link to
configure VLANs for this protection group.
PRL configuration
Object Description
PRL Role It can be either RPL owner or RPL neighbor.
PRL Port Permits selection of the east port or west port as the RPL block.
Clear If the owner has to be changed, then the Clear check box allows clearing the
RPL owner for that ERPS ring.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 305
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Instance command
Object Description
Command Administrative command. A port can be administratively configured to be in
either manual switch or forced switch state.
Port Port selection – Port 0 or Port 1 of the protection group on which the
command is applied.
Instance state
Object Description
Protection State ERPS state according to the state transition tables in G.8032.
Port 0 OK: State of East port is OK.
SF: State of East port is Signal Fail.
Port 1 OK: State of West port is OK.
SF: State of West port is Signal Fail.
Transmit APS The transmitted APS according to the state transition tables in G.8032.
Port 0 Receive APS The received APS on Port 0 according to the state transition tables in
G.8032.
Port 1 Receive APS The received APS on Port 1 according to the state transition tables in
G.8032.
WTR Remaining Remaining WTR timeout in milliseconds.
RPL Un-blocked APS is received on the working flow.
No APS Received RAPS PDU is not received from the other end.
Port 0 Block Status Block status for Port 0 (both traffic and R-APS block status). R-APS channel
is never blocked on sub-rings without a virtual channel.
Port 1 Block Status Block status for Port 1 (both traffic and R-APS block status). R-APS channel
is never blocked on sub-rings without a virtual channel.
FOP Alarm Failure of Protocol Defect (FOP) status. If FOP is detected, a red LED
illuminates, otherwise a green LED illuminates.
Buttons
• Select the Auto-refresh check box to refresh the page automatically. Automaticc
refresh occurs every six seconds.
• Click Refresh to refresh the page immediately.
• Click Save to save changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
Ring wizard
Configure ERPS using a wizard on the Ring Wizard page.
306 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Instance data
Object Description
All Switch Numbers Set all the switch numbers for the ring group. The default number is 3 and
maximum number is 30.
Number ID The switch where you are requesting ERPS.
Port Configures the port number for the MEP.
VLAN Set the ERPS VLAN.
Buttons
• Click Next to configure ERPS.
• Click Set to save changes.
• Click Save Topology to show the ring topology.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 307
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Ring wizard example
The above topology often occurs when using the ERPS protocol. The multiswitch
constitutes a single ERPS ring; all of the switches are only configured as an ERPS in
VLAN 3001, thereby constituting a single MRPP ring.
Switch ID
Port MEP ID RPL Type VLAN Group
Switch 1
Port 1 1 None 3001
Port 2 2 Owner 3001
Switch 2
Port 1 4 None 3001
Port 2 3 Neighbor 3001
Switch 3
Port 1 6 None 3001
Port 2 5 None 3001
The scenario is described as follows:
1. Disable the DHCP client and set a proper static IP for switch 1, 2, and 3. In this
example, switch 1 is 192.168.0.101, switch 2 is 192.168.0.102, and switch 3 is
192.168.0.103.
2. On switch 1, 2, and 3, disable STP to avoid a conflict with ERPS.
Setup steps
Set ERPS configuration on switch 1
1. Connect a PC directly to switch 1. Do not connect to port 1 or 2.
308 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
2. Log in to switch 1 and select Ring > Ring Wizard.
3. Set “All Switch Number” = 3 and “Number ID” = 1. Click Next to set the ERPS
configuration for switch 1.
4. Set “MEP1” = Port 1, “MEP2” = Port 2, and VLAN ID = 3001. Click Set to save the
ERPS configuration for switch 1.
Set ERPS configuration on switch 2
1. Connect a PC directly to switch 2. Do not connect to port 1 or 2.
2. Log in to switch 2 and select Ring > Ring Wizard.
3. Set “All Switch Number” = 3 and “Number ID” = 2. Click Next to set the ERPS
configuration for switch 2.
4. Set “MEP3” = Port 2, “MEP4” = Port 1, and VLAN ID = 3001. Click Set to save the
ERPS configuration for switch 2.
Set ERPS configuration on switch 3
1. Connect a PC directly to switch 3. Do not connect to port 1 or 2.
2. Log in to switch 3 and select Ring > Ring Wizard.
3. Set “All Switch Number” = 3 and “Number ID” = 3. Click Next to set the ERPS
configuration for switch 3.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 309
Chapter 4: Web configuration
4. Set “MEP5” = Port 2, “MEP6” = Port 1, and VLAN ID = 3001. Click Set to save the
ERPS configuration for switch 3.
To avoid a loop, do not connect switches 1, 2, and 3 together in the ring topology
before configuring the end of ERPS.
Follow the configuration or ERPS wizard to connect switch 1, 2, and 3 together to
establish ERPS application:
• MEP2 ←→ MEP3 = Switch 1 / Port 2 ←→ Switch 2 / Port 2
• MEP4 ←→ MEP5 = Switch 2 / Port 1 ←→ Switch 3 / Port 2
• MEP1 ←→ MEP6 = Switch 1 / Port 1 ←→ Switch 3 / Port 1
Power over Ethernet (PoE)
Providing up to 24 PoE in-line power interfaces, the managed switch can easily build a
power central-controlled IP phone system, IP camera system, and Access Point (AP)
group for the enterprise. For example, 24 cameras/APs can be installed for company
surveillance demands, or to build a wireless roaming environment in the office. Without
power-socket limitation, the managed switch makes the installation of cameras or
WLAN APs simple and efficient.
PoE Powered Devices (PD)
3~5 Watts
Voice over IP phones
Enterprises can install POE VoIP phones, ATA, and other
Ethernet/non-Ethernet end-devices to the central location where
UPS is installed for uninterrupted power systems and power
control systems.
6~12 Watts
Wireless LAN Access Points
Museums, airports, hotels, campuses, factories, warehouses,
etc. can install APs in any location.
10~12 Watts
IP Surveillance
Enterprises, museums, campuses, hospitals, banks, etc. can
install IP cameras regardless of installation location without the
need to install AC sockets.
310 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
3~12 Watts
PoE Splitter
PoE splitters split the PoE 52 VDC over the Ethernet cable into
a
5/12 VDC power output. It frees the device deployment from
restrictions due to power outlet locations, which eliminate the
costs for additional AC wiring and reduces the installation time.
3~25 Watts
High Power PoE Splitter
High PoE splitters split the PoE 56 VDC over the Ethernet cable
into a 24/12V DC power output. It frees the device deployment
from restrictions due to power outlet locations, which eliminate
the costs for additional AC wiring and reduces the installation
time.
30 Watts
High Power Speed Dome
This state-of-the-art design is designed to fit into
various network
environments like traffic centers, shopping malls, railway
stations, warehouses, airports, and production facilities for the
most demanding outdoor surveillance applications without the
need to install AC sockets.
Note: Since the managed switch PoE ports support 56 VDC PoE power output, ensure
that the PD’s acceptable DC power range is from 56 VDC. Otherwise, it will damage the
PD.
In a PoE system, operating power is applied from a power source (PSU-power supply
unit) over the LAN infrastructure to powered devices (PDs), which are connected to
ports. Under some conditions, the total output power required by PDs can exceed the
maximum available power provided by the PSU. The system may include a PSU
capable of supplying less power than the total potential power consumption of all the
PoE ports in the system. To keep the majority of the ports active, power management is
implemented.
The PSU input power consumption is monitored by measuring voltage and current, and
is equal to the system’s aggregated power consumption. The power management
concept allows all ports to be active and activates additional ports, as long as the
aggregated power of the system is lower than the power level at which additional PDs
cannot be connected. When this value is exceeded, ports will be deactivated according
to user-defined priorities. The power budget is managed according to the following
user-definable parameters:
• Maximum available power
• Ports priority
• Maximum allowable power per port
There are five modes for configuring how the ports/PDs may reserve power and when
to shut down ports.
Classification mode
In this mode, each port automatically determines how much power to reserve according
to the class the connected PD belongs to, and reserves the power accordingly. Four
different port classes exist: 4, 7, 15.4, and 30.8 W.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 311
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Class
Usage Range of maximum power used by the PD Class Description
0 Default 0.44 to 12.95 W Classification unimplemented
1 Optional 0.44 to 3.84 W Very low power
2 Optional 3.84 to 6.49 W Low power
3 Optional 6.49 to 12.95 W (or to 15.4 W) Mid power
4 Optional 12.95 to 25.50 W (or to 30.8 W) High power
Note:
1. The maximum power fields have no effect in classification mode.
2. The PD69012 PoE chip is designed so that Class level 0 will be assigned to 15.4 W
by AF mode and 30.8 W by AT mode under classification power limit mode. It is
hardware limited.
Allocation mode
In this mode, the user allocates the amount of power that each port may reserve. The
allocated/reserved power for each port/PD is specified in the maximum power fields.
The ports are shut down when total reserved powered exceeds the amount of power
that the power supply can deliver.
Note: In this mode, the port power is not turned on if the PD requests more available
power.
LLDP mode
In this mode, the PoE power ports are managed and determined by LLDP Media
protocol.
PoE configuration
Inspect and configure the current PoE configuration settings on the Power over
Ethernet Configuration page.
The page includes the following fields:
312 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Object Description
System PoE Admin Mode Enables/disables the PoE function, determining whether or not the
PoE ports supply power.
PoE Temperature
Protection Enables/disables PoE temperature protection.
PoE Management Mode There are six modes for configuring how the ports/PDs may reserve
power and when to shut down ports.
Class-Consumption mode: System offers PoE power according to
PD real power consumption.
Class-Reserved-Power mode: System reserves PoE power to PD
according to PoE class level.
Allocation-Consumption mode: System offers PoE power according
to PD real power consumption.
Allocation-Reserved-Power mode: Users can assign how much PoE
power for per port and the system reserves PoE power to the PD.
LLDP-Consumption mode: System offers PoE power according to
PD real power consumption.
LLDP-Reserved-Power mode: System reserves PoE power to the
PD according to LLDP configuration.
Power Supply Budget [W] Sets the limit value of the total PoE port provided power to the PDs.
The managed switch available maximum value is 440.
Temperature Threshold Sets the temperature protection threshold value. If the system
temperature is over this value, then the system lowers the total PoE
power budget automatically.
PoE Usage Threshold Sets the PoE power budget limitation.
Buttons
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
PD classifications
A PD may be classified by the PSE based on the classification information provided by
the PD. The intent of PD classification is to provide information about the maximum
power required by the PD during operation. The PD provides a signature about Class
level to improve power management at the PSE.
The PD is classified based on power. The classification of the PD is the maximum
power that the PD draws across all input voltages and operational modes.
A PD will return to Class 0 to 4 in accordance with the maximum power draw as
specified below:
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 313
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Class
Usage Range of maximum power used by the PD Class Description
0 Default 12.95 W (or to 15.4 W for AF mode)
25.5 W (or to 30.8 W for AT mode)
Mid power or high power
1 Optional 0.44 to 3.84 W Very low power
2 Optional 3.84 to 6.49 W Low power
3 Optional 6.49 to 12.95 W (or to 15.4 W) Mid power
4 Optional 12.95 to 25.50 W (or to 30.8 W) High power
Port sequential
The Port Sequential Power up Interval page permits the user to configure the PoE
ports' start up interval time. The PoE ports start up one by one.
Note: The PoE port will start up after the system program has completely finished
running.
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Sequential Power up Option Enables/disables the sequential power-up function.
Sequential Power up Interval Configures the PoE port start up interval time.
Sequential Power up Port Option There are two modes for starting up the PoE port:
By Port: The PoE port will start up by following the port
number.
By Priority: The PoE Port will start up by following the PoE
priority.
Buttons
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
Port configuration
Inspect and configure the current PoE port settings on the PoE Ethernet Configuration
page.
314 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
PoE Mode There are three PoE modes:
Enable: Enables the PoE function.
Disable: Disables the PoE function
Schedule: Enables the PoE function in schedule mode
Schedule Indicates the schedule profile mode. Possible profiles are:
Profile1
Profile2
Profile3
Profile4
AF/AT Mode Permits the user to select 802.3at or 802.3af compatibility
mode. The default vaule is 802.3at mode.
This function affects PoE power reservation on Classification
power limit mode only. In 802.3af mode, the system is going to
reserve 15.4W maximum for the PD that supports Class 3
level. In IEEE 802.3at mode, the system is going to reserve
30.8W for the PD that supports Class 4 level.
Class 1 to Class 3 level in 802.3at mode reserves the same
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 315
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Object Description
PoE power as 802.3af mode.
Priority Priority represents PoE port priority. There are three levels of
power priority: Low, High, and Critical.
Priority is used when total power consumption is over the total
power budget. In this case, the port with the lowest priority is
turned off and power is provided to the port with higher priority.
Power Allocation Limits the port PoE supply Watts. The per port maximum value
must less than 30.8W, and total port values must less than the
power reservation value. After a power overload has been
detected, the port automatically shuts down and remains in
detection mode until the PD’s power consumption is lower than
the power limit value.
Buttons
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
316 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
PoE status
Inspect the total power consumption, total power reserved, and current status for all
PoE ports on the PoE Status page.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 317
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Sequential Power On Displays the current sequential power on mode.
System Power Budget Displays the maximum PoE power budget.
Operation mode Displays the current PoE operation mode.
Current Budget Displays the current maximum PoE budget.
Current ports in used Dispalys the current PoE in-use ports.
Class 1 ~ 4 ports Displays the current PoE class 1 ~ 4 ports.
Power Consumption Dispalys the current power consumption (total Watts and
percentage).
Reserved Power (Reserved
mode) Shows how much the total power is reserved for all PDs.
PoE Temperature Displays the current operating temperature of the first PoE chip
unit.
Chipset 1 = port 1 ~ 12
Chipset 2 = port 13 ~ 24
Current Power Consumption Shows the total W usage of the managed switch.
Local Port This is the logical port number for this row.
PD Class Displays the class of the PD attached to the port as established
by the classification process. Class 0 is the default for PDs.
The PD is powered based on PoE class level if the system is
working in classification mode. A PD will return Class to 0 to 4
in accordance with the maximum power draw as specified in
“PD classifications” on page 313.
Power Used [W] Shows how much power the PD is currently using.
Current Used [mA] Shows how much current the PD is currently using.
Priority Shows the port's priority configured by the user.
Port Status Shows the port's status.
AF / AT Mode Displays per PoE ports operating in 802.3af or 802.3at mode.
Total Shows the total power and current usage of all PDs.
Buttons
• Select the Auto-refresh check box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at
regular intervals.
• Click Refresh to refresh the page immediately.
PoE schedule
In addition to its functional use for IP surveillance, the managed switch can also be
implemented in any PoE network including VoIP and Wireless LAN. Under the trend of
energy saving worldwide and contributing to worldwide environmental protection, the
managed switch can effectively control power supply in addition to its capability to
318 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
provde high Watt power. The PoE schedule function can enable or disable PoE power
feeding for each PoE port during specified time intervals, and is a powerful function to
help SMB or Enterprises save power and reduce cost.
Scheduled power recycling
The managed switch allows each of the connected PoE IP cameras to reboot at a
specific time each week, thus reducing the chance of IP camera crashes resulting from
buffer overflow.
Define the PoE schedule and schedule power recycling on the PoE Schedule page.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 319
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Click the Add New Rule button to start setting the PoE schedule function. Click Apply
after creating a schedule for the selected profile. Then, go to the PoE Port
Configuration page and select Schedule from the PoE Mode drop-down list, and the
profile number from the Schedule drop-down list, for each port to which you want to
apply the schedule profile.
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Profile Set the schedule profile mode. Possible profiles are:
Profile1
Profile2
Profile3
Profile4
Week Day Set the weekday for enabling the PoE function.
Start Hour Set the hour for enabling the PoE function.
Start Min Set the minute for enabling the PoE function.
End Hour Set the hour for disabling the PoE function.
End Min Set the minute for disabling the PoE function.
Reboot Enable Enables or disables a PoE port reboot according to the PoE reboot schedule.
Note that if you want the PoE schedule and PoE reboot schedule to work at
the same time, use this function and do not use the Reboot Only function.
This function permits the administrator to reboot the PoE device at the
indicated time as required.
320 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Object Description
Reboot Only Permits a reboot of the PoE function according to the PoE reboot schedule.
Note that if the administrator enables this function, the PoE schedule will not
set the time to a profile. This function only applies to PoE port reset at the
indicated time.
Reboot Hour Sets the hour for PoE reboots. This function is only for the PoE reboot
schedule.
Reboot Min Sets what the minute for PoE reboots. This function is only for the PoE reboot
schedule.
Buttons
• Click Add New Rule to set the PoE schedule function.
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Delete to delete the entry.
LLDP PoE neighbors
The LLDP Neighbor PoE Information page provides a status overview for all LLDP PoE
neighbors. The displayed table contains a row for each port on which an LLDP PoE
neighbor is detected.
The administrator must enable the LLDP port in the LLDP Configuration page (see
below). In this example, the LLDP function from port 1 to port 2 was enabled. After
plugging in a PD that supports the PoE LLDP function, the PD’s PoE information
appears in the LLDP Neighbor PoE Information page.
PoE alive check configuration
The managed switch can be configured to monitor a connected PD’s status in real-time
via ping action. After the PD stops working and does not respond, the managed switch
restarts PoE port power so that the PD is once again recognized and working.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 321
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Configure PD alive check on the PD Ping Alive Check page.
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Mode Enables/disables the per port PD alive check function. All ports
are disabled by default.
Ping PD IP Address Set the PoE device IP address in this field. The PD’s IP
address must be set to the same network segment as the
managed switch.
Interval Time (10~300s) Set the length of time a ping request should be issued to the
PD. Interval time range is from 10 to 300 seconds.
322 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Object Description
Retry Count (1~5) Set the number of times that system retry pings to the PD.
For example, if the count is set to 2, and the system retries
pings to the PD and the PD doesn’t respond continuously, the
PoE port will be reset.
Action Set the action to be applied if the PD does not respond. Action
selections are as follows:
PD Reboot: The system resets the PoE port that connected
the PD.
Reboot & Alarm: The system resets the PoE port and issues
an alarm message via syslog, SMTP.
Alarm: The system issues an alarm message via syslog,
SMTP.
Reboot Time (30~180s) Set the PoE device rebooting time. This is useful due to the
different rebooting time of PoE devices. The PD alive check is
not a defining standard, so the PoE device doesn’t report
reboot complete information to the managed switch. As a
result, the user must ensure how long the PD reboot takes, and
then set the time value in this column.
The system checks the PD again according to the reboot time.
If you cannot determine the precise booting time, we suggest
set it to a longer time.
Buttons
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 323
Chapter 4: Web configuration
Port identification
Configure each port response time for TruVision Navigator in the port identification
Configuration page.
LCD
LCD management
The LCD Management page provides options for managing the LCD control panel.
324 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Chapter 4: Web configuration
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
LCD Enable: Enables the LCD panel.
Disable: Disables the LCD panel.
Touch Screen Enable: Enables the touch screen feature.
Disable: Disables the touch screen feature.
Backlight Timeout Enable: Enables the panel backlight timeout time feature.
Disable: Disables the panel backlight timeout time feature.
Backlight Timeout Time Sets the backlight timeout duration. Default setting is 300
seconds.
Read Only Mode Enable: Enables the read only mode feature to prevent the
changing of settings from the LCD panel.
Disable: Disables the read only mode feature.
Default Screen Choose the screen to display on the LCD after the system has
booted up. Saving a configuration will result in the new screen
appearing the next time the system reboots.
Time Interval Input the time interval for page refresh. Shorter time intervals
cause a high CPU load, so we suggest using the default setting
of 10 seconds.
Color Scheme Replace the LCD background color. Save the configuration and
reboot the system to use this feature.
Pin Number This is a password used for security purposes. When the
configuration changed from the LCD panel, the user must input
this password so that the configuration will be saved and
executed.
Buttons
• Click Apply to apply changes.
• Click Reset to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 325
Chapter 5
Switch operation
Address table
The managed switch is implemented with an address table. This address table is
composed of many entries. Each entry is used to store the address information of some
node in network, including MAC address, port number, etc. This information comes
from the learning process of the managed switch.
Learning
When one packet comes in from any port, the managed switch records the source
address, port number, and the other related information in the address table. This
information will be used to decide either forwarding or filtering for future packets.
Forwarding and filtering
When one packet comes from a port of the managed switch, it checks the destination
address as well as the source address learning. The managed switch will look up the
address table for the destination address. If not found, this packet will be forwarded to
all the other ports except the port that this packet comes from. These ports will transmit
this packet to the network it is connected to. If found, and the destination address is
located at a different port from the one this packet comes from, the managed switch will
forward this packet to the port where this destination address is located according to
the information from address table. But, if the destination address is located at the
same port that this packet comes in, then this packet will be filtered, thereby increasing
the network throughput and availability.
Store-and-forward
Store-and-Forward is a packet-forwarding technique. A Store-and-Forward switch
stores the incoming frame in an internal buffer and completes error checking before
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 326
Chapter 5: Switch operation
transmission. Therefore, no erroneous packets will occur, making it the best choice
when a network needs efficiency and stability.
The managed switch scans the destination address from the packet header and
searches the routing table provided for the incoming port and forwards the packet if
required. The fast forwarding makes the switch attractive for connecting servers directly
to the network, thereby increasing throughput and availability. However, the switch is
most commonly used to segment existing hubs, which nearly always improves the
overall performance. Ethernet switching can be easily configured in any Ethernet
network environment to significantly boost bandwidth using conventional cabling and
adapters.
Owing to the learning function of the managed switch, the source address and
corresponding port number of each incoming and outgoing packet are stored in a
routing table. This information is subsequently used to filter packets whose destination
address is on the same segment as the source address. This confines network traffic to
its respective domain and reduces the overall load on the network.
The managed switch performs Store-and-Forward, preventing errorneous packets and
reducing the re-transmission rate. No packet loss will occur.
Auto-negotiation
The STP ports on the managed switch have built-in auto-negotiation. This technology
automatically sets the best possible bandwidth when a connection is established with
another network device (usually at Power On or Reset). This is done by detecting the
modes and speeds of both devices that are connected. Both the 10BASE-T and
100BASE-TX devices can connect with the port in either half- or full-duplex mode.
1000BASE-T can be only connected in full-duplex mode.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 327
Chapter 6
PoE overview
What is PoE?
PoE is an abbreviation for Power over Ethernet. PoE technology permits a system to
pass data and electrical power safely on an Ethernet UTP cable. The IEEE standard for
PoE technology requires a category 5 cable or higher for high power PoE levels, but
can operate with a category 3 cable for low power levels. Power is supplied in common
mode over two or more of the differential pairs of wires found in Ethernet cables and
comes from a power supply within a PoE-enabled networking device such as an
Ethernet switch or can be injected into a cable run with a mid-span power supply.
The original IEEE 802.3af-2003 PoE standard provides up to 15.4 W of DC power
(minimum 44 VDC and 350 mA) to each device. Only 12.95 W is assured to be
available at the powered device as some power dissipates in the cable. The updated
IEEE 802.3at-2009 PoE standard, also known as PoE+ or PoE plus, provides up to
25.5 W of power. The 2009 standard prohibits a powered device from using all four
pairs for power. The 802.3af/802.3at standards define two types of source equipment:
Mid-Span – A mid-span device is placed between a legacy switch and the powered
device (PD). Mid-span taps the unused wire pairs 4/5 and 7/8 to carry power. The other
four pairs are for data transmission.
End-Span – An end-span device connects directly to the PD. End-span taps the 1/2
and 3/6 wire pairs.
PoE system architecture
The PoE specification typically requires two devices: the Powered Source Equipment
(PSE) and the PD. The PSE is either an end-span or a mid-span, while the PD is a
PoE-enabled terminal such as an IP phone, Wireless LAN, etc. Power can be delivered
over data pairs or spare pairs of standard CAT-5 cabling.
Powered Source Equipment (PSE)
A PSE is a device such as a switch that provides (sources) power on the Ethernet
cable. The maximum allowed continuous output power per cable in IEEE 802.3af is
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 328
Chapter 6: PoE overview
15.40 W. A later specification, IEEE 802.3at, offers 25.50 W. When the device is a
switch, it is commonly called an end-span, although IEEE 802.3af refers to it as
endpoint. Otherwise, if it's an intermediary device between a non PoE capable switch
and a PoE device, it's called a mid-span. An external PoE injector is a mid-span device.
Powered Device (PD)
A PD is a device powered by a PSE and thus consumes energy. Examples include
wireless access points, IP phones, and IP cameras. Many powered devices have an
auxiliary power connector for an optional external power supply. Depending on the PD
design, some, none, or all power can be supplied from the auxiliary port, with the
auxiliary port sometimes acting as backup power in case of PoE-supplied power failure.
How power is transferred through the cable
A standard CAT5 Ethernet cable has four twisted pairs, but only two of these are used
for 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX. The specification allows two options for using these
cables for power.
The spare pairs are used. The diagram below shows the pair on pins 4 and 5
connected together and forming the positive supply, and the pair on pins 7 and 8
connected and forming the negative supply. (either polarity can be used).
The data pairs are used. Since Ethernet pairs are transformer-coupled at each end, it is
possible to apply DC power to the center tap of the isolation transformer without
interrupting the data transfer. In this mode of operation, the pair on pins 3 and 6 and the
pair on pins 1 and 2 can be of either polarity.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 329
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
This chapter contains information to help you solve issues. If the managed switch is not
functioning properly, ensure that it was set up according to the instructions in this
manual.
Issue
Solution
The l
ink LED does not illuminate
Check the cable connection and remove duplex
mode of the managed switch.
Some stations cannot talk to other stations
located on the other port
. Check the VLAN settings,
trunk settings, or port
enabled/disabled status.
Poor performance
Check the full duplex status of the managed
switch. If the managed switch is set to full
duplex and the partner is set to half duplex,
then the performance will be poor. Also check
the in/out rate of the port.
T
he managed switch doesn't connect to the
network
1. Check the LNK/ACT LED on the managed
switch.
2. Try another port on the managed switch.
3. Make sure the cable is installed properly.
4. Make sure the cable is the right type.
5. Turn off the power. After a while, turn on
power again.
The 1000BASE
-T port link LED illuminates, but
the traffic is irregular
Check that the attached device is not set to
dedicate full duplex. Some devices use a
physical or software switch to change duplex
modes. Auto-negotiation may not recogni
ze this
type of full-duplex setting.
The managed switch does not power up.
1. Check to ensure that the AC power cord is
not faulty and that it is inserted properly.
2. If the cord is inserted correctly, replace the
power cord.
3. Check that the AC power
source is working
by connecting a different device in place of
the switch.
4. If that device does not work, check the AC
power
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 330
Appendix A
Networking connection
PoE RJ45 port pin assignments
Pin Number RJ45 Power Assignment
1 Power +
2 Power +
3 Power -
6 Power -
RJ45 port pin assignments – 1000Mbps, 1000BASE-T
Pin number
MDI MDI-X
1
BI_DA+ BI_DB+
2
BI_DA- BI_DB-
3
BI_DB+ BI_DA+
4
BI_DC+ BI_DD+
5
BI_DC- BI_DD-
6
BI_DB- BI_DA-
7
BI_DD+ BI_DC+
8
BI_DD- BI_DC-
Implicit implementation of the crossover function within a twisted-pair cable, or at a
wiring panel, while not expressly forbidden, is beyond the scope of this standard.
10/100Mbps, 10/100BASE-TX
When connecting the managed switch to another Fast Ethernet switch, a bridge, or a
hub, a straight or crossover cable is necessary. Each port of the managed switch
supports auto-MDI (Media Dependent Interface)/MDI-X (Media Dependent Interface
Cross) detection. This makes it possible to directly connect the managed switch to any
Ethernet device without making a crossover cable. The following table and diagram
show the standard RJ45 receptacle/ connector and their pin assignments.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 331
Appendix A: Networking connection
Pin number
MDI MDI-X
1
Tx + (transmit) Rx + (receive)
2
Tx - (transmit) Rx - (receive)
3
Rx + (receive) Tx + (transmit)
4, 5
Not used
6
Rx + (receive) Tx + (transmit)
7, 8
Not used
The standard RJ45 receptacle/connector:
2 1 3 6
1
2
3
6
2 1
3 6
There are eight wires on a standard UTP/STP cable and each wire is color-coded. The
following shows the pin allocation and the color of the straight cable and crossover
cable connection:
Straight Cable SIDE 1 SIDE 2
SIDE 1 1 = White / Orange
2 = Orange
3 = White / Green
4 = Blue
5 = White / Blue
6 = Green
7 = White / Brown
8 = Brown
1 = White / Orange
2 = Orange
3 = White / Green
4 = Blue
5 = White / Blue
6 = Green
7 = White / Brown
8 = Brown
SIDE 2
Crossover Cable SIDE 1 SIDE 2
SIDE 1 1 = White / Orange
2 = Orange
3 = White / Green
4 = Blue
5 = White / Blue
6 = Green
7 = White / Brown
8 = Brown
1 = White / Green
2 = Green
3 = White / Orange
4 = Blue
5 = White / Blue
6 = Orange
7 = White / Brown
8 = Brown
SIDE 2
Ensure that connected cables are with the same pin assignment and color as the above
diagram before deploying the cables into the network.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
332 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Glossary
A
ACE
Access Control Entry. It describes access permission
associated with a particular ACE ID.
There are three ACE frame types (Ethernet Type, ARP, and
IPv4) and two ACE actions (permit and deny). ACE also
contains many detailed, different parameter options that are
available for individual application.
ACL
Access Control List. It is the list table of ACEs, containing
access control entries that specify individual users or groups
permitted or denied to spec
ific traffic objects, such as a process
or a program. Each accessible traffic object contains an
identifier to its ACL. The privileges determine if there are
specific traffic object access rights.
In networking, the ACL refers to a list of service ports or
network
services that are available on a host or server, each with a list of
hosts or servers permitted or denied to use the service. ACL
can generally be configured to control inbound traffic, and in this
context, they are similar to firewalls.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 333
There are three web pages associated with the manual ACL
configuration:
Access Control List (ACL): The web page shows the ACEs in
a prioritized way, highest (top) to lowest (bottom). The table is
empty by default. An ingress frame will only get a hit on one
ACE even though there are more matching ACEs. The first
matching ACE will take action (permit/deny) on that frame and a
counter associated with that ACE is incremented. An ACE can
be associated with a policy, one ingress port, or any ingress
port (the whole switch). If an ACE policy is created then that
policy can be associated with a group of ports under the "Ports"
web page. There are number of parameters that can be
configured with an ACE. Read the web page help text to obtain
further information for each of them. The maximum number of
ACEs is 64.
ACL Port Configuration: The ACL ports configuration is used
to assign a Policy ID to an ingress port. This is useful to group
ports to obey the same traffic rules. Traffic policy is created
under the "Access Control List" page. You can you also set up
specific traffic properties (Action / Rate Limiter / Port copy, etc.)
for each ingress port. They will only apply if the frame gets past
the ACE matching without getting matched, however. In that
case a counter associa
ted with that port is incremented. See the
web page help text for each specific port property.
ACL Rate Limiters: This page can be used to configure the
rate limiters. There can be 15 different rate limiters, each
ranging from 1-1024K packets per second. The "Ports" and
"Access Control List" web pages can be used to assign a Rate
Limiter ID to the ACE(s) or ingress port(s).
AES
Advanced Encryption Standard. The encryption key protocol is
applied in 802.1i standard to improve WLAN security. It is an
encryption standard by the U.S. government, which will replace
DES and 3DES. AES has a fixed block size of 128 bits and a
key size of 128, 192, or 256 bits.
AMS
Auto Media Select. AMS is used for dual media ports (ports
supporting both copper (CU) and fiber (SFP) cables. AMS
automatically determines if a SFP or a CU cable is inserted and
switches to the corresponding media. If both SFP and CU
cables are inserted, the port will select the prefered media.
APS
Automatic Protection Switching. This protocol is used to secure
that switching is done bidirectionally in the two ends of a
protection group, as defined in G.8031
Aggregation
Using multiple ports in parallel to increase the link speed
beyond the limits of a port and to increase the redundancy for
higher availability.
ARP
Address Resolution Protocol. It is a protocol used to convert an
IP address into a physical address, such as an Ethernet
address. ARP allows a host to communicate with other hosts
when only the Internet address of its neighbors is know
n. Before
using IP, the host sends a broadcast ARP request containing
the Internet address of the desired destination system.
334 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
ARP inspection
ARP i
nspection is a secure feature. Several types of attacks can
be launched against a host or devices connected to Layer 2
networks by "poisoning" the ARP caches. This feature is used
to block such attacks. Only valid ARP requests and responses
can go through the switch device.
Auto negotiation
Auto-negotiation is the process where two different devices
establish t
he mode of operation and the speed settings that can
be shared by those devices for a link
C
CC
Continuity Check. This is a MEP functionality that is able to
detect loss of continuity in a network by transmitting CCM
frames to a peer MEP.
CCM
Continuity Check Message. This is an OAM frame transmitted
from a MEP to its peer MEP and used to implement CC
functionality.
CDP
Cisco Discovery Protocol
D
DEI
Drop Eligible Indicator. It is a 1-bit field in the VLAN tag.
DES
Data Encryption Standard. It provides a complete description
of a mathematical algorithm for encrypting (enciphering) and
decrypting (deciphering) binary coded information.
Encrypting data converts it to an unintelligible form called
cipher. Decrypting cipher converts the data back to its original
form called plaintext. The algorithm described in this standard
specifies both enciphering and deciphering operations which
are based on a binary number called a key.
DHCP
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. It is a protocol used for
assigning dynamic IP addresses to devices on a network.
DHCP is used by networked computers (clients) to obtain IP
addresses and other parameters such as the default gateway,
subnet mask, and IP addresses of DNS servers from a DHCP
server.
The DHCP server ensures that all IP addresses are unique.
For example, no IP address is assigned to a second client
while the first client's assignment is valid (its lease has not
expired). Therefore, IP address pool management is done by
the server and not by a human network administrator.
Dynamic addressing simplifies network administration because
the software keeps track of IP addresses rather than requiring
an administrator to manage the task. This means that a new
computer can be added to a network without the hassle of
manually assigning it a unique IP address.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 335
DHCP Relay
DHCP Relay is used to forward and transfer DHCP messages
between the clients and the server when they are not on the
same subnet domain.
The DHCP option 82 enables a DHCP relay agent to insert
specific information into DHCP request packets when
forwarding
client DHCP packets to a DHCP server and remove
the specific information from DHCP reply packets when
forwarding server DHCP packets to a DHCP client. The DHCP
server can use this information to implement IP address or
other assignment policies. Specifically, the option works by
setting two sub-options: Circuit ID (option 1) and Remote ID
(option2). The Circuit ID sub-option is supposed to include
information specific to which circuit the request came in on.
The Remote ID sub-option is designed to carry information
relating to the remote host end of the circuit.
The definition of Circuit ID in the switch is 4 bytes in length and
the format is "vlan_id" "module_id" "port_no". The parameter of
"vlan_id" is the first two bytes represent the VLAN ID. The
param
eter of "module_id" is the third byte for the module ID (in
standalone switch it always equal 0, in switch it means switch
ID). The parameter of "port_no" is the fourth byte and it means
the port number.
The Remote ID is 6 bytes in length, and the value is equal to
the DHCP relay agent’s MAC address.
DHCP Snooping
DHCP snooping is used to block an intruder on the untrusted
ports of the switch device when it tries to intervene by injecting
a bogus DHCP reply packet into a legitimate conversation
between the DHCP client and server.
DNS
Domain Name System. It stores and associates many types of
information with domain names. Most importantly, DNS
translates human-friendly domain names and computer
hostnames into computer-friendly IP addresses. For example,
the domain name www.example.com might translate to
192.168.0.1.
DoS
Denial of Service. In a denial-of-service (DoS) attack, an
attacker attempts to prevent legitimate users from accessing
information or services. By targeting network sites or a
network
connection, an attacker may be able to prevent network users
from accessing email, web sites, online accounts (banking,
etc.), or other services that rely on the affected computer.
Dotted Decimal Notation
Dotted Decimal Notation refers to a method of writing IP
addresses using decimal numbers and dots as separators
between octets.
An IPv4 dotted decimal address has the form x.y.z.w, where x,
y, z, and w are decimal numbers between 0 and 255.
DSCP
Differentiated Services Code Point. It is a field in the header of
IP packets for packet classification purposes.
E
EEE
Energy Efficient Ethernet as defined in IEEE 802.3az.
EPS
Ethernet Protection Switching as defined in ITU/T G.8031.
336 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
Ethernet Type
Ethernet Type, or EtherType, is a field in the Ethernet MAC
header, defined by the Ethernet networking standard. It is used
to indicate which protocol is being transported in an Ethernet
frame.
F
FTP
File Transfer Protocol. It is a transfer protocol that uses the
Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and provides file writing
and reading. It also provides directory service and security
features.
Fast Leave
IGMP snooping Fast Leave processing allows the switch to
remove an interface from the forwarding-table entry without
first sending out group specific queries to the interface. The
VLAN interface is pruned from the multicast tree for the
multicast group specified in the original leave message. Fast-
leave processing ensures optimal bandwidth management for
all hosts on a switched network, even when multiple multicast
groups are in use simultaneously.
H
HTTP
Hypertext Transfer Protocol. It is a protocol that used to
transfer or convey information on the World Wide Web
(WWW).
HTTP defines how messages are formatted and transmitted,
and what actions Web servers and browsers should take in
response to various commands. For example, entering a URL
in a browser actually sends an HTTP command to the web
server directing it to fetch and transmit the requested web
page. The other main standard that controls how the World
Wide Web works is HTML, which covers how web pages are
formatted and displayed.
Any web server machine contains, in addition to the web page
files it can serve, an HTTP daemon, a program that is
designed to wait for HTTP requests and handle them when
they arrive. The web browser is an HTTP client, sending
requests to server machines. An HTTP client initiates a request
by establishing a Transmission Control Protocol (TCP)
connection to a particular port on a remote host (port 80 by
default). An HTTP server listening on that port waits for the
client to send a request message.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 337
HTTPS
Hypertext Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer. It is
used to indicate a secure HTTP connection.
HTTPS provides authentication and encrypted communication
and is widely used on the World Wide Web for security-
sensitive communication such as payment transactions and
corporate logons.
HTTPS is the use of Secure Socket Layer (SSL) as a sublayer
under its regular HTTP application layering. HTTPS uses port
443 instead of HTTP port 80 in its interactions with the lower
layer, TCP/IP. SSL uses a 40-bit key size for the RC4 stream
encryption algorithm, which is considered an adequate degree
of encryption for commercial exchange.
I
ICMP
Internet Control Message Protocol. It is a protocol that
generated the error response, diagnostic, or routing purposes.
ICMP messages generally contain information about routing
difficulties or simple exchanges such as time-stamp or echo
transactions. For example, the PING command uses ICMP to
test an Internet connection.
IEEE 802.1X
IEEE 802.1X is an IEEE standard for port-based Network
Access Control. It provides authentication to devices attached
to a LAN port, establishing a point-to-point connection or
preventing access from that port if authentication fails. With
802.1X, access to all switch ports can be centrally controlled
from a server, which means that authorized users can use the
same credentials for authentication from any point within the
network.
IGMP
Internet Group Management Protocol. It is a communications
protocol used to manage the membership of Internet Protocol
multicast groups. IGMP is used by IP hosts and adjacent
multicast routers to establish multicast group memberships. It
is an integral part of the IP multicast specification, like ICMP for
unicast connections. IGMP can be used for online video and
gaming, and allows more efficient use of resources when
supporting these uses.
IGMP Querier
A router sends IGMP query messages onto a particular link.
This router is called the Querier.
IMAP
Internet Message Access Protocol. It is a protocol for email
clients to retrieve email messages from a mail server.
IMAP is the protocol that IMAP clients use to communicate
with the servers, and SMTP is the protocol used to transport
mail to an IMAP server.
The current version of the IMAP is IMAP4. It is similar to Post
Office Protocol version 3 (POP3), but offers additional and
more complex features. For example, the IMAP4 protocol
leaves email messages on the server rather than downloading
them to a computer. To remove your messages from the
server, use the mail client to generate local folders, copy
messages to the local hard drive, and then delete and expunge
the messages from the server.
338 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
IP
Internet Protocol. It is a protocol used for communicating data
across a internet network.
IP is a "best effort" system, which means that no packet of
information sent over it is assured to reach its destination in the
same condition it was sent. Each device connected to a Local
Area Network (LAN) or Wide Area Network (WAN) is given an
IP address, and this IP address is used to identify the device
uniquely among all other devices connected to the extended
network.
The most widely used version of the Internet protocol is IPv4,
which has 32-bit IP addresses allowing for over four billion
unique addresses. There is a substantial movement to adopt a
new version of the Internet Protocol, IPv6, which would have
128-bit IP
addresses. This number can be represented roughly
by a three with thirty-nine zeroes after it. However, IPv4 is still
the protocol of choice for most of the Internet.
IPMC
IP MultiCast
IP Source Guard
IP Source Guard is a secure feature used to restrict IP traffic
on DHCP snooping untrusted ports by filtering traffic based on
the DHCP Snooping Table or manually configured IP Source
Bindings. It helps prevent IP spoofing attacks when a host tries
to spoof and use the IP address of another host.
L
LACP
LACP is an IEEE 802.3ad standard protocol. The Link
Aggregation Control Protocol, allows bundling
several physical
ports together to form a single logical port.
LLDP
Link Layer Discovery Protocol is an IEEE 802.1ab standard
protocol.
The LLDP specified in this standard allows stations attached
to
an IEEE 802 LAN to advertise to other stations attached to the
same IEEE 802 LAN the major capabilities provided by the
system incorporating that station, the management address or
addresses of the entity or entities that provide management of
those capabilities, and the identification of the station’s point o
f
attachment to the IEEE 802 LAN required by those
management entity or entities. The information distributed via
this protocol is stored by its recipients in a standard
Management Information Base (MIB), making it possible for
the information to be accessed by a Network Management
System (NMS) using a management protocol such as the
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).
LLDP
-MED LLDP-
MED is an extendsion of IEEE 802.1ab and is defined by
the telecommunication industry association (TIA-1057).
LOC
LOC is an acronym for Loss Of Connectivity
and is detected by
a MEP and indicates lost connectivity in the network. Can be
used as a switch criteria by EPS.
M
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 339
MAC Table
Switching of frames is based upon the DMAC address
contained in the frame. The switch builds up a table that maps
MAC addresses to switch ports for knowing which ports the
frames should go to based upon the DMAC address in the
frame. This table contains bo
th static and dynamic entries. The
static entries are configured by the network administrator if the
administrator wants to do a fixed mapping between the DMAC
address and switch ports.
The frames also contain a MAC address (SMAC address ),
that shows the MAC address of the equipment sending the
frame. The SMAC address is used by the switch to
automatically update the MAC table with these dynamic MAC
addresses. Dynamic entries are removed from the MAC table if
no frame with the corresponding SMAC address have been
seen after a configurable age time.
MEP
MEP is an acronym for Maintenance Entity Endpoint and is an
endpoint in a Maintenance Entity Group (ITU-T Y.1731).
MD5
Message-Digest algorithm 5. MD5 is a message digest
algorithm using a cryptographic hash function with a 128-bit
hash value. It was designed by Ron Rivest in 1991. MD5 is
officially defined in RFC 1321 – The MD5 Message-Digest
Algorithm.
Mirroring
For debugging network problems or monitoring network traffic,
the switch system can be configured to mirror frames from
multiple ports to a mirror port. In this context, mirroring a frame
is the same as copying the frame.
Both incoming (source) and outgoing (destination) frames can
be mirrored to the mirror port
MLD
Multicast Listener Discovery for IPv6. MLD is used by IPv6
routers to discover multicast listeners on a directly attached
link, much as IGMP is used in IPv4. The protocol is embedded
in ICMPv6 instead of using a separate protocol.
MVR
Multicast VLAN Registration. It is a protocol for Layer 2 (IP)
networks that enables multicast traffic from a source VLAN to
be shared with subscriber VLANs.
The main reason for using MVR is to save bandwidth by
preventing duplicate multicast streams being sent in the core
network, instead the stream(s) are received on the MVR-
VLAN
and forwarded to the VLANs where hosts have requested
it/them.
N
NAS
Network Access Server. The NAS is meant to act as a gateway
to guard access to a protected source. A clien
t connects to the
NAS, and the NAS connects to another resource asking
whether the client's supplied credentials are valid. Based on
the answer, the NAS then allows or disallows access to the
protected resource. An example of a NAS implementation is
IEEE 802.1X.
340 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
NetBIOS
Network Basic Input/Output System. It is a program that allows
applications on separate computers to communicate within a
Local Area Network (LAN), and it is not supported on a Wide
Area Network (WAN).
The NetBIOS provides each computer in the network both a
NetBIOS name and an IP address corresponding to a different
host name, as well as the session and transport services
described in the Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) model.
NFS
Network File System. It allows hosts to mount partitions on a
remote system and use them as though they are local file
systems.
NFS allows the system administrator to store resources in a
central location on the network, providing authorized users
continuous access to them, which means NFS supports
sharing of files, printers, and other resources as persistent
storage over a computer network.
NTP
Network Time Protocol. A network protocol for synchronizing
the clocks of computer systems. NTP uses UDP (datagrams)
as the transport layer.
O
OAM
Operation Administration and Maintenance. It is a protocol
described in ITU-T Y.1731 used to implement carrier Ethernet
functionality. MEP functionality like CC and RDI is based on
this.
Optional TLVs
A LLDP frame contains multiple TLVs
For some TLVs it is configurable if the switch includes the TLV
in the LLDP frame. These TLVs are known as optional TLVs. If
an optional TLVs is disabled, the corresponding information is
not included in the LLDP frame.
OUI
Organizationally Unique I
dentifier. An OUI address is a globally
unique identifier assigned to a vendor by IEEE. You can
determine which vendor a device belongs to according to the
OUI address that forms the first 24 bits of a MAC address.
P
PCP
Priority Code Point. It is a 3-
bit field storing the priority level for
the 802.1Q frame. It is also known as User Priority.
PD
Powered Device. In a PoE> system the power is delivered from
a PSE ( power sourcing equipment ) to a remote device. The
remote device is called a PD.
PHY
Physical Interface Transceiver. It is the device that implements
the Ethernet physical layer (IEEE-802.3).
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 341
Ping
Ping is a program that sends a series of packets over a
network or the Internet to a specific computer in order to
generate a response from that computer. The other computer
responds with an acknowledgment that it received the packets.
Ping was created to verify whether a specific computer on a
network or the Internet exists and is connected.
Ping uses Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) packets.
The ping request is the packet from the origin computer, and
the ping reply is the packet response from the target.
Policer
A policer can limit the bandwidth of received frames. It is
located in front of the ingress queue.
POP3
POP3 is an acronym for Post Office Protocol version 3. It is a
protocol for email clients to retrieve email messages from a
mail server.
POP3 is designed to delete mail on the server as soon as the
user has downloaded it. However, some implementations all
ow
users or an administrator to specify that mail be saved for
some period of time. POP can be thought of as a "store-and-
forward" service.
An alternative protocol is Internet Message Access Protocol
(IMAP). IMAP provides the user with more capabilities for
retaining email on the server and for organizing it in folders on
the server. IMAP can be thought of as a remote file server.
POP and IMAP deal with the receiving of email and are not to
be confused with the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP).
You send email with SMTP, and a mail handler receives it on
the recipient's behalf. Then, the mail is read using POP or
IMAP.
PPPoE
Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet. It is a network protocol
for encapsulating Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) frames inside
Ethernet frames (Wikipedia). It is used mainly with ADSL
services where individual users connect to the ADSL
transceiver (modem) over Ethernet and in plain Metro Ethernet
networks.
Private VLAN
In a private VLAN, communication between ports in that private
VLAN is not permitted. A VLAN can be configured as a private
VLAN.
PTP
Precision Time Protocol. A network protocol for synchronizing
the clocks of computer systems.
Q
QCE
QoS Control Entry. It describes the QoS class associated with
a particular QCE ID.
There are six QCE frame types: Ethernet Type, VLAN,
UDP/TCP Port, DSCP, TOS, and Tag Priority. Frames can be
classified by one of four different QoS classes: "Low",
"Normal," "Medium," and "High" for individual application.
342 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
QCL
QoS Control List. It is the list table of QCEs, containing QoS
control entries that classify a specific QoS class on specific
traffic objects.
Each accessible traffic object contains an identifier to its QCL.
The privileges determine specific traffic object to specific QoS
class.
QL
QL In SyncE is the Quality Level of a given clock source. This
is received on a port in a SSM indicating the quality of the
clock received in the port.
QoS
Quality of Service. It is a method to guarantee a bandwidth
relationship between individual applications or protocols.
A communications network transports a multitude of
applications and data, including high-quality video and delay-
sensitive data such as real-time voice. Networks must provide
secure, predictable, measurable, and sometimes guaranteed
services, and QoS can help to provide this.
QoS C
lass Every incoming frame is classified to a QoS class, which is
used throughout the device for providing queuing, scheduling,
and congestion control guarantees to the frame according to
what was configured for that specific QoS class. There is a one
to one mapping between QoS class, queue, and priority. A
QoS class of 0 (zero) has the lowest priority.
R
RARP
Reverse Address Resolution Protocol. It is a protocol that is
used to obtain an IP address for a given hardware address,
such as an Ethernet address. RARP is the complement of
ARP.
RADIUS
Remote Authentication Dial In User Service. It is a networking
protocol that provides centralized access, authorization, and
accounting management for people or computers to connect
to
and use a network service.
RDI
Remote Defect Indication. It is a OAM functionallity that is used
by a MEP to indicate defect detected to the remote peer MEP.
Router Port
A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that connects it to
the Layer 3 multicast device.
RSTP
In 1998, the IEEE with document 802.1w introduced an
evolution of STP: the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol, which
provides for faster spanning tree convergence after a topology
change. Standard IEEE 802.1D-2004 now incorporates RSTP
and obsoletes STP, while at the same time being backwards-
compatible with STP.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 343
S
SAMBA
Samba is a program running under UNIX-like operating
systems that provides seamless integration between UNIX and
Microsoft Windows machines. Samba acts as file and print
servers for Microsoft Windows
and other SMB client machines.
Samba uses the Server Message Block (SMB) protocol and
Common Internet File System (CIFS), which is the underlying
protocol used in Microsoft Windows networking.
Samba can be installed on a variety of operating system
platforms, including Linux and most common Unix platforms.
Samba can also register itself with the master browser on the
network so that it would appear in the listing of hosts in
Microsoft Windows "Neighborhood Network".
SHA
SHA is an acronym for Secure Hash Algorithm. It designed by
the National Security Agency (NSA) and published by the NIST
as a U.S. Federal Information Processing Standard. Hash
algorithms compute a fixed-length digital representation
(known as a message digest) of an input data sequence (the
message) of any length.
Shaper
A shaper can limit the bandwidth of transmitted frames. It is
located after the ingress queues.
SMTP
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol. It is a text-based protocol that
uses the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and provides a
mail service modeled on the FTP file transfer service. SMTP
transfers mail messages between systems and notifications
regarding incoming mail.
SNAP
SubNetwork Access Protocol (SNAP). It is a mechanism for
multiplexing, on networks using IEEE 802.2 LLC, more
protocols than can be distinguished by the 8-bit 802.2 Service
Access Point (SAP) fields. SNAP supports identifying protocols
by Ethernet type field values; it also supports vendor-private
protocol identifiers.
SNMP
Simple Network Management Protocol. It is part of the
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)
protocol for network management. SNMP allows diverse
network objects to participate in a network management
architecture. It enables network management systems to learn
network problems by receiving traps or change notices from
network devices implementing SNMP.
SNTP
Simple Network Time Protocol. A network protocol for
synchronizing the clocks of computer systems. SNTP uses
UDP (datagrams) as a transport layer.
SPROUT
Stack Protocol using Routing Technology. An advanced
protocol for almost instantaneous discovery of topology
changes within a stack as well as election of a master switch.
SPROUT also calculates parameters for setting up each switch
to perform the shortest path forwarding within the stack.
344 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
SSID
Service Set Identifier. It is a name used to identify the
particular 802.11 wireless LANs to which a user wants to
attach. A client device will receive broadcast messages from all
access points within range advertising their SSIDs, and can
choose one to connect to based on pre-configuration, or by
displaying a list of SSIDs in range and asking th
e user to select
one.
SSH
Secure Shell. It is a network protocol that allows data to be
exchanged using a secure channel between two networked
devices. The encryption used by SSH provides confidentiality
and integrity of data over an insecure network. The goal of
SSH was to replace the earlier rlogin, TELNET and rsh
protocols, which did not provide strong authentication or
guarantee confidentiality.
SSM
SSM In SyncE is an abbreviation for Synchronization Status
Message and contains a QL indication.
STP
Spanning Tree Protocol is an OSI layer-2 protocol which
ensures a loop free topology for any bridged LAN. The original
STP protocol is now obsoleted by RSTP.
SyncE
Synchronous Ethernet. This functionality is used to make a
network 'clock frequency' synchronized. Not to be confused
with real time clock synchronized (IEEE 1588).
T
TACACS+
Terminal Acess Controller Access Control System Plus. It is a
networking protocol that provides access control for routers,
network access servers, and other networked computing
devices via one or more centralized servers. TACACS+
provides separate authentication, authorization, and
accounting services.
Tag Priority
Tag Priority is a 3-bit field storing the priority level for the
802.1Q frame.
TCP
Transmission Control Protocol. It is a communications protocol
that uses the Internet Protocol (IP) to exchange messages
between computers.
The TCP protocol guarantees reliable and in-order delivery of
data from sender to receiver and distinguishes data f
or multiple
connections by concurrent applications (for example, Web
server and email server) running on the same host.
The applications on networked hosts can use TCP to create
connections to one another. It is known as a connection-
oriented protocol, which means that a connection is
established and maintained until such time as the message or
messages to be exchanged by the application programs at
each end have been exchanged. TCP is responsible for
ensuring that a message is divided into the packets that IP
manages and for reassembling the packets back into the
complete message at the other end.
Common network applications that use TCP include the World
Wide Web (WWW), email, and File Transfer Protocol (FTP).
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 345
TELNET
TELetype NETwork. It is a terminal emulation protocol that
uses the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and provides a
virtual connection between TELNET server and TELNET client.
TELNET enables the client to control the server and
communicate with other servers on the network. To start a
Telnet session, the client user must log in to a server by
entering a valid username and password. Then, the client user
can enter commands through the Telnet program just as if they
were entering commands directly on the server console.
TFTP
Trivial File Transfer Protocol. It is transfer protocol that uses
the User Datagram Protocol (UDP) and provides file writing
and reading, but it does not provides directory service and
security features.
ToS
Type of Service. It is implemented as the IPv4 ToS priority
control. It is fully decoded to determine the priority from the 6-
bit ToS field in the IP header. The most significant six bits of
the ToS field are fully decoded into 64 possibilities, and the
singular code that results is compared against the
corresponding bit in the IPv4 ToS priority control bit (0~63).
TLV
Type Length Value. A LLDP frame can contain multiple pieces
of information. Each of these pieces of information is known as
a TLV.
TKIP
Temporal Key Integrity Protocol. It is used in WPA to replace
WEP with a new encryption algorithm. TKIP comprises the
same encryption engine and RC4 algorithm defined for WEP.
The key used for encryption in TKIP is 128 bits and changes
the key used for each packet.
U
UDP
User Datagram Protocol. It is a communications protocol that
uses the Internet Protocol (IP) to exchange the messages
between computers.
UDP is an alternative to the Transmission Control Protocol
(TCP) that uses the Internet Protocol (IP). Unlike TCP, UDP
does not provide the service of dividing a message into packet
datagrams, and UDP doesn't provide reassembling and
sequencing of the packets. This means that the application
program that uses UDP must be able to make sure that the
entire message has arrived and is in the right order. Network
applications that want to save processing time because they
have very small data units to exchange may prefer UDP to
TCP.
UDP provides two services not provided by the IP layer. It
provides port numbers to help distinguish different user
requests and, optionally, a checksum capability to verify that
the data arrived intact.
Common network applications that use UDP include the
Domain Name System (DNS), streaming media applications
such as IPTV, Voice over IP (VoIP), and Trivial File Transfer
Protocol (TFTP).
346 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual
UPnP
Universal Plug and Play. The goals of UPnP are to allow
devices to connect seamlessly and to simplify the
implementation of networks in the home (data sharing,
communications, and entertainment) and in corporate
environments for simplified installation of computer
components
User Priority
User Priority is a 3-bit field that stores the priority level for the
802.1Q frame.
V
VLAN
Virtual LAN. A method to restrict communication between
switch ports. VLANs can be used for the following applications:
VLAN unaware switching: This is the default configuration.
All ports are VLAN
unaware with Port VLAN ID 1 and members
of VLAN 1. This means that MAC addresses are learned in
VLAN 1, and the switch does not remove or insert VLAN tags.
VLAN aware switching: This is based on the IEEE 802.1Q
standard. All ports are VLAN aware. Ports connected to VLAN
aware switches are members of multiple VLANs and transmit
tagged frames. Other ports are members of one VLAN, set up
with this Port VLAN ID, and transmit untagged frames.
Provider switching: This is also known as Q-in-Q switching.
Ports connected to subscribers are VLAN unaware, members
of one VLAN, and set up with this unique Port VLAN ID. Ports
connected to the service provider are VLAN aware, members
of multiple VLANs, and set up to tag all frames. Untagged
frames received on a subscriber port are forwarded to the
provider port with a single VLAN tag. Tagged frames received
on a subscriber port are forwarded to the provider port with a
double VLAN tag.
VLAN ID
VLAN ID is a 12-bit field specifying the VLAN to which the
frame belongs.
Voice
VLAN Voice VLAN is VLAN configured specially for voice traffic. By
adding the ports with voice devices attached to voice VLAN,
QoS-related configuration for voice data can be performed,
ensuring the transmission priority of voice traffic and voice
quality.
W
WEP
Wired Equivalent Privacy. WEP is a deprecated algorithm to
secure IEEE 802.11 wireless networks. Wireless networks
broadcast messages using radio, so are more susceptible to
eavesdropping than wired networks. When introduced, WEP
was intended to provide data
confidentiality comparable to that
of a traditional wired network (Wikipedia).
Wi
-Fi Wireless Fidelity. It is meant to be used generically when
referring of any type of 802.11 network, whether 802.11b,
802.11a, dual-band, etc. The term is promulgated by the Wi-Fi
Alliance.
NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual 347
WPA
Wi-Fi Protected Access. It was created in response to several
serious weaknesses researchers had found in the previous
system , Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP). WPA implements
the majority of the IEEE 802.11i
standard, and was intended as
an intermediate measure to take the place of WEP while
802.11i was prepared. WPA is specifically designed to also
work with pre-WPA wireless network interface cards (through
firmware upgrades), but not necessarily with first generation
wireless access points. WPA2 implements the full standard,
but will not work with some older network cards (Wikipedia).
WPA
-PSK Wi-Fi Protected Access - Pre Shared Key. WPA was designed
to enhance the security of wireless networks. There are two
types
of WPA: enterprise and personal. Enterprise is meant for
use with an IEEE 802.1X authentication server, which
distributes different keys to each user. Personal WPA utilizes
a
less scalable 'pre-shared key' (PSK) mode, where every
allowed computer is given the same passphrase. In PSK
mode, security depends on the strength and secrecy of the
passphrase. The design of WPA is based on a Draft 3 of the
IEEE 802.11i standard.
WPA
-Radius Wi-Fi Protected Access - Radius (802.1X authentication
server). WPA
was designed to enhance the security of wireless
networks. There are two flavors of WPA: enterprise and
personal. Enterprise is meant for use with an IEEE 802.1X
authentication server, which distributes different keys to each
user. Personal WPA utilizes less scalable 'pre-shared key'
(PSK) mode, where every allowed computer is given the same
passphrase. In PSK mode, security depends on the strength
and secrecy of the passphrase. The design of WPA is based
on a Draft 3 of the IEEE 802.11i standard.
WPS
Wi-Fi Protected Setup. It is a standard for easy and secure
establishment of a wireless home network. The goal of the
WPS protocol is to simplify the process of connecting any
home device to the wireless network.
WRED
Weighted Random Early Detection. It is an active queue
management mechanism that provides preferential treatment
of higher priority frames when traffic builds up within a queue.
A frame's DP level is used as input to WRED. A higher DP
level assigned to a frame results in a higher probability that
the
frame is dropped during times of congestion.
WTR
Wait To Restore. This is the time a fail on a resource has to be
'not active' before restoration back to this (previously failing)
resource.
348 NS4702-24P-4X Managed Switch User Manual

Navigation menu